Pro Piping Help Topics

®

Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire™ 2.0 Pro/PIPING™ (Spec-Driven) Help Topic Collection

Parametric Technology Corporation

Copyright © 2005 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved. User and training documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary Advanced Surface Design, Behavioral Modeling, CADDS, Computervision, CounterPart, Create Collaborate Control, EPD, EPD.Connect, Expert Machinist, Flexible Engineering, GRANITE, HARNESSDESIGN, Info*Engine, InPart, MECHANICA, Optegra, Parametric Technology, Parametric Technology Corporation, PartSpeak, PHOTORENDER, Pro/DESKTOP, Pro/E, Pro/ENGINEER, Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, Product First, Product Development Means Business, Product Makes the Company, PTC, the PTC logo, PT/Products, Shaping Innovation, Simple Powerful Connected, The Way to Product First, and Windchill. Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary 3DPAINT, Associative Topology Bus, AutobuildZ, CDRS, CV, CVact, CVaec, CVdesign, CV-DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker, EDAcompare, EDAconduit, DataDoctor, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, Distributed Services Manager, DIVISION, e/ENGINEER, eNC Explorer, Expert Framework, Expert MoldBase, Expert Toolmaker, FlexPDM, FlexPLM, Harmony, InterComm, InterComm Expert, InterComm EDAcompare, InterComm EDAconduit, ISSM, KDiP, Knowledge Discipline in Practice, Knowledge System Driver, ModelCHECK, MoldShop, NC Builder, POLYCAPP, Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING, Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COLLABORATE, Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONCEPT, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER, Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEM-POST, Pro/FICIENCY, Pro/FLY-THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS, Pro/INTERFACE, Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View, Pro/MOLDESIGN, Pro/NC-ADVANCED, Pro/NC-CHECK, Pro/NC-MILL, Pro/NC-POST, Pro/NC-SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC-TURN, Pro/NC-WEDM, Pro/NC-Wire EDM, Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT, Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN-TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL, Pro/SURFACE, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, ProductView, PTC Precision, Routed Systems Designer, Shrinkwrap, The Product Development Company, Validation Manager, Wildfire, Windchill DynamicDesignLink, Windchill PartsLink, Windchill PDMLink, Windchill ProjectLink, and Windchill SupplyLink. Patents of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary Registration numbers and issue dates follow. Additionally, equivalent patents may be issued or pending outside of the United States. Contact PTC for further information. GB2366639B 13-October-2004 GB2363208 25-August-2004 (EP/DE/GB)0812447 26-May-2004 GB2365567 10-March-2004 (GB)2388003B 21-January-2004 6,665,569 B1 16-December-2003 GB2353115 10-December-2003

GB2353376 05-November-2003 GB2354686 15-October-2003 6,545,671 B1 08-April-2003 GB2354685B 18-June-2003 GB2354683B 04-June-2003 6,608,623 B1 19-August-2003 6,473,673 B1 29-October-2002

5,140,321 5,423,023 4,310,615 4,310,614 4,310,614 5,297,053 5,513,316

18-August-1992 05-June-1990 21-December-1998 30-April-1996 22-April-1999 22-March-1994 30-April-1996

6,625,607 B1 23-September-2003 6,580,428 B1 17-June-2003 GB2354684B 02-July-2003 GB2384125 15-October-2003 GB2354096 12-November-2003 GB2354924 24-September-2003 6,608,623 B1 19-August-2003

GB2354683B 04-June-2003 6,447,223 B1 10-Sept-2002 6,308,144 23-October-2001 5,680,523 21-October-1997 5,838,331 17-November-1998 4,956,771 11-September-1990 5,058,000 15-October-1991

5,689,711 18-November-1997 5,506,950 09-April-1996 5,428,772 27-June-1995 5,850,535 15-December-1998 5,557,176 09-November-1996 5,561,747 01-October-1996 (EP)0240557 02-October-1986

Third-Party Trademarks Adobe, Acrobat, Distiller, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Advanced ClusterProven, ClusterProven, and the ClusterProven design are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and other countries and are used under license. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not responsible for the operation of this software product. AIX is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation. Allegro, Cadence, and Concept are registered trademarks of Cadence Design Systems, Inc. Apple, Mac, Mac OS, and Panther are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. CADAM and CATIA are registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes. COACH is a trademark of CADTRAIN, Inc. CYA, iArchive, HOTbackup, and Virtual StandBy are trademarks or registered trademarks of CYA Technologies, Inc. DOORS is a registered trademark of Telelogic AB. FLEXlm is a trademark of Macrovision Corporation. Geomagic is a registered trademark of Raindrop Geomagic, Inc. EVERSYNC, GROOVE, GROOVEFEST, GROOVE.NET, GROOVE NETWORKS, iGROOVE, PEERWARE, and the interlocking circles logo are trademarks of Groove Networks, Inc. Helix is a trademark of Microcadam, Inc. HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft America, Inc. HP-UX is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. I-DEAS, Metaphase, Parasolid, SHERPA, Solid Edge, TeamCenter, UG-NX, and Unigraphics are trademarks or registered trademarks of UGS Corp. InstallShield is a registered trademark and service mark of InstallShield Software Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. I-Run and ISOGEN are registered trademarks of Alias Ltd. LINUX is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. MainWin and Mainsoft are trademarks of Mainsoft Corporation. MatrixOne is a trademark of MatrixOne, Inc. Mentor Graphics and Board Station are registered trademarks and 3D Design, AMPLE, and Design Manager are trademarks of Mentor Graphics Corporation. MEDUSA and STHENO are trademarks of CAD Schroer GmbH. Microsoft, Microsoft Project, Windows, the Windows logo, Windows NT, Windows XP, Visual Basic, and the Visual Basic logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Moldflow is a registered trademark of Moldflow Corporation. Netscape and the Netscape N and Ship's Wheel logos are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. OrbixWeb is a registered trademark of IONA Technologies PLC. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. RAND is a trademark of RAND Worldwide. Rational Rose is a registered trademark of Rational Software Corporation. RetrievalWare is a registered trademark of Convera Corporation. RosettaNet is a trademark and Partner Interface Process and PIP are registered trademarks of RosettaNet, a nonprofit organization. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, Solaris, UltraSPARC, Java and all Java based marks, and “The Network is the Computer” are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. 3Dconnexion is a registered trademark of Logitech International S.A. TIBCO is a registered trademark and TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise Message Service, TIBCO Rendezvous, TIBCO TurboXML, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are the trademarks or registered trademarks of TIBCO Software Inc. in the United States and other countries. WebEx is a trademark of WebEx Communications, Inc. Third-Party Technology Information Certain PTC software products contain licensed third-party technology: Rational Rose 2000E is copyrighted software of Rational Software Corporation. RetrievalWare is copyrighted software of Convera Corporation. VisTools library is copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI.

HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America, Inc. I-Run and ISOGEN are copyrighted software of Alias Ltd. Xdriver is copyrighted software of 3Dconnexion, Inc, a Logitech International S.A. company. G-POST is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of Intercim. VERICUT is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of CGTech. Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR is powered by Moldflow technology. MainWin Dedicated Libraries are copyrighted software of Mainsoft Corporation. DFORMD.DLL is copyrighted software from Compaq Computer Corporation and may not be distributed. LightWork Libraries are copyrighted by LightWork Design 1990–2001. Visual Basic for Applications and Internet Explorer is copyrighted software of Microsoft Corporation. Parasolid is © UGS Corp. TECHNOMATIX is copyrighted software and contains proprietary information of Technomatix Technologies Ltd. TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise Message Service, TIBCO Rendezvous, TIBCO TurboXML, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are provided by TIBCO Software Inc. Technology "Powered by Groove" is provided by Groove Networks, Inc. Technology "Powered by WebEx" is provided by WebEx Communications, Inc. Oracle 8i run-time, Oracle 9i run-time, and Oracle 10g run-time are Copyright © 2002–2004 Oracle Corporation. Oracle programs provided herein are subject to a restricted use license and can only be used in conjunction with the PTC software they are provided with. Adobe Acrobat Reader and Adobe Distiller are copyrighted software of Adobe Systems Inc. and are subject to the Adobe End-User License Agreement as provided by Adobe with those products. METIS, developed by George Karypis and Vipin Kumar at the University of Minnesota, can be researched at http://www.cs.umn.edu/~karypis/metis. METIS is © 1997 Regents of the University of Minnesota. Windchill Info*Engine Server contains IBM XML Parser for Java Edition and the IBM Lotus XSL Edition. Pop-up calendar components Copyright © 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Apache Server, Tomcat, Xalan, Xerces, and Jakarta are technologies developed by, and are copyrighted software of, the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org) – their use is subject to the terms and limitations at: http://www.apache.org. UnZip (© 1990-2001 Info-ZIP, All Rights Reserved) is provided “AS IS” and WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. For the complete Info-ZIP license see http://www.info-zip.org/doc/LICENSE. The Java™ Telnet Applet (StatusPeer.java, TelnetIO.java, TelnetWrapper.java, TimedOutException.java), Copyright © 1996, 97 Mattias L. Jugel, Marcus Meißner, is redistributed under the GNU General Public License. This license is from the original copyright holder and the Applet is provided WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. You may obtain a copy of the source code for the Applet at http://www.mud.de/se/jta (for a charge of no more than the cost of physically performing the source distribution), by sending e-mail to [email protected] or [email protected]—you are allowed to choose either distribution method. Said source code is likewise provided under the GNU General Public License. GTK+ - The GIMP Toolkit is licensed under the GNU Library General Public License (LGPL). You may obtain a copy of the source code at http://www.gtk.org, which is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. zlib software Copyright © 1995-2002 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler. OmniORB is distributed under the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License and GNU Library General Public License. The Java Getopt.jar file, copyright 1987-1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Java Port copyright 1998 by Aaron M. Renn ([email protected]), is redistributed under the GNU LGPL. You may obtain a copy of the source code at http://www.urbanophile.com/arenn/hacking/download.html. The source code is likewise provided under

the GNU LGPL. CUP Parser Generator Copyright ©1996-1999 by Scott Hudson, Frank Flannery, C. Scott Ananian– used by permission. The authors and their employers disclaim all warranties with regard to this software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall the authors or their employers be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages, or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software. This product may include software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org): Copyright © 1998-2003 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. This product may include cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). ImageMagick software is Copyright © 1999-2005 ImageMagick Studio LLC, a nonprofit organization dedicated to making software imaging solutions freely available. ImageMagick is freely available without charge and provided pursuant to the following license agreement: http://www.imagemagick.org/script/license.php. Gecko and Mozilla components are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL. Software distributed under the Mozilla Public License (MPL) is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied. See the MPL for the specific language governing rights and limitations. Mozilla Japanese localization components are subject to the Netscape Public License Version 1.1 (at http://www.mozilla.org/NPL). Software distributed under the Netscape Public License (NPL) is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied (see the NPL for the rights and limitations that are governing different languages). The Original Code is Mozilla Communicator client code, released March 31, 1998 and the Initial Developer of the Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by Netscape are Copyright © 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Contributors: Kazu Yamamoto ([email protected]), Ryoichi Furukawa ([email protected]), Tsukasa Maruyama ([email protected]), Teiji Matsuba ([email protected]). iCal4j is Copyright © 2005, Ben Fortuna, All rights reserved. Redistribution and use of iCal4j in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: (i) Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer; (ii) Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution; and (iii) Neither the name of Ben Fortuna nor the names of any other contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. iCal4j SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Software may contain the Independent JPEG Group's JPEG software. This software is Copyright © 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Software may contain libpng, Copyright © 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, which is distributed according to the disclaimer and license (as well as the list of Contributing Authors) at http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/src/libpng-LICENSE.txt.

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT’95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN’95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT’88) or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN’87), as applicable. 081505 Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA

Table of Contents Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) ..................................................................... 1 Using Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) ......................................................... 1 About Pro/PIPING and Piping Systems ......................................................... 1 Tailoring the Pro/PIPING Working Environment........................................... 1 About Pro/PIPING Design Modes ................................................................. 2 To Access the Specification-Driven Design Mode............................................ 2 About the Pro/PIPING User Interface (Spec-Driven) ....................................... 3 PIPING Menu (Spec-Driven) ....................................................................... 3 Piping System Tree ................................................................................... 4 About the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven).............................................. 4 Viewing the Piping System Tree............................................................. 5 Pipeline Selection and Display Features .................................................. 5 Customize the Pro/PIPING Piping System Tree......................................... 5 To Access the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven) ........................................ 5 To Select Pipelines (Spec-Driven) ............................................................. 6 To Display or Blank Pipelines (Spec-Driven) ............................................... 6 To Display Centerlines or Solids (Spec-Driven) ........................................... 6 To Highlight Pipelines (Spec-Driven) ......................................................... 7 To Reorganize Pipelines (Spec-Driven) ...................................................... 7 To Modify the Column Display (Spec-Driven).............................................. 7 To Display the Piping System Tree from the Active Assembly ....................... 8 To Display the Pipeline Component View.................................................... 8 To Display the Piping Spool View .............................................................. 8 To Create or Delete Pipeline Labels from the Piping System Tree .................. 8 To Display or Hide Pipeline Labels............................................................. 8 To Create or Delete Pipe Solids from the Piping System Tree........................ 9 To Display or Hide Pipe Solids .................................................................. 9 To Create or Delete Pipe Insulation Quilts .................................................. 9 To Display or Hide Pipe Insulation Quilts.................................................... 9

vii

Table of Contents

About Customizing the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven)...........................10 Configuring Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) ................................................10 About Configuring Pro/PIPING (Spec-Driven) ...............................................10 ISOGEN Configuration Options ................................................................10 To Set Pro/PIPING Configuration Options (Spec-Driven) ................................11 Specifying Thumb Wheel Increments ..........................................................11 isogen_attribute_map_file (Spec-Driven) ....................................................12 isogen_endtype_map_file (Spec-Driven) .....................................................12 isogen_mandatory_attr_file (Spec-Driven) ..................................................12 isogen_nominal_size_map_file (Spec-Driven) ..............................................13 isogen_output_files_dir (Spec-Driven) ........................................................13 isogen_pcf_filename_format (Spec-Driven) .................................................13 isogen_symbol_map_file (Spec-Driven) ......................................................13 pipe_3D_bend_theor_int_pts (Spec-Driven) ................................................13 pipe_extend_dim_scheme (Spec-Driven) ....................................................14 pipe_solid_centerline (Spec-Driven) ...........................................................14 pipe_solid_label_format (Spec-Driven)........................................................14 pipe_update_pre_20_int_pts (Spec-Driven).................................................14 pipeline_assembly_library_dir (Spec-Driven) ...............................................15 pipeline_assembly_name_format (Spec-Driven) ...........................................15 pipeline_label_format (Spec-Driven)...........................................................15 pipeline_solid_start_part_name (Spec-Driven) .............................................16 pipeline_spool_label_format (Spec-Driven)..................................................16 pipeline_start_assembly_name (Spec-Driven)..............................................16 piping_wildfire_convert (Spec-Driven) ........................................................17 piping_appearance_map_file (Spec-Driven) .................................................17 piping_bolt_nut_select_file (Spec-Driven) ...................................................17 piping_design_method (Spec-Driven) .........................................................17 piping_end_compatibility_file (Spec-Driven) ................................................18 piping_fitt_angle_tolerance (Spec-Driven) ...................................................18 piping_fitt_category_map_file (Spec-Driven) ...............................................18 viii

Table of Contents

piping_fitt_library_dir (Spec-Driven)...........................................................18 piping_insulation_dir_file (Spec-Driven) ......................................................18 piping_joint_fitting_clearance (Spec-Driven)................................................19 piping_joint_fitting_offset (Spec-Driven) .....................................................19 piping_manufacture_dir_file (Spec-Driven) ..................................................19 piping_material_file (Spec-Driven) .............................................................19 piping_mcat_dir (Spec-Driven) ..................................................................19 piping_mcat_dir_file (Spec-Driven) ............................................................20 piping_min_bolting_clearance (Spec-Driven) ...............................................20 piping_project_data_dir (Spec-Driven)........................................................20 piping_schematic_driven...........................................................................20 piping_schematic_xml_dir (Spec-Driven) ....................................................20 piping_spec_dir_file (Spec-Driven) .............................................................21 piping_system_tree_format (Spec-Driven) ..................................................21 piping_thumb_wheel_increment (Spec-Driven) ............................................21 piping_thumb_wheel_ratio_inc (Spec-Driven) ..............................................22 units_system_dic_file ...............................................................................22 Setting Up Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) .................................................22 About Setting Up Specification-Driven Pro/PIPING ........................................22 Piping Specification Database ....................................................................23 About the Piping Specification Database ...................................................23 How the Piping Specification Database Works .........................................24 Master Catalog Files...............................................................................24 About Master Catalog Files...................................................................24 To Modify Master Catalog Files .............................................................25 Piping Master Catalog Directory File ......................................................26 Example: Piping Master Catalog Directory File ........................................28 Pipe Master Catalog File ......................................................................30 Example: Pipe Master Catalog File ........................................................30 Fitting Master Catalog File....................................................................31 Example: Fitting Master Catalog File......................................................32 ix

Table of Contents

Bolt Nut Selection File .........................................................................34 Example: Bolt Nut Selection File ...........................................................35 Bolt Nut Master Catalog File .................................................................37 Example: Bolt Nut Master Catalog File ...................................................37 Piping Material File..............................................................................38 Example: Piping Material File................................................................39 Pipe Outer Diameter File......................................................................39 Example: Pipe Outer Diameter File........................................................40 Pipe Thickness File..............................................................................41 Example: Pipe Thickness File................................................................41 Pipe Manufacture Directory File ............................................................42 Example: Pipe Manufacture Directory File ..............................................43 Bend File ...........................................................................................43 Example: Bend File .............................................................................44 Bending Spring Back and Elongation File................................................45 Example: Bending Spring Back and Elongation File..................................45 Bend Machine File...............................................................................46 Example: Bend Machine File.................................................................48 Miter File ...........................................................................................48 Example: Miter File .............................................................................49 End Compatibility File..........................................................................50 Example: End Compatibility File............................................................50 Insulation File ....................................................................................50 Example: Insulation File ......................................................................51 Tip: Pipe Insulation Definition...............................................................52 Appearance Map File ...........................................................................53 Combined Size Code File......................................................................53 Example: Combined Size Code File .......................................................54 Tip: Defining Size Codes ......................................................................54 Units System File................................................................................54 Example: Units System File..................................................................55 x

Table of Contents

Project Data Files ..................................................................................56 About Project Data Files ......................................................................56 About Specification Directory Files ........................................................57 Example: Specification Directory File .....................................................59 To Create a Specification Directory File..................................................59 About Auto-Selection Files ...................................................................60 Example: Auto-Selection File................................................................62 To Create an Auto-Selection File ...........................................................68 To Create an Auto-Selection Pipe Record ...............................................68 To Create an Auto-Selection Fitting Record ............................................70 To Create an Auto-Selection Assembly Fitting Record ..............................73 Preview Fitting Graphics ......................................................................74 Size Tables ........................................................................................75 Format Keywords ...............................................................................76 About Insulation Directory Files ............................................................78 Example: Insulation Directory File.........................................................79 To Create an Insulation Directory File ....................................................79 To Modify Project Data Files .................................................................80 About the Fitting Category Map File.......................................................81 Example: Fitting Category Map File .......................................................83 To Map an Icon File.............................................................................83 Fitting Categories ...............................................................................84 Creating Fitting Category Icons ............................................................84 Fitting Library Files ................................................................................85 About Fitting Library Files ....................................................................85 To Set Up a Library Component ............................................................85 Fitting Library Creation........................................................................85 The ANSI Standard ........................................................................... 106 Update Model ........................................................................................ 117 About Update Model ............................................................................ 117 To Change and Update Colors ............................................................... 118 xi

Table of Contents

To Change and Update Corner Types ..................................................... 119 To Change and Update Material Codes ................................................... 120 To Change and Update Stock Number Formats ........................................ 121 To Change and Update Outside Diameters .............................................. 122 To Change and Update Wall Thickness ................................................... 123 To Change and Update Material Density ................................................. 124 To Change and Update Miter Parameters ................................................ 124 To Change and Update Bend Parameters ................................................ 125 To Change and Update Bend Machine Parameters .................................... 126 Tip: Updating Multiple Changes ............................................................. 126 Design Rule Parameters .......................................................................... 127 About Design Rule Parameters (Spec-Driven).......................................... 127 To Define Design Rule Parameters (Spec-Driven)..................................... 127 Bend Arc Threshold (Spec-Driven) ......................................................... 128 Example: Bend Arc Threshold (Spec-Driven) ........................................... 129 Design Rules Checking ......................................................................... 129 About Design Rules Checking ............................................................. 129 To Check for Design Rule Violations (Spec-Driven) ................................ 129 Displaying Missing Fitting Violations .................................................... 131 Displaying Segment Violations............................................................ 131 Displaying Bend Violations ................................................................. 132 Displaying Branch Violations .............................................................. 132 Checking Design Rules ...................................................................... 133 Bend Tables .......................................................................................... 137 About Bend Tables (Spec-Driven) .......................................................... 137 Bend Table Menu .............................................................................. 138 To Define a Bend Table (Spec-Driven).................................................... 138 Defining Bend Tables (Spec-Driven)....................................................... 138 To Modify a Bend Table (Spec-Driven).................................................... 140 To Delete a Bend Table (Spec-Driven).................................................... 140 To Show a Bend Table (Spec-Driven) ..................................................... 140 xii

Table of Contents

To Read a Bend Table to a Model (Spec-Driven) ...................................... 140 To Write a Bend Table to a File (Spec-Driven) ......................................... 141 Bend Table Data (Spec-Driven) ............................................................. 141 Formula Equations (Spec-Driven) .......................................................... 141 Formula Equation Rules ..................................................................... 142 Conversion Equations (Spec-Driven) ...................................................... 142 Conversion Equation Variables............................................................ 143 Conversion Equation Rules................................................................. 143 To Assign a Bend Table (Spec-Driven).................................................... 143 Set Display............................................................................................ 144 About Setting Display Options ............................................................... 144 To Set Display Options ......................................................................... 144 Specification-Driven Piping Assemblies ........................................................ 144 About Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven) ..................................................... 144 To Make a Piping Assembly Active (Spec-Driven)........................................ 145 About Converting Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven) ..................................... 145 Assembly Conversion Processes ............................................................ 145 To Convert Non Specification-Driven Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven)........... 146 To Convert Specification-Driven Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven) ................. 148 Converting Piping Assemblies to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Format ................... 148 Specification-Driven Pipelines ..................................................................... 149 About Specification-Driven Pipelines ......................................................... 149 To Create a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ........................................................... 149 To Delete a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ........................................................... 151 To Rename a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ......................................................... 152 Specification-Driven Pipeline Merging........................................................ 152 About Merging Pipelines ....................................................................... 152 To Merge Pipelines............................................................................... 152 Workflow for Creating a New Pipeline by Merging Pipelines........................ 153 Workflow for Merging Pipelines.............................................................. 155 Selecting End Components ................................................................... 155 xiii

Table of Contents

Considerations for Merging Pipelines ...................................................... 156 Specification Break................................................................................. 157 About Specification Break ..................................................................... 157 To Insert a Specification Break .............................................................. 157 Example: Inserting a Specification Break ................................................ 158 Suppressing Pipelines ............................................................................. 158 To Suppress a Pipeline (Spec-Driven)..................................................... 158 To Resume a Suppressed Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ..................................... 159 Piping Layers ......................................................................................... 159 About Piping Layers (Spec-Driven)......................................................... 159 To View Piping Layers (Spec-Driven)...................................................... 159 Specification-Driven Pipeline Routing ........................................................... 159 About Specification-Driven Pipeline Routing ............................................... 159 About Setting a Start Point ...................................................................... 160 Route Pipe Menu .................................................................................... 160 To Set a Start Point ................................................................................ 161 To Route a Pipe in Specification-Driven Mode ............................................. 162 To Route a Pipeline by Referencing a Pipe Edge.......................................... 162 Reference Edges for Routing .................................................................... 164 Associativity Between the Routed Pipeline and the Reference Pipeline ........... 165 Routing Flexible Hoses ............................................................................ 166 About Routing Flexible Hoses in Specification-Driven Piping ...................... 166 To Enable Routing of Flexible Hoses in Specification-Driven Piping ............. 166 To Use the PIPE ENV Menu ................................................................... 167 Specification-Driven Routing with Extend .................................................. 167 About Specification-Driven Routing with Extend....................................... 167 To Extend a Pipeline Using a Csys Reference ........................................... 168 To Extend a Pipeline Using a Csys Axis Reference .................................... 169 To Extend a Pipeline by Referencing an Edge, Axis, or Segment................. 171 To Extend a Pipeline by Referencing a Plane or a Point ............................. 172 Routing with Equipment Nozzles............................................................... 174 xiv

Table of Contents

About Equipment Nozzles ..................................................................... 174 To Route a Pipeline from an Equipment Nozzle ........................................ 174 To Route from a Port ........................................................................... 174 To Route to a Port ............................................................................... 175 Checking Pipe and Port Sizes ................................................................ 175 Specification-Driven Routing with Follow ................................................... 175 About Specification Driven Routing with Follow........................................ 175 To Route a Pipeline with Follow ............................................................. 175 To Redefine Pipe Follow References ....................................................... 176 Branch Routing ...................................................................................... 176 About Branch Routing .......................................................................... 176 To Set a Branch Start Point................................................................... 176 To Route a Branch to a Pipeline ............................................................. 178 About Stub-in Branches........................................................................ 179 Considerations for Creating a Point on a Pipe Segment From Either End...... 179 Points on a Segment .............................................................................. 180 About Adding Points to Existing Routing ................................................. 180 To Add Dynamic Points to Existing Routing ............................................. 180 To Add Static Points to Existing Routing ................................................. 181 Specification-Driven Pipeline Insertion and Modification ............................... 181 About Inserting and Modifying a Pipeline in Another Pipeline ..................... 181 To Insert and Modify a Pipeline in Another Pipeline .................................. 182 Selecting Pipeline Bounds ..................................................................... 183 Selecting the First Segment .................................................................. 185 Propagating the Inserted From Pipeline in the To Pipeline Assembly ........... 185 Specification-Driven Piping Flow Direction ................................................. 186 About Specification-Driven Piping Flow Direction...................................... 186 To Create the Pipeline Model for a Pipeline with Branch Series ................... 187 Default Flow Direction Determination Rules............................................. 187 Example: Default Flow Direction for Pipeline with Branch Series................. 188 To Create the Pipeline Model for a Pipeline with Loop Series ...................... 189 xv

Table of Contents

Example: Default Flow Direction for Pipeline with Loop Series.................... 189 To Display the Flow Direction of a Pipeline .............................................. 190 Displaying or Hiding the Flow Direction of a Pipeline................................. 190 Example: Displaying the Flow Direction of a Specified Pipeline Series ......... 191 Flow Direction Violations ...................................................................... 191 Suppressing and Resuming Pipe Segments ................................................ 192 About Suppressing and Resuming Pipe Segments .................................... 192 To Suppress and Resume Pipe Segments................................................ 192 Example: Suppressing and Resuming Pipe Segments ............................... 193 Specification-Driven Fitting Insertion ........................................................... 195 About Specification-Driven Fitting Insertion ............................................... 195 About Specification Override during Fitting Insertion ................................... 195 To Insert Fittings ................................................................................... 195 Example: Overriding Specifications during Fitting Insertion .......................... 199 About Branch Fittings ............................................................................. 200 Inserting Trimmed Elbows ....................................................................... 200 About Inserting Trimmed Elbows ........................................................... 200 To Convert Elbows to Trimmed Elbows ................................................... 200 To Insert a Trimmed Elbow by Specifying a Selection Name ...................... 201 To Insert a Trimmed Elbow by Selecting the Nearest Standard Elbow ......... 201 To Insert Elbows at all Corners with Trim................................................ 202 To Insert Elbows at All Corners without Trim ........................................... 202 To Insert Elbow Fittings at all Corners by Specifying a Selection Name ....... 203 Inserting Group Fittings .......................................................................... 203 About Inserting Group Fittings .............................................................. 203 To Insert Group Fittings ....................................................................... 204 Example: Overriding Specifications during Group Fitting Insertion.............. 208 Key Fitting.......................................................................................... 208 Group Fitting Rules .............................................................................. 209 End Type Compatibility Checking ........................................................... 209 Modifying Fittings ................................................................................... 209 xvi

Table of Contents

About Modifying Fittings (Spec-Driven)................................................... 209 To Delete Fittings ................................................................................ 210 To Delete Group Fittings....................................................................... 210 Example: Deleting Group Fittings .......................................................... 211 To Redefine Specification-Driven Fittings ................................................ 213 About Specification Override during Fitting Replacement........................... 213 To Replace Fittings .............................................................................. 213 Tip: Modifying and Deleting Valve Numbers ............................................ 214 Fitting Overlap Checking ...................................................................... 215 Specification-Driven Pipeline Modification ..................................................... 215 About Pipeline Modification ...................................................................... 215 To Modify Pipe Segments ........................................................................ 216 To Modify a Corner Type ......................................................................... 216 Tip: Modifying Corner Types .................................................................... 217 Tip: Changing the Bend Radius of a Pipeline .............................................. 218 To Modify the Bend Parameters................................................................ 218 To Reverse Flow Direction ....................................................................... 219 Flow Direction Violations ......................................................................... 220 To Modify the Line Shape of a Flexible Hose............................................... 220 To Edit a Pipeline ................................................................................... 220 To Replace a Bend with an Elbow ............................................................. 222 Specification-Driven Pipe Fabrication ........................................................... 222 About Fabricating Pipes........................................................................... 222 Cutting Pipe Pieces ................................................................................. 223 About Cutting Pipe Pieces ..................................................................... 223 To Cut a Pipe at a Specified Location Using Placement.............................. 223 To Cut a Pipe at a Specified Location Using a Plane Reference ................... 224 To Cut Pipe at a Specified Location Using a Pipe Reference........................ 225 To Cut Pipe at a Single Location Using a Fitting Port Reference .................. 226 Selecting the Reference Fitting Port ....................................................... 227 Changing the Selected Reference Fitting Port ....................................... 229 xvii

Table of Contents

Relocating the Selected Reference Fitting Port ...................................... 229 To Cut Pipe at Multiple Locations Based on Pipe Stock or User-Specified Length .......................................................................... 230 To Cut Pipe at Multiple Locations with Automatic Joint Fitting Insertion ....... 230 To Cut Parallel Pipes at Locations Identical to the Reference Pipe Run......... 231 To Cut Parallel Pipes at Specified Interval Length..................................... 232 Tip: Selecting a Reference Pipe Run for Cutting Parallel Pipes .................... 233 Example: Parallel Pipe Piece Cutting ...................................................... 234 Checking the Clearance between the Pipe Cuts with Flanged Fittings .......... 235 Staggering of Cuts With Joint Fitting ................................................... 236 Assigning FLANGE_OD as a Dimension or Part Parameter ......................... 237 To Cut Pipes Associated With a Block ..................................................... 237 Example: Block Boundary Based Pipe Piece Cutting.................................. 238 Using Joint Fittings .............................................................................. 241 For Parallel Pipe Cuts ........................................................................ 241 For Pipe Cuts at Block Boundary Intersection........................................ 241 Assigning a Weld Type ......................................................................... 242 To Delete a Pipe Piece Cut .................................................................... 242 Generating Pipe Spools ........................................................................... 243 About Spool Generation ....................................................................... 243 To Create a Spool Label for a Pipeline or a Spool Segment ........................ 243 To Modify a Spool Label for a Pipeline or a Spool Segment ........................ 244 To Delete a Spool Label for a Pipeline or a Spool Segment ........................ 245 About Simplified Spool Representation ................................................... 245 To Display a Simplified Spool ................................................................ 246 Pipe Insulation....................................................................................... 246 About Pipeline Insulation (Spec-Driven).................................................. 246 To Assign Insulation during Pipeline Creation (Spec-Driven) ...................... 246 To Modify Insulation Assigned to a Pipeline (Spec-Driven)......................... 247 To Delete Insulation (Spec-Driven) ........................................................ 248 Using the Model Tree to Delete Insulation ............................................ 248

xviii

Table of Contents

To Report Insulation Information (Spec-Driven) ...................................... 249 About Assigning Insulation to Part of a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ................... 249 To Assign Insulation to Part of a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ............................ 249 To Redefine Insulation Assigned to a Part of a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) ......... 251 Using the Model Tree to Redefine Insulation ......................................... 251 Creating Pipe Solids................................................................................ 253 About Pipe Solids ................................................................................ 253 To Create or Erase a Pipe Solid ............................................................. 254 Example: Creating Pipe Solids and Insulation Quilts ................................. 255 Using the Piping System Tree to Create and Erase Pipe Solids ................ 256 Schematic-Driven Pipeline Modeling ............................................................ 257 About Schematic-Driven Pipeline Modeling................................................. 257 About Associating an XML File with a Pipeline............................................. 258 About Routed Systems Designer Component Properties in Schematic-Driven Pipeline Modeling ................................................................................... 258 Pipelines ............................................................................................ 258 Equipment and Nozzles ........................................................................ 258 Fittings .............................................................................................. 259 Branches............................................................................................ 260 To Designate Schematic Information......................................................... 260 Designating Equipment, Nozzles, Fittings, and Branches.............................. 261 About Routing a Pipeline Using Schematic Information ................................ 261 About Inserting a Fitting Using Schematic Information ................................ 262 About Replacing a Fitting Using Schematic Information ............................... 263 Specification-Driven Pipe Drawing ............................................................... 263 About Pipe Drawings (Spec-Driven) .......................................................... 263 Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN) ................................................... 263 About Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN) (Spec-Driven)................... 263 To Generate an Isometric Drawing (Spec-Driven) .................................... 264 Component Material Description (Spec-Driven)........................................ 266 Creating Pipe Component Information (Spec-Driven) ............................... 267

xix

Table of Contents

Example: ISOGEN Identifiers on a Component (Spec-Driven) .................... 269 ISOGEN Attribute Map File (Spec-Driven) ............................................... 269 Example: ISOGEN Attribute Map File (Spec-Driven) ................................. 272 ISOGEN Symbol Map File (Spec-Driven) ................................................. 276 Default Symbol Mapping .................................................................... 276 Symbol Key Selection........................................................................ 277 Example: ISOGEN Symbol Map File (Spec-Driven) ................................... 278 ISOGEN Endtype Map File (Spec-Driven) ................................................ 278 Default End Type Mapping ................................................................. 279 Example: ISOGEN Endtype Map File (Spec-Driven) .................................. 279 ISOGEN Nominal Size Map File (Spec-Driven) ......................................... 280 Default Nominal Size Mapping ............................................................ 281 Example: ISOGEN Nominal Size Map File (Spec-Driven) ........................... 281 ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute File (Spec-Driven) ...................................... 285 Example: ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute File (Spec-Driven) ........................ 285 ISOGEN Error Log File (Spec-Driven) ..................................................... 286 Example: ISOGEN Error Log File (Spec-Driven) ....................................... 286 Installation Drawing Generation ............................................................... 286 About Installation Drawing Generation ................................................... 286 Example: Piping Installation Drawing ..................................................... 287 To Specify Display Style for Pipe Segments............................................. 287 Pipe Display Style................................................................................ 288 To Select a Slope Symbol for Pipe Segments ........................................... 290 Pipe Slope Symbol............................................................................... 291 To Annotate Installation Drawing........................................................... 292 Attribute and Parameter Specification File............................................... 295 User Object Type .............................................................................. 295 Attribute and Parameter Names.......................................................... 296 Factor ............................................................................................. 296 Format ............................................................................................ 296 Style............................................................................................... 298 xx

Table of Contents

Layer .............................................................................................. 298 Example: Attribute and Parameter Specification File................................. 298 AEC Object Type File............................................................................ 298 User Object Type .............................................................................. 299 AEC Object Type............................................................................... 299 Example: AEC Object Type File.............................................................. 299 Pipe Spool Drawing Generation ................................................................ 300 About Pipe Spool Drawing Generation .................................................... 300 Process Flow of Pipe Spool drawing Generation........................................ 301 Using Pro/ENGINEER......................................................................... 301 Using ISOGEN .................................................................................. 302 ISOGEN Data Control Files.................................................................... 302 About ISOGEN Data Control Files ........................................................ 302 Option Switches File.......................................................................... 303 Alternative Text File .......................................................................... 304 Position Text File .............................................................................. 305 Drawing Definition File ...................................................................... 305 Drawing Frame File ........................................................................... 305 ISOGEN File ..................................................................................... 305 Displaying Bending Data ...................................................................... 306 About Bending Data .......................................................................... 306 About the Node Number .................................................................... 306 About the Bending Point .................................................................... 307 About Bending Spring Back ................................................................ 310 About Bending Elongation .................................................................. 311 About Pipe Cutting Length ................................................................. 312 About the Bending Angle ................................................................... 313 About the Bend Radius ...................................................................... 313 About Bending Rotation Angle ............................................................ 314 About the Flange Angle ..................................................................... 315 About the Flange Twist Angle ............................................................. 317 xxi

Table of Contents

Specification-Driven Pipe Reporting ............................................................. 319 About Specification-Driven Pipe Reporting ................................................. 319 To Create Pipeline Reports ...................................................................... 320 To Generate a Bend Location Table........................................................... 321 To Generate a Bend Machine Table ........................................................... 321 Example: Bend Location Report ............................................................... 322 Example: Bend Machine Report................................................................ 322 Reporting the Weight and COG Information for Pipe Segments ..................... 323 Example: Pipe Segment Report ................................................................ 323 Example: Fitting Report .......................................................................... 324 Example: Insulation Report ..................................................................... 325 Example: Bill of Materials ........................................................................ 326 Pipeline Network Report .......................................................................... 329 About the Pipeline Network Report......................................................... 329 Example: Pipeline Network Report -1 ..................................................... 330 Errors in the Pipeline Network Report ..................................................... 331 To Change the Pipeline Network Report Format ....................................... 333 Example: Pipeline Network Report with Changed Format .......................... 334 Assigning and Reporting Bolt Nut Information ......................................... 337 Reporting the Bolt Nut Quantity for Fittings............................................. 337 Schematic Consistency Check Report ........................................................ 340 About Schematic Consistency Check Report ............................................ 340 To Create a Schematic Consistency Check Report .................................... 340 Schematic Consistency Check Report Format .......................................... 341 Workflow for Checking Schematic Consistency ........................................ 342 Glossary .................................................................................................. 345 Glossary of Terms .................................................................................. 345 Index ......................................................................................................... 349

xxii

Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) Using Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) About Pro/PIPING and Piping Systems Pro/PIPING is an optional Pro/ENGINEER module. Accessed through Assembly mode, Pro/PIPING enables you to generate 3D piping systems in Pro/ENGINEER assemblies. You can create piping systems in either the specification-driven or non specificationdriven piping design modes. Creating a piping system involves establishing pipeline parameters, routing lines, and inserting fittings. A piping system typically consists of pipelines, fittings, and equipment. •

A pipeline is composed of pipe segments and fittings. A segment of line may consist of one or more consecutive sections, straight pieces of pipe with bends or miter cuts or a section of flexible tube between breaks. The system creates a break whenever you create a fitted corner or insert an internal fitting in the pipeline.

•

A fitting is a part or assembly that you use to connect lines to other lines, fittings, and equipment, or to perform specific functions in the piping system (for example, flow valves).

•

Equipment in the working assembly (for example, a coil or a tank) is represented by assembly components with predefined entry ports.

Tailoring the Pro/PIPING Working Environment You can tailor your Pro/PIPING work environment to your specific needs using various tools: •

Using simplified representations, you can create a special version of a piping assembly that includes only those components that you need to route a pipeline. Using simplified representations can improve regeneration, retrieval, and display time, which allows you to work more efficiently. Simplified representations simplify a view by controlling which members of an assembly the system retrieves into a session and shows. The By Rule functionality enables you to exclude piping solids and fittings from a simplified representation by assigning a parameter and then excluding all components that have a particular value for that parameter. Although you cannot exclude assembly features, you can easily place all piping features on a layer by type.

•

Using top-down design tools, you can set up a well-structured design using advanced component creation tools containing skeleton models and copied geometric and datum references.

1

Pro/PIPING (Spec-Driven) - Help Topic Collection •

Using reference control and investigation tools, you can view and manage the complex web of dependencies (references) that evolve as you make features in a design.

•

Using viewing and environment control settings, you can set different visualization (display) modes for components in an assembly. You can assign wire frame, hidden line, no hidden line, shaded or blanked display modes to components.

•

The Piping System Tree provides an intuitive pipeline-level visual representation of a piping project. You can use show/blank and centerline/solid display modes, and also highlight pipelines. These display modes are accessed from this fully customizable piping interface.

About Pro/PIPING Design Modes Pro/PIPING allows you to create complex piping systems based on the piping design mode you choose. You set the piping design mode by setting the piping_design_method configuration option. The following design modes are available: •

Non Specification-Driven—Creates piping systems using manual tasks. All line stocks must be manually created and associated to a routed pipeline. All fittings must also be manually inserted. The Non-Specification-Driven piping design mode does not use project-specific data during pipe modeling. Furthermore, this design mode does not support design compatibility checks such as size mismatch detection, end type mismatch, and so on.

•

Specification-Driven—Creates piping systems based on the piping design method practiced by the Plant, Shipbuilding, and Aerospace design industries. Pro/PIPING creates specification-driven piping systems using piping specifications and automated modeling tasks. These tasks use archived piping data and project-specific data from the Specification Database. Pro/PIPING creates all line stocks on-the-fly and automatically associates them to the appropriate pipelines. All fittings are selected automatically during fitting insertion. The SpecificationDriven piping design mode supports intelligent design rule checking during modeling. Note that you must set up the Specification Database Project Data files to model specification-driven piping systems.

•

User-Driven—Enables you to switch between Non Specification-Driven and Specification -Driven piping modes and convert your piping assemblies at any time in the design process. Select or clear the Spec Driven check box on the PIPING menu to control the project piping design mode and convert piping assemblies to the selected mode.

To Access the Specification-Driven Design Mode 1. Configure Pro/PIPING for the Specification-Driven or User-Driven piping design modes. 2. Create or open a piping assembly.

2

Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven)

3. Click Applications > Piping. The PIPING menu appears. If you are using the User-Driven mode, select the Spec Driven check box on the PIPING menu. You can use the PIPING menu to design your specification-driven piping system.

About the Pro/PIPING User Interface (Spec-Driven) The Pro/PIPING user interface contains the following elements that increase usability and decrease mouse picks: •

The PIPING menu groups all necessary tools as menu commands in one convenient location. These commands open dialog boxes or submenus for intuitive step-by-step piping assembly creation.

•

Pro/PIPING dialog boxes contain: o

Expandable/collapsible sections that are indicated by a triangle. When you click the triangle, a section expands or collapses.

o

Bands that separate major groupings within a dialog box.

o

Sets of related functions. For example, fitting placement, positioning parameters, alignment point, flip, and rotation angle are all available through the Insert Fitting dialog box for Specification-Driven piping systems.

o

Dynamic options that update as you make selections.

o

Easy-to-use buttons, text and list boxes, and thumb wheels.

o

A fitting preview window allows for immediate inspection and confirmation of fitting selections.

•

The Piping System Tree provides an intuitive pipeline-level visual representation of a piping project. You can use the show/blank, or centerline/solid display modes, and highlight pipelines. These display modes are accessed from this customizable piping interface.

•

The View tab in the Piping System Tree allows you to change views.

PIPING Menu (Spec-Driven) The PIPING menu contains the following Pro/PIPING commands: •

Active Asm—Opens the SELECT dialog box that allows you to change the current active assembly. Select the active assembly from either the Model Tree, Piping System Tree, or the working window. The name of the currently active assembly appears in the graphics window.

•

Component—Opens the COMPONENT menu that allows you to manipulate assembly components.

•

Pipeline—Opens the OPER PIPE LINE menu on which you can create and immediately route a new pipeline or delete, rename, suppress, or resume existing pipelines.

3


Route—Opens the ROUTE PIPE menu on which you can add to or edit the path of an existing pipeline assembly.

•

Fitting—Opens the FITTING menu on which you can insert, delete, redefine, or replace pipe fittings.

•

Modify Pipe—Opens the Modify Pipeline dialog box in which you can modify several piping options in the active assembly.

•

Modify Dim—Opens the MODIFY menu on which you can modify the active assembly component dimensions.

•

Regenerate—Opens the PRT TO REGEN menu on which you can update modified objects and assembly dimensions.

•

Fabrication—Opens the FABRICATION menu on which you can cut pipes, delete cuts, generate spools, create pipe solids, create insulation, and delete insulation.

•

Designation—Opens the Pipeline Designation dialog box using which you can designate pipeline information that is used for the schematic driven pipeline modeling.

•

Drawing—Opens the Generate Isometric dialog box using which you can generate PCF files.

•

Set Up—Opens the PIPE SETUP menu on which you can set up how Pro/PIPING creates piping systems.

•

Info—Opens the Report Pipeline dialog box in which you can retrieve piping system information.

Piping System Tree About the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven) The Piping System Tree allows you to control how the pipeline is displayed. This treebased interface organizes all pipelines in the active assembly and its subassemblies by piping system (categories) and orders pipelines according to their names. The ability to include all subassemblies in the Piping System Tree streamlines the pipeline display process. This ability is especially important if you create pipelines based on the "one pipeline per assembly" modeling method. Note: The sequence of display of the components is based on the direction of flow of the network. The Piping System Tree does the following: •

Displays all pipelines in the top-level assembly and its subassemblies.

•

Organizes pipelines in a collapsible or expandable hierarchy according to the value assigned to the piping_system_tree_format configuration option. The pipelines are grouped according to the mnemonic, by default. This organization of pipelines provides a clear and intuitive visual representation of the piping project

4


and allows immediate piping system recognition and pipeline selection. For example, you can group and display all water pipes or all specification 12A pipelines. •

Allows for efficient pipeline selection. You can quickly select pipelines and perform the required tasks. Note: Unlike the Pro/ENGINEER Model Tree, you cannot use the Piping System Tree to sequentially reorder the pipelines and assembly components.

Viewing the Piping System Tree Click on the top menu bar to switch between the standard Model Tree and the Piping System Tree with pipeline view. Note: You can switch to the standard Model Tree from the pipeline view or spool view by clearing View > Pipeline View or View > Spool View, respectively. Pipeline Selection and Display Features The Piping System Tree provides the following dynamic pipeline selection and display options: •

Pipeline—Displays or hides a pipeline.

•

Label—Creates, deletes, displays, or hides a pipeline label.

•

Solid—Creates, deletes, displays, or hides a pipe solid.

•

Insulation—Creates, deletes, displays, or hides pipe insulation.

•

Flow—Displays and allows the reversal of the flow direction of the pipeline or pipe segment nodes.

Customize the Pro/PIPING Piping System Tree The Piping System Tree is fully customizable. You can reorganize pipelines in multiple ways by setting the piping_system_tree_format configuration option. You can also open a separate Piping System Tree window.

To Access the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven) 1. Open or create a Pro/PIPING assembly. 2. Click Applications > Piping. The Piping System Tree opens. From the Piping System Tree, you can select pipelines and display modes. Click View > Pipeline View or View > Spool View to switch between the pipeline view and the spool view. Note: The sequence of the components displayed is based on the direction of flow of the network.

5

Pro/PIPING (Spec-Driven) - Help Topic Collection

To Select Pipelines (Spec-Driven) 1. Click

. The Piping System Tree opens.

2. Select one of the following: o

PIPING SYSTEM TREE—Selects all pipelines in the top level assembly including those in the subassemblies.

o

Piping System (Category)—Selects all pipelines in the piping system. For example, if a piping system is configured for MNEMONIC and you select WATER, all water pipelines in the top level assembly are selected.

o

Pipeline—Selects one pipeline. You can also select individual pipelines in the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window.

To Display or Blank Pipelines (Spec-Driven) 1. Click


2. Select one or more pipelines from the Piping System Tree and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. 3. Click Pipeline > Show from the menu to display the pipeline in the graphics window, or click Pipeline > Hide to hide the pipeline in the graphics window.

To Display Centerlines or Solids (Spec-Driven) 1. Click


2. Select one or more pipelines and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. 3. Click Solid > Show to display pipe centerlines for the selections. The selected pipelines appear in the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window. Note: The Piping System Tree centerline or the solid display mode differs from the centerline and solid display capabilities in Set Display and the mode set by the pipe_solid_centerline configuration option in the following ways: o

The Piping System Tree centerline or the solid display mode allows you to select one or more pipelines in the active assembly, including subassemblies. You can display the selected pipeline with a pipe solid or centerline. Note: If you are creating pipelines based on the "one pipeline per assembly" modeling method, it is recommended that you use this centerline or solid display mode.

6

Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) o

The Set Display centerline or solid display mode (PIPING > Set Up > Set Display) enables you to select pipelines in both the active assembly, as well as the subassemblies. You can display the selected pipeline with a pipe solid or centerline.

o

The mode set by the pipe_solid_centerline configuration option indicates the center of the pipe solid geometry with a line. This is a global setting for all pipelines.

To Highlight Pipelines (Spec-Driven) 1. Click Show > Highlight Model. 2. Select pipelines from Piping System Tree. The selected pipelines are highlighted in the Piping System Tree and in the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window. 3. Repeat this process to turn off the Highlight Model display mode.

To Reorganize Pipelines (Spec-Driven) 1. Click Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens. 2. In the Option box, type the piping_system_tree_format configuration option. 3. In the Value box, type one or any combination of the following values along with any ASCII characters (default is MNEMONIC): o

SIZE

o

SPECIFICATION

o

MNEMONIC

o

NUMBER

o

INSULATION

As an example, the MNEMONIC-SPECIFICATION combination groups all pipelines according to fluid carried and piping specification.

To Modify the Column Display (Spec-Driven) 1. Click


2. Click Settings > Tree Columns. The Model Tree Columns dialog box opens. 3. Under Not Displayed, select the items you want to display and click selected items now appear under Displayed.

. The

4. Click OK. The selected items and their respective values are displayed in the columns of the Piping System Tree.

7


To Display the Piping System Tree from the Active Assembly 1. Click View > From Active Asm in the Piping System Tree. All the pipelines below the current assembly are displayed. 2. To cancel the selection of From Active Asm, clear From Active Asm.

To Display the Pipeline Component View 1. Click


2. Click the plus sign (+) adjacent to the branch node or double-click the branch node. The branch node expands to show the pipeline components. 3. Select a pipeline in the expanded Piping System Tree. The pipeline is highlighted in the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window.

To Display the Piping Spool View 1. Click . The Piping System Tree opens. Click View > Spool View in the Piping System Tree. All the pipelines that have their spool numbers generated are shown with their respective spools. 2. Click the plus sign (+) adjacent to the spool node or double-click the spool node. The spool node expands to show its branch components. 3. Click a spool to select it in the expanded Piping System Tree. The spool is highlighted in the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window. Note: You can switch between Pipeline View and Spool View at any time.

To Create or Delete Pipeline Labels from the Piping System Tree 1. Click


2. Select one or more pipelines from the Piping System Tree and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. 3. Click Label > Create to create a label for the pipeline, or click Label > Delete to delete the label of the selected pipeline. Note: Delete is available only if a label has been created for a pipeline.

To Display or Hide Pipeline Labels 1. Click


2. Select one or more pipelines from the Piping System Tree and right-click. A shortcut menu appears.

8


3. Click Label > Show to display the label of the selected pipeline or click Label > Hide to hide the label of the selected pipeline. Note: Show and Hide are available for a pipeline only if a label has been created for the pipeline.

To Create or Delete Pipe Solids from the Piping System Tree 1. Click


2. Select one or more pipelines from the Piping System Tree and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. 3. Click Solid > Create to create solids for the entire pipeline or pipe segments, or click Solid > Delete to delete the solids for the entire pipeline or pipe segments. Note: Delete is available only if the selected pipe segment nodes have solids.

To Display or Hide Pipe Solids 1. Click


2. Select one or more pipelines from the Piping System Tree and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. 3. Click Solid > Show to show solids for the entire pipeline or pipe segments, or click Solid > Hide to hide solids for the entire pipeline or pipe segments. Note: Hide is available only if the selected pipe segment nodes have unsuppressed solids.

To Create or Delete Pipe Insulation Quilts 1. Click


2. Select one or more pipelines from the Piping System Tree and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. 3. Click Insulation > Create to create pipe insulation quilts for the entire pipelines, or click Insulation > Delete to delete the pipe insulation quilts for the entire pipeline. Note: Insulation is available in the Piping System Tree and in the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window only if a pipe solid has been created.

To Display or Hide Pipe Insulation Quilts 1. Click


9


2. Select one or more pipelines from the Piping System Tree and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. 3. Click Insulation > Show to show pipe insulation quilts for the entire pipeline, or click Insulation > Hide to hide pipe insulation quilts for the entire pipeline. Note: Insulation is available only if the selected pipe segment nodes have unsuppressed pipe insulation quilts.

About Customizing the Piping System Tree (Spec-Driven) Customizing the Piping System Tree gives you the flexibility to display and organize your piping projects in the following ways: •

Reorganize pipelines—Reorganize pipelines in multiple ways by setting the piping_system_tree_format configuration option to modify categories.

•

Modify the column display—Display informational columns and select items to display in these Piping System Tree columns.

Configuring Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) About Configuring Pro/PIPING (Spec-Driven) You can customize the way the Specification-Driven piping design mode operates by entering config.pro configuration file options and their values in the Options dialog box (Tools > Options). For example, you can modify piping design modes, pipeline formats, file names and directory locations, and configure the Pro/PIPING ISOGEN interface. Pro/PIPING provides a list of configuration options arranged in alphabetical order. Each option contains the following information: •

Configuration option name

•

Default and available variables or values. All default values are in italics.

•

Brief description and notes describing the configuration option

ISOGEN Configuration Options Pro/PIPING allows you to create isometric pipeline drawings by providing an isometric drawing generation (ISOGEN) interface. Using the Generate Isometric dialog box (PIPING > Drawing), you can create ISOGEN .pcf files for use with an ISOGEN drawing tool. The following configuration options must be set in the Pro/PIPING config.pro file to use the ISOGEN interface: •

isogen_mandatory_attr_file

•

isogen_symbol_map_file

•

isogen_output_files_dir

•

isogen_nominal_size_map_file

10

Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) •

isogen_pcf_filename_format

•

isogen_endtype_map_file

Note: •

Many configuration options are common to both the Specification-Driven and Nonspecification-Driven modes in Pro/PIPING.

•

After you set the configuration options, all settings take effect immediately in the current Pro/ENGINEER session.

•

All the configuration options for which you specify numeric values will use the units of the active piping assembly.

•

The Symbol Map, Endtype Map, and Nominal Size ISOGEN Map files are required to map Pro/PIPING component information to ISOGEN component information.

To Set Pro/PIPING Configuration Options (Spec-Driven) 1. Locate the configuration option you want to set using the configuration topics. 2. Click Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens. 3. Select the configuration option from the list. or In the Option box, type the configuration option name. 4. In the Value box, type the value. You can use the Value list to see which values are available. If the value requires an integer, type it. 5. Click Add / Change. The configuration option and its value appear in the list. A green status icon confirms the change. 6. When you finish configuring Pro/PIPING, click Apply or OK. Note: It is recommended that you set the Pro/PIPING configuration options before starting a new piping project.

Specifying Thumb Wheel Increments You can specify the increment for each controllable movement of the thumb wheel using the piping_thumb_wheel_increment or piping_thumb_wheel_ratio_inc configuration options, as applicable. In certain cases, Pro/PIPING uses the following configuration options to determine the increment value: Configuration Option

Description

create_fraction_dim

No—Pro/PIPING creates dimensions in the decimal format (default). Yes—Pro/PIPING creates dimensions in the fractional format.

11


Configuration Option

Description

dim_fraction_format

Std—Pro/PIPING displays dimensions as a fraction in the standard Pro/ENGINEER format (15 1/2 for 15.5 inches). Aisc—Pro/PIPING displays dimensions as a fraction in the AISC format (1' 3 1/2" for 15.5 inches).

dim_fraction_denominator

Sets the largest denominator to be used in a fraction, when you want to display linear dimensions in a fractional format.

default_dec_places (0-14)

Sets the number of decimal places that Pro/PIPING must display when you want to display linear dimensions in the decimal format. By default, Pro/PIPING displays the dimensions to an accuracy of two decimal places.

isogen_attribute_map_file (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_attribute_map.ptd, Specify a path and name for the file that maps Pro/PIPING attributes or parameters to the ISOGEN user-definable attributes. Note: The isogen_attribute_map.ptd file can be copied to a local directory. You can modify this file and maintain different versions as per your requirements. Use the isogen_attribute_map_file configuration option to access the required modified version.

isogen_endtype_map_file (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_endtype_map.ptd, Specify a path and name for the file that maps Pro/PIPING endtypes with ISOGEN endtypes.

isogen_mandatory_attr_file (Spec-Driven) isogen.fls, Specify a name for the file that contains ISOGEN mandatory attribute files.

12


isogen_nominal_size_map_file (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_nominal_size_map. ptd, Specify a path and name for the file that maps Pro/PIPING sizes with ISOGEN nominal sizes in millimeters and inches.

isogen_output_files_dir (Spec-Driven) , Specify a directory path for archiving the ISOGEN output files.

isogen_pcf_filename_format (Spec-Driven) MNEMONIC-SPECIFICATION-NUMBER, Specify a name format for ISOGEN (.pcf) files. Pro/PIPING creates ISOGEN file names from the values assigned to the keywords as shown in the following table: ISOGEN File Name Format

Assigned Value

ISOGEN (.pcf) File Name

mnemonic-numberinsulation

water,1001,is

water-1001-is.pcf

ship1-mnemonicnumber-insulation

water,1001,is

ship1-water-1001is.pcf

isogen_symbol_map_file (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_symbol_map.ptd, Specify a path and name for the file that maps Pro/PIPING fitting library part names with ISOGEN component names and symbol keys (SKEY).

pipe_3D_bend_theor_int_pts (Spec-Driven) yes, no Set the theoretical intersections and bends in three-dimensional piping models. •

Yes—Pro/PIPING displays theoretical intersections and bends in threedimensional models.

•

No—Pro/PIPING does not display theoretical intersections and bends in threedimensional models.

13


pipe_extend_dim_scheme (Spec-Driven) cartesian, cylindrical, spherical Specify a dimension scheme for piping extend segment.

pipe_solid_centerline (Spec-Driven) yes, no Set the pipe solid centerline display mode. Pro/PIPING displays a pipe solid centerline in the graphics window to indicate the center of the pipe solid. After you set this option, the display changes immediately in the current session of Pro/ENGINEER. This mode displays the pipe solid center only. •

yes—Pro/PIPING displays the pipe solid centerlines.

•

no—Pro/PIPING does not display pipe solid centerlines.

Note: The pipe_solid_centerline mode differs from the centerline or solid display capabilities in both the Set Display and the Piping System Tree in the following ways: •

The mode set by the pipe_solid_centerline configuration option indicates the center of the pipe solid geometry with a line. This is a global setting for all pipelines.

•

The Set Display centerline or solid display mode (PIPING > Set Up > Set Display) enables you to select pipelines in both the active assembly, as well as the subassemblies. You can display the selected pipelines with a pipe solid or centerline.

•

The Piping System Tree centerline or solid display mode allows you to select one or more pipelines in the active assembly, including subassemblies. You can display the selected pipeline with a pipe solid or centerline. Note that if you are creating pipelines based on the "one pipeline per assembly" modeling method, it is recommended that you use this centerline/solid display mode.

pipe_solid_label_format (Spec-Driven) SIZE-SPECIFICATION-MNEMONIC-NUMBER-INSULATION, Specify a pipe solid label format. Pro/PIPING generates pipeline labels from the values assigned to the keywords during pipe solid creation.

pipe_update_pre_20_int_pts (Spec-Driven) yes, no Pro/PIPING can update pipelines created prior to Pro/PIPING Release 20.0. This enables users to get intersection point entities. Pro/PIPING creates these entities in session or when you retrieve the piping model.

14


Yes—Pro/PIPING updates pipelines created prior to Pro/PIPING Release 20.0.

•

No—Pro/PIPING does not update pipelines created prior to Pro/PIPING Release 20.0.

pipeline_assembly_library_dir (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/pipelinelib, Specify a directory path for selecting a pipeline assembly. Note: Pro/PIPING uses the PRO_DIRECTORY environment variable to store the .

pipeline_assembly_name_format (Spec-Driven) MNEMONIC-NUMBER, Specify a pipeline assembly name format. Pro/PIPING creates assembly names from the values assigned to the keywords during pipeline creation and routing. Any combination of keywords and valid file name characters are allowed. The following table describes the format: Assembly Name Format

Assigned Value

Assembly File Name

MNEMONIC-NUMBERINSULATION

WATER, 1001, IS

WATER-1001-IS.ASM

SHIP1-MNEMONICNUMBER-INSULATION

WATER, 1001, IS

SHIP1-WATER-1001-IS.ASM

pipeline_label_format (Spec-Driven) SIZE-SPECIFICATION-MNEMONIC-NUMBER-INSULATION, Specify a pipeline label format. Pro/PIPING creates pipeline labels from the values assigned to the keywords during pipeline creation and routing.

15


The following table describes the format: Pipeline Label Format

Assigned Value

Pipeline Label


WATER, 1001, IS

WATER-1001-IS

SHIP1-MNEMONICNUMBER-INSULATION

WATER, 1001, IS

SHIP1-WATER-1001-IS

pipeline_solid_start_part_name (Spec-Driven) Specify a default start part name for the pipe solid generation. The value specified for this configuration option is used as a default template part name in the Pipe Solid dialog box.

pipeline_spool_label_format (Spec-Driven) SIZE-SPECIFICATION-MNEMONIC-NUMBER-SPOOL#PREFIX[0]SPOOLNUM[01]SUFFIX[], Specify a pipeline spool label format. Pro/PIPING creates spool labels from the values assigned to the keywords during pipe piece cutting. The following table describes the format: Pipeline Spool Label Format

Assigned Value

Pipeline Spool Label


WATER, 1001, IS

WATER-1001-IS

SHIP1-MNEMONIC-NUMBERINSULATION

WATER, 1001, IS

SHIP1-WATER-1001-IS

pipeline_start_assembly_name (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/fittinglib/ pipeline_start.asm, Specify a path and name for the file that contains template information (assembly units, pre-defined views, etc.). Pro/PIPING uses this information to create new pipeline subassemblies. Note: The Pipeline Start assembly file must be stored in the directory location specified by the piping_fitt_lib_dir configuration option.

16


piping_wildfire_convert (Spec-Driven) automatic, never, manual Specify a value for this configuration option when working with piping assemblies that are created in versions of Pro/PIPING earlier than Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire. •

automatic—Automatically converts all piping assemblies that are under the active top assembly when you invoke the Pro/PIPING application.

•

never—Does not convert piping assemblies.

•

manual—Displays the Piping Assemblies Conversion dialog box when you invoke the Pro/PIPING application. This is the default value.

Note: A piping assembly gets modified if it is updated to the Wildfire format.

piping_appearance_map_file (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_appearance .map, Specify a path and name for the file that maps all colors used in a Pro/PIPING piping design project. Note: The Piping Appearance Map file must be stored in the directory location specified by the piping_mcat_dir configuration option.

piping_bolt_nut_select_file (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_bolt_nut_s elect.ptd, Specify a path and name for the file that provides the bolt and nut data for the corresponding bolt nut code. The data includes information about the related unique MCCS code, the Bolt Nut Master Catalog file, and the required quantity of bolt and nuts. Note: The bolt nut code must be assigned to fittings of all sizes and schedule ratings in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd file. This code is applied to all the fitting instances in the fitting master catalog file when generating the Auto-Selection file, that is, *_asfile.ptd. The bolt nut data related to the bolt nut code is obtained from the Piping Bolt Nut Select file.

piping_design_method (Spec-Driven) non_spec_driven, spec_driven, user_driven Specify the piping design method for the piping project. •

non_spec_drivenActivates the Non Specification-Driven piping design mode.

•

spec_drivenActivates the Specification-Driven piping design mode.

17


user_drivenActivates the User-Driven piping design mode. This mode allows you to switch between Specification-Driven and Non Specification-Driven piping design modes and convert existing assemblies at any time in the design process.

piping_end_compatibility_file (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_end_compat ibility.ptd, Specify a path and name for the file that contains the list of all valid end type connections (fitting-to-fitting, fitting-to-pipe, and pipe-to-fitting) allowed for a piping project. Pro/PIPING uses this data for end type checking during fitting insertion. Note: The Piping End Compatibility file must be stored in the directory location specified by the piping_mcat_dir configuration option.

piping_fitt_angle_tolerance (Spec-Driven) 1.5, Specify a value for the piping fitting angle tolerance. Pro/PIPING uses this data to check fitting angles during fitting insertion. The unit of measurement is degrees.

piping_fitt_category_map_file (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/sample_project/piping_fitt_categ ory_map.ptd, < absolute directory path and valid file name> Specify a name for the file that maps each fitting category to a fitting category button in the fitting insertion dialog boxes. Note: The Piping Fitting Category Map file must be stored in the directory location specified by the piping_project_data_dir configuration option.

piping_fitt_library_dir (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/fittinglib/, Specify a path where the fitting model part (individual parts or family table generic parts with their associated tables) files are archived. Pro/PIPING uses this data during fitting insertion.

piping_insulation_dir_file (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/sample_project/piping_insulation _dir.ptd, Specify a name for the file that contains the list of all valid insulation specifications for a piping project. Note: The Piping Insulation Directory file must be stored in the directory location specified by the piping_project_data_dir configuration option.

18


piping_joint_fitting_clearance (Spec-Driven) 1, Specify a value for the minimum joint fitting clearance. Pro/PIPING uses this data when inserting joint fittings and when cutting parallel pipe segments. The value that you specify for this configuration option is calculated in the current piping assembly units. For example, a value of 200.0 represents 200 inches in the INCH assembly unit, and 200 mm in the MM assembly unit. The default values are 25mm in the MM assembly unit and 1 inch in the INCH assembly unit.

piping_joint_fitting_offset (Spec-Driven) 4, Specify a value for the minimum joint fitting offset. Pro/PIPING uses this value when inserting joint fittings, and when cutting parallel pipe segments. The value specified for this configuration option is calculated in the current piping assembly units. For example, a value of 200.0 represents 200 inches in the INCH assembly unit and 200 mm in the MM assembly unit. The default values are 100mm in the MM assembly unit and 4 inches in the INCH assembly unit.

piping_manufacture_dir_file (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_manufactur e_dir.ptd, Specify a name for the file that contains pipe manufacturing information for projects based on a pipe material code. The piping_mcat_dir configuration option resources or retrieves data from this file. Note: The Piping Manufacture Directory file must be stored in the directory location specified by the piping_mcat_dir configuration option.

piping_material_file (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_material.p td, Specify the path and name for the file that contains the piping material information. Pro/PIPING associates this information (material code, full description, pipe density, pipe and fitting master catalog file names) with pipes and fittings. Note: The Piping Material file must be stored in the directory location specified by the piping_mcat_dir configuration option.

piping_mcat_dir (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/master_catalog/, Specify a path where the piping Master Catalog files are archived. Pro/PIPING uses the Master Catalog files to create piping specification files (Project Data files) for a piping project. 19


piping_mcat_dir_file (Spec-Driven) piping_mcat_dir.ptd, Specify a name for the file that contains all pipe and fitting master catalog files. Note: The Piping MCAT Directory file must be stored in the directory location specified by the piping_mcat_dir configuration option.

piping_min_bolting_clearance (Spec-Driven) 20, Specify a value for minimum bolt clearance in the current assembly units. Pro/PIPING uses this data during fitting insertion.

piping_project_data_dir (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/sample_project/, Specify a path where the project related specification and design rule files are archived. Pro/PIPING uses this data for specification-driven pipeline modeling and reporting.

piping_schematic_driven no, yes Enable or disable the schematic-driven modeling. •

yesEnables the schematic-driven modeling options in pipeline creation, pipeline routing, and fitting insertion.

•

noDisables the schematic-driven modeling options.

piping_schematic_xml_dir (Spec-Driven) current working directory, Specify a path where the XML files containing the schematic information, obtained from Routed Systems Designer, are archived. This is used as the start location for XML file selection and search. Piping Design uses this data for the following tasks: •

Specification-driven pipeline modeling

•

Specification-driven pipeline 2D and 3D schematic consistency checking.

The default value for this option is Note: A pipeline should be completely defined in one XML file.

20


piping_spec_dir_file (Spec-Driven) /text/piping_data/sample_project/piping_spec_dir.p td, Specify a path and name for the file that archives the list of all piping specifications. Pro/PIPING uses this file specification-driven fitting selection, pipeline creation, and design rule checking.

piping_system_tree_format (Spec-Driven) MNEMONIC, Specify the piping system tree format. Pro/PIPING creates piping systems or categories from the values assigned to the keywords. These categories organize all pipelines in the Piping System Tree. The following table describes the format: Piping System Tree Format

Pipeline Values

Piping System (Category) Name

MNEMONIC-SPECIFICATION

WATER, 11C

WATER-11C


WATER, 1001, IS

WATER-1001-IS

SHIP1-MNEMONIC-NUMBERINSULATION

WATER, 1001, IS

SHIP1-WATER-1001-IS

piping_thumb_wheel_increment (Spec-Driven) 1, Specify a value for the piping thumb wheel increment in the current model unit. Pro/PIPING uses this data to adjust the positioning increments when using the thumb wheel for various tasks such as during inserting fittings and extending and routing a pipeline. In certain cases, Pro/PIPING decides the increment value based on the following: •

If you set the create_fraction_dim configuration option to no, Pro/PIPING uses the increment value that you specified using the piping_thumb_wheel_increment configuration option. If the increment value is less than the least decimal value that you specified using the default_dec_places configuration option, Pro/PIPING uses the least decimal value as the increment.

•

If you set the create_fraction_dim configuration option to no, and if you do not specify any value for the piping_thumb_wheel_increment configuration option, Pro/PIPING uses the least decimal value that you specified using the default_dec_places configuration option, as the increment.

21


If you set the create_fraction_dim configuration option to yes, and if the increment value that you specified using the piping_thumb_wheel_increment configuration option is less than the least denominator value that you can specify using the dim_fraction_denominator configuration option, Pro/PIPING uses the least fraction value as the increment.

•

If you set the create_fraction_dim configuration option to yes, and you do not specify any value for the piping_thumb_wheel_increment configuration option, Pro/PIPING uses the least fractional value as the increment.

piping_thumb_wheel_ratio_inc (Spec-Driven) A positive real number between 0 and 1. While creating a branch point on a pipe segment or inserting fittings, Pro/PIPING uses this data to adjust the positioning increments as a ratio when you specify increments using the thumb wheel. Pro/PIPING assigns 0.01 as the default value. In certain cases, Pro/PIPING determines the increment value based on the following: •

If you set the create_fraction_dim configuration option to no, Pro/PIPING uses the increment value that you specified using the piping_thumb_wheel_ratio_inc configuration option. If the increment value is less than the least decimal value that you specified using the default_dec_places configuration option, Pro/PIPING uses the least decimal value as the increment.

•

If you set the create_fraction_dim configuration option to yes, and if the increment value that you specified using the piping_thumb_wheel_ratio_inc configuration option is less than the least denominator value that you can specify using the dim_fraction_denominator configuration option, Pro/PIPING uses the least fraction value as the increment.

units_system_dic_file /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_units_syst em_dic_file.ptd, Specify a path and name for the file that specifies units systems used for various piping specification database files.

Setting Up Pro/PIPING (Specification-Driven) About Setting Up Specification-Driven Pro/PIPING Pro/PIPING allows you to design complex piping systems based on piping specifications. In order to design these piping systems, you must first set up Specification-Driven Piping. You can use the PIPE SETUP menu (PIPING > Set Up) to perform the following setup procedures: •

22

Spec DB—Allows you to set up the piping Specification Database Project Data files. The Pro/PIPING Specification Database contains Master Catalog (MCAT),


Project Data, and Fitting Library files. Pro/PIPING includes populated MCAT and Fitting Library files for immediate use. However, you must define the Project Data files for each piping project before beginning pipe system modeling. •

Update Model—Allows you to update the active assembly in the current piping model with piping data changes made to the specification files (Project Data files), the MCAT files, or both. You can also modify line stocks and update the current piping model to reflect the changes.

•

Design Rules—Allows you to add or change the Design Rule parameters.

•

Bend Allow—Lets you define or modify bend tables.

•

Set Display—Sets the centerline or solid pipeline display for a selected pipeline in the graphics window.

Piping Specification Database About the Piping Specification Database The Pro/PIPING Piping Specification Database archives all piping library and catalog files that can be used to create specification-driven piping systems and stores all project-specific files. The Piping Specification Database contains the following three file groups: •

Master Catalog (MCAT) Files—Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store all of the basic design information required for pipe modeling. Pro/PIPING includes MCAT files. You can create MCAT files or modify existing ones when you want to update and expand the piping data.

•

Fitting Library Files—Fitting part files (Pro/ENGINEER and generic) with their associated family tables and fitting assembly files. Fitting Library files provide the physical representation for fittings in a piping model. Pro/PIPING includes Fitting Library files. You can create Fitting Library Files or modify existing ones when you want to update and expand the fitting library.

•

Project Data Files—Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store all project-specific design information selected from the Master Catalog files. You create new Project Data files for each new piping project when you set up Specification-Driven Piping for that project. After you select piping data for each specification in the Define Piping Specification dialog box, Pro/PIPING saves this data to a Project Data file. You can modify the Project Data file by selecting new piping data.

Both the Master Catalog files and the Fitting Library files are archived collections that contain all available items or components that can be used in piping system creation. Unlike Project Data Files, these files do not change as you design new piping projects. Note: Create or modify the Piping Specification Database files before designing a Specification-Driven piping project.

23


How the Piping Specification Database Works The Piping Specification Database functions as the Pro/PIPING piping data libraries. You begin a project by first creating any necessary Master Catalog and Fitting Library files. After these files are updated, you create Project Data files for each new piping project by assigning piping data from the Master Catalog files for each project specification. Pro/PIPING retrieves all piping data from the Project Data files during piping system design. For example, you begin piping design with pipeline creation. You select a specification and Pro/PIPING retrieves the data that you assigned to the specification from the Project Data files. You select from this data and create the pipeline. After the pipeline is created, Pro/PIPING copies the piping data to linestock features. As you begin routing pipelines or creating pipe solids, Pro/PIPING uses the linestock data. All insulation data is retrieved from the Project Data Files and copied to insulation features for use in insulation modeling. During fitting insertion, Pro/PIPING retrieves fitting data from the Project Data files.

Master Catalog Files About Master Catalog Files Pro/PIPING Master Catalog (MCAT) files are Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store all of the piping design data required for pipe modeling. This piping data is available for all projects and remains unchanged as new piping projects are designed. The MCAT file data sources consist of industry standards and practices, and manufacturer catalogs. Pro/PIPING includes Master Catalog files. You can modify existing MCAT files to satisfy project requirements. How Master Catalog Files Work Master Catalog files contain all piping data that is available for all piping projects. MCAT files function as a piping data library. During Specification-Driven Piping setup, you must add all piping data from printed sources into the Master Catalog files, as needed. You also must create the Project Data files. You create Project Data files by selecting piping data from the MCAT files and assigning it to each project specification. Pro/PIPING writes this data to the Project Data files. Project Data files allow you to control the data that Pro/PIPING retrieves during project design. As an example, before you begin designing the piping project, you must set up Specification Driven piping by creating the Project Data files. Assign different piping data (pipeline and fitting data, insulation data, and so forth) to specifications 11B, 12A, and 12C. As you begin designing the pipeline for specification 12A, Pro/PIPING retrieves only the piping data that you assigned to this specification. All other Master Catalog file data remains archived. You select from the specification 12A piping data and begin project design.

24


The following table lists each Pro/PIPING Master Catalog file and its information type: Master Catalog (MCAT) File

Information Type

Piping Master Catalog Directory file

All Piping Master Catalog files

Pipe Outer Diameter file

All available pipe outside diameters

Pipe Thickness file

All available pipe thickness

Pipe Master Catalog file

All available pipe sizes for a material type

Piping Material file

All available pipe material data

Piping Manufacture Directory file

Relates the pipe material code to the Bend, Bend Machine, and the Miter files

Fitting Master Catalog file

All available fittings

Bend file

All available bend tables

Bending Machine File

All available bend machines and their parameters

Miter file

All available miter tables

End Compatibility file

All available end type matching tables

Insulation file

All available insulation data for pipes and fittings

Appearance Map file

All available colors that can be applied to pipelines

Note: You can define the MCAT directory path by setting the piping_mcat_dir configuration option. To Modify Master Catalog Files Pro/PIPING allows you to modify Master Catalog (MCAT) files. You must modify MCAT files when periodic updates and additions require up-to-date information. You can use either Pro/TABLE or any ASCII file editing tool for MCAT file modification. 1. Open Pro/TABLE or any ASCII editing tool. 2. Open the MCAT file to modify. 3. Enter the piping data into the file complying with the file format. 4. Save the modified MCAT file.

25


Piping Master Catalog Directory File The Piping Master Catalog Directory file lists all the available Pipe and Fitting Master Catalog (MCAT) files and insulation files. Each Piping MCAT Directory file entry associates a piping category and a Master Catalog file with a Pipe Outer Diameter file, a Pipe Thickness file, a Combined Size Code file, a selection name for a fitting category, and the bolt nut code associated to fitting. Pro/PIPING uses the Piping Master Catalog Directory file to: •

Retrieve Pipe Outer Diameter and Pipe Thickness file data. This data is based on the associated Pipe or Fitting MCAT file.

•

Retrieve fitting selection names based on fitting categories and Fitting MCAT file while creating the Auto-selection file.

•

Retrieve size codes for pipes and fittings.

•

Retrieve the bolt and nut code associated with a fitting. The code provides information about the type, quantity, associated Bolt Nut MCAT file, and MCCS code.

The Piping Master Catalog Directory file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

CATEGORY

Pipe, fitting, or insulation categories defined in the Master Catalog file. Pro/PIPING supports the following category types: 1. Fixed Categories o

PIPE—For pipes

o

FLEX_PIPE—For flexible pipes.

o

INSULATION—For insulation

2. User-Defined Fitting Categories Pro/PIPING provides the following categories that are used by the fittings and archived in the Pro/PIPING Fitting Library files. You can define new categories as required.

26

o

VALVE

o

ANGLE_VALVE

o

RELIEF_VALVE

o

FLANGE

o

GASKET

o

ELBOW


Field Name

Description o

ELBOW_LET—For elbow olets

o

BRANCH

o

BRANCH_LET—For branch olets

o

REDUCER

o

GENERAL—For fittings that do not belong to any of the above types

SNAME

Fitting selection name.

MCAT_FILE

Path for the Pipe or Fitting Master Catalog file name.

PIPE_OD_FILE

Path for the Pipe Outside Diameter file name.

PIPE_THK_FILE

Path for the Pipe Thickness file name.

SIZE_CODE_FILE

Path for the Combined Size Code file name. Pro/PIPING uses a single combined size code file for all the pipes and fittings, by default.

BOLT_NUT_CODE

Default bolt nut code. Pro/PIPING provides the following bolt nut codes. You can define new bolt nut codes as required. CFA CFB CFC CFD CFE CFF CFG CFH

Note: You can define the MCAT Directory file name by setting the piping_mcat_dir_file configuration option. The default file is piping_mcat_dir.ptd.

27


Example: Piping Master Catalog Directory File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_mcat_dir.ptd CATEGORY

SNAME

MCAT_ PIPE_OD_ FILE FILE

PIPE_THK_ FILE

SIZE_ CODE_ FILE

PIPE

pipe/p ipe_st eel

pipeod/od _steel

pipethk/thk _steel

pipeod/co mbined_siz e_code

PIPE

pipe/p ipe_st ain

pipeod/od _steel

pipethk/thk _steel


PIPE

pipe/p ipe_co pper

pipeod/od _copper

pipethk/thk _copper


PIPE

pipe/p ipe_al brass

pipeod/od _albrassnicu

pipethk/thk _albrass


JOINT

COUPLI NG

fitting /coupl ing_s w_ste el

pipeod/od _steel


ELBOW

ELBOW 45LR

fitting /elbo w_45l ong_b w_ste el

pipeod/od _steel


ELBOW

ELBOW 90LR

fitting /elbo w_90l ong_b w_ste el

pipeod/od _steel


GENERAL

BFLANG E

fitting /flang e_nec k_rf

pipeod/od _steel


28

BOLT_NUT _CODE


CATEGORY

SNAME


PIPE_THK_ FILE

SIZE_ CODE_ FILE

BOLT_NUT _CODE

FLANGE

NECKFL ANGE

fitting /flang e_nec k_rf

pipeod/od _steel

pipeod/co CFA mbined_siz e_code

FLANGE

SLIPFLA NGE

fitting /flang e_slip

pipeod/od _steel


GASKET

GASKET

fitting /gask et_ne ck

pipeod/od _steel


GASKET

GASKET

fitting /gask et_sli p

pipeod/od _steel


GENERAL

NIPPLE

fitting /nippl e_bw

pipeod/od _steel


REDUCER

CRED

fitting /red_c oncen tric_b w_ste el

pipeod/od _steel


VALVE

GATE

fitting /vl_ga te_sc _iron

pipeod/od _steel


CFE

VALVE

GLOBE

fitting /vl_gb _flrf_s teel

pipeod/od _steel


CFF

VALVE

GLOBE

fitting /vl_gb _sc_ir on

pipeod/od _steel


CFG

29


CATEGORY

SNAME


VALVE

CHECK

fitting /vl_s wing_ check _flrf

PIPE_THK_ FILE

pipeod/od _steel

SIZE_ CODE_ FILE

BOLT_NUT _CODE


CFH

Pipe Master Catalog File The Pipe Master Catalog file defines all available pipe sizes, schedules, and end types for each pipe material type. Pro/PIPING retrieves pipe end types based on the selected pipe size and schedule. The Pipe Master Catalog file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

SCH_RATE

Pipe schedule

SIZE

Pipe nominal diameter

END_TYPE

Pipe end type

Example: Pipe Master Catalog File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_mcat_dir.ptd SCH_RATE

SIZE

END_TYPE

40

2"

BE

40

3"

BE

40

4"

BE

40

6"

BE

40

8"

BE

40

10"

BE

40

12"

BE

40

14"

BE

30


SCH_RATE

SIZE

END_TYPE

40

16"

BE

40

18"

BE

40

20"

BE

40

24"

BE

40

36"

BE

80

½"

PE

80

¾"

PE

80

1"

PE

80

1-1/2"

PE

Fitting Master Catalog File The Fitting Master Catalog file defines all the available pipe fittings for each fitting catalog in the Fitting Library (JIS, ANSI, DIN, and so forth). Pro/PIPING retrieves the selected fitting model name and weight based on the fitting size, branch size, new size, and the fitting rating from the Fitting Master Catalog file. Pro/PIPING uses this data for specification-driven fitting insertion. The Fitting Master Catalog file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

SCH_RATE

Fitting rating.

SIZE

Fitting inlet nominal diameter.

NSIZE

Fitting outlet nominal diameter. Only required when it is applicable to this particular fitting.

BSIZE

Fitting branch outlet nominal diameter. Only required when it is applicable to this particular fitting.

END_TYPE

Fitting inlet end type.

NEND_TYPE

Fitting outlet end type.

FITT_MODEL_NAME

Fitting model name. It can be the name of a .prt (Part) or a .asm (Assembly) file, or an instance of a family table from the Fitting Library.

31


Example: Fitting Master Catalog File The following is an example of the Fitting Master Catalog files gate_astm_steel.ptd (steel gate valve) and concetric_astm_steel.ptd (steel reducer.) Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/valve/gate_astm_steel.ptd> SCH_RATE SIZE NSIZE BSIZE END_TYPE NEND_TYPE FITT_MODEL_NAME 150

½"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_0D

150

¾"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_0F

150

1"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_01

150

11/2 "

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_0D

150

2"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_02

150

3"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_03

150

4"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_04

150

6"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_06

150

8"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_08

150

10"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_10

150

12"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_12

150

14"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_14

150

16"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_16

150

18"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_18

150

20"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_20

150

24"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_24

150

36"

BW

GATE_ASTM_STEEL_36

32


Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/reducer/ concetric_astm_steel.ptd SCH_RATE SIZE NSIZE BSIZE END_TYPE NEND_TYPE FITT_MODEL_NAME 150

2"

1"

BW

REDUCER_ASTM_STEEL _0201

150

3"

2"

BW


150

4"

3"

BW


150

6"

4"

BW


150

8"

6"

BW


150

10"

8"

BW


150

12"

10"

BW


150

14"

12"

BW


150

16"

14"

BW


150

18"

16"

BW


150

20"

18"

BW


150

22"

20"

BW


150

24"

22"

BW


150

26"

24"

BW


150

28"

26"

BW


33


SCH_RATE SIZE NSIZE BSIZE END_TYPE NEND_TYPE FITT_MODEL_NAME 150

30"

28"

BW


150

32"

30"

BW


Bolt Nut Selection File The Bolt Nut Selection file specifies a unique material classification code (MCCS) for the corresponding bolt nut code. The MCCS code is unique for different pipe sizes and for different pressure ratings of a fitting. This code is subsequently used to obtain information about the bolt nut material from the Bolt Nut Master Catalog file. This file is identified by the piping_bolt_nut_select_file configuration option. The Bolt Nut Selection file also provides information about the number of bolt nuts required for the main fitting and for the flanges mated to that main fitting. The Bolt Nut Master Catalog file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

Bolt_Nut_Code

Code identifying the bolt nut data

Size

Pipe size

SCH_RATE

Pressure rating of fitting

MCCS_CODE

Material classification code of bolt nut

Quantity

Number of bolt nuts for the fitting and mated flanges

Mcat_file

Path of the Bolt Nut Master Catalog File that gives information about the material description and the bolt nut part name

If a fitting requires eight bolt nuts of different MCCS codes, the same bolt nut code appears as two records, as shown in the next table. BOLT_ NUT_ CODE

SIZE

SCHEDULE_ RATING

MCCS

QUANTITY

MCAT_FILE

CFF

32A

5K

2111201 2065

4

boltnut/bolt_ nut_mcat.ptd

CFF

32A

5K

2111210 2130

4

boltnut/bolt_ nut_mcat.ptd

34


Example: Bolt Nut Selection File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_bolt_nut_select.ptd> BOLT_NUT _CODE

SIZE

SCH_RATE

MCCS_CODE

QUANTITY

MCAT_FILE

CFA

10A

40

311AB40010

4

boltnut/bolt_nut_mcat .ptd

CFA

15A

40

311AB40015

4


CFA

20A

40

311AB40020

4


CFA

25A

40

311AB40025

4


CFA

32A

40

311AB40032

8


CFA

40A

40

311AB40040

8


CFA

50A

40

311AB40050

8


CFA

65A

40

311AB40065

8


CFA

80A

40

311AB40080

16


CFA

100A

40

311AB40100

16


CFA

125A

40

311AB40125

16


CFA

150A

40

311AB40150

16


CFA

200A

40

311AB40200

24


35


BOLT_NUT _CODE

SIZE

SCH_RATE

MCCS_CODE

QUANTITY

MCAT_FILE

CFA

250A

40

311AB40250

24


CFB

15A

40

357AA40015

4


CFB

20A

40

357AA40020

4


CFB

25A

40

357AA40025

4


CFB

32A

40

357AA40032

4


CFB

40A

40

357AA40040

8


CFB

50A

40

357AA40050

8


CFB

65A

40

357AA40065

8


CFB

80A

40

357AA40080

8


CFB

100A

40

357AA40100

16


CFB

125A

40

357AA40125

16


CFB

150A

40

357AA40150

16


CFB

200A

40

357AA40200

16


CFB

250A

40

357AA40250

24


36


Bolt Nut Master Catalog File The Bolt Nut Master Catalog file defines the material classification code (MCCS) and material for all types of bolts and nuts. The bolt nut code is always assigned to a fitting as a fitting parameter in the autoselection file *_asfile.ptd. Using the bolt nut code, Pro/PIPING retrieves the corresponding unique MCCS code from the bolt nut selection file piping_bolt_nut_select.ptd. This MCCS code is used to obtain the bolt nut material description from the Bolt Nut Master Catalog file, bolt_nut_mcat.ptd. Pro/PIPING uses this data for specification-driven bolt nut insertion. The Bolt Nut Master Catalog file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

MCCS_CODE

Bolt and Nut Material Classification Code

Bolt_Type

Type of Bolt

MATL_DESC

Bolt and Nut Material Description

Bulk_Item_Name

Bulk Item Name

Example: Bolt Nut Master Catalog File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/boltnut/bolt_nut_mcat.ptd> MCCS

BOLT_TYPE

Material_Description

Bolt_part_name

311AB40010

STUD

BOLT NUT ASTM CS 106

311AB40010

311AB40015

STUD


311AB40015

357AA40020

THREAD


357AA40020

357AA40025

THREAD


357AA40025

33AA30250

THREAD


33AA30250

33AA20250

NUT_TYPE1


33AA20250

37


MCCS

BOLT_TYPE

Material_Description

Bolt_part_name

322AA20050

NUT_TYPE1


322AA20050


322AA20065

322AA20065

NUT_TYPE1

322AI10032

NUT_TYPE2


322AI10032

322AI10040

NUT_TYPE2


322AI10040

322AI10050

NUT_TYPE2


322AI10050

322AA30100

NUT_TYPE2


322AA30100

Piping Material File The Piping Material file defines piping material by using material code, material description, and material density. The Piping Material file associates material codes with Pipe, Fitting, or Insulation Master Catalog files to perform the following specification-driven tasks: •

Pipeline Creation and Routing—Pro/PIPING retrieves the material description and material density from the Piping Material file. This data is based on the material code and the Pipe Master Catalog file name.

•

Fitting Insertion—Pro/PIPING retrieves the fitting material description from the Piping Material file. This data is based on the fitting material code and the Fitting Master Catalog file name.

•

Insulation Reporting—Pro/PIPING retrieves the insulation material description from the Piping Material file. This data is based on the insulation material code.

The Piping Material file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

MATL_CODE

Material code

MATL_DESC

Material description

MATL_DENSITY

Material density

MCAT_FILE

Piping Master Catalog file name

Note: You can define the Piping Material file name by setting the piping_material_file configuration option (default is piping_material.ptd)

38


Example: Piping Material File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_material.ptd MATL_CODE MATL_DESC

MATL_DENSITY

MCAT_FILE

AA

ASTM A234 WPB

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

AB

ASTM A105 GRB

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

AC

ASTM A106 GRB

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

AD

ASTM A216 GR WCB

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

AE

ASTM A193 GR B7

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

AF

ASTM A194 GR 2H

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

AG

ASBESTOS RING GASKET

2.0

gasket/asbestos_ring

AH

ASTM A181 GR1

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

AM

ASTM A312 TP321

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

AO

ASTM A351 CFBC

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

AP

ASTM A403 WP321

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

AQ

ASTM A182 F321

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

BA

ASTM A335 GR P1

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

BB

ASTM A217 GR WC1

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

BC

SP. W GASKET 4.6 % CHR

1.8

gasket/sp_ring

BD

ASTM A234 WPI

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

BE

ASTM A182 GR F1

7.8

pipe/astm_steel

Pipe Outer Diameter File The Pipe Outer Diameter file defines the pipe outside diameter (OD). The OD is a fixed value relative to the nominal pipe diameter and pipe material category. Pro/PIPING uses the Pipe Outer Diameter file to retrieve the pipe outside diameter and pipe size code based on the pipe size for specification-driven pipeline creation.

39


Pro/PIPING also uses this file to retrieve the fitting size code. This code is based on the fitting size and is used for fitting stock number creation. The Pipe Outer Diameter file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

SIZE


PIPE_OD

Pipe outside diameter (OD)

SIZE_CODE

Size code The size code can be used in a pipe or fitting stock number as a replacement for size.

Example: Pipe Outer Diameter File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/pipeod/od_steel.ptd SIZE

PIPE_OD

SIZE_CODE

1"

1.315

01

1-1/2"

1.9

1D

2"

2.375

02

3"

3.5

03

4"

1.315

04

6"

6.625

06

8"

8.625

08

10"

10.75

10

12"

12.75

12

14"

14

14

16"

16

16

18"

18

18

20"

20

20

24"

24

24

40


Pipe Thickness File The Pipe Thickness file defines the pipe wall thickness. The pipe wall thickness is a fixed value relative to the nominal pipe diameter, pipe schedule, and pipe material type. Pro/PIPING uses the Pipe Thickness file to retrieve the pipe wall thickness based on the pipe size and schedule for specification-driven pipeline creation. The Pipe Thickness file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

SIZE


SCH_RATE

Pipe schedule

PIPE_THK

Pipe wall thickness

Example: Pipe Thickness File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/pipethk/thk_steel.ptd SCH_RATE

SIZE

PIPE_THK

40

1"

0.133

40

1-1/2"

0.145

40

2"

0.154

40

3"

0.216

40

4"

0.237

40

6"

0.28

40

8"

0.322

40

10"

0.365

40

12"

0.406

40

14"

0.438

40

16"

0.5

40

18"

0.562

40

20"

0.594

40

24"

0.688

41


SCH_RATE

SIZE

PIPE_THK

80

1"

0.179

80

1-1/2"

0.2

80

2"

0.218

80

3"

0.3

80

4"

0.337

80

6"

0.432

80

8"

0.5

80

10"

0.594

80

12"

0.688

80

14"

0.75

80

16"

0.844

80

18"

0.938

80

20"

1.031

80

24"

1.218

Pipe Manufacture Directory File The Pipe Manufacture Directory file associates a pipe material code with a Bend file, a Bending Machine file, a Miter file, and a Bending Spring Back and Elongation file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the Bend file, Bend Machine file, Bending Spring Back and Elongation file, Miter file and names from the Pipe Manufacture Directory file. This data is based on pipe material code. Pro/PIPING uses the Pipe Manufacture Directory file during specification-driven pipeline creation. The Pipe Manufacture Directory file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

MATL_CODE

Material code

BEND_FILE

Bend file name

BEND_MACHINE_FILE

Bending Machine file name

MITER_FILE

Miter file name

42


Field Name

Description

BEND_SPRING_BACK_ELONGATION_FILE

Bending spring back and elongation file name

Note: You can define the Pipe Manufacture Directory file name by setting the piping_manufacture_dir_file configuration option (default is piping_manufacture_dir.ptd). Example: Pipe Manufacture Directory File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_manufacture_dir.ptd MATL_ CODE

BEND_ FILE

BEND_MACHINE BEND_SPRING_BACK_ _FILE ELONGATION_FILE

MITER_FILE

AA

bend/be nd_steel

bend_machine/b end_machine

miter/miter_ steel

AB

bend/be nd_steel

bend_machine/b end_machine

CA

bend/be nd_copp er

CB

bend/be nd_albs

bend_spring_back_elongation /bend_spring_back_elongatio n_steel

miter/miter_ steel

Bend File The Bend file defines the bend information for pipe sizes that are assigned to specific pipe material codes. Pipe material codes and the Bend files are associated in the Pipe Manufacture MCAT file. The Pipe Manufacture file is associated to the Pipe Master Catalog file for each material code through the Piping Material file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the bend radius from the Bend file. This bend data is based on the pipe size and is used for specification-driven pipeline creation and routing. Note: The Bend file units of measurement must be the same as those in the Pipe Outer Diameter file.

43


Example: Bend Radius

1 Bend radius The Bend file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

SIZE

Pipe nominal diameter.

RADIUS

Bend radius.

RATIO

Ratio between the bend radius and the pipe outside diameter.

MIN_RADIUS

Minimum bend radius.

MAX_RADIUS

Maximum bend radius.

MIN_ANGLE

Minimum bend angle.

MAX_ANGLE

Maximum bend angle.

Example: Bend File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/bend/bend_steel.ptd SIZE

RADIUS RATIO MIN_RADIUS MAX_RADIUS MIN_ANGLE MAX_ANGLE

15A

100

100

100

0

360

20A

125

125

125

0

360

25A

125

125

125

0

360

32A

135

135

135

0

360

44


SIZE

RADIUS RATIO MIN_RADIUS MAX_RADIUS MIN_ANGLE MAX_ANGLE

40A

145

145

145

0

360

50A

185

185

185

0

360

65A

230

230

230

0

360

80A

265

265

265

0

360

100A

345

345

345

0

360

125A

420

420

420

0

360

150A

560

560

560

0

360

200A

750

750

750

0

360

Bending Spring Back and Elongation File The Bending Spring Back and Elongation file is used to store the spring back and elongation for a given pipe material. The amount of spring back and elongation are determined based on the pipe size, bend radius and bend angle. Note: The Bending Spring Back and Elongation file units of measurement must be the same as those in the Pipe Outer Diameter file. The Bending Spring Back file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

SIZE


RADIUS

Bend radius.

ANGLE

Bend angle in degree.

SPRING_BACK_LEN

Spring back length.

ELONGATION_LENGTH

Elongation Length.

Example: Bending Spring Back and Elongation File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/bending_spring_back_elongation/be nding_spring_back_elongation_steel.ptd SIZE

RADIUS

ANGLE

SPRING_BACK_LEN ELONGATION_LEN

15A

100

65

1

0

45


SIZE

RADIUS

ANGLE

SPRING_BACK_LEN ELONGATION_LEN

15A

100

75

1

0

15A

100

90

2

2

32A

135

5

0

0

32A

135

45

1

1

40A

145

45

1

1

40A

145

90

5

4

80A

265

10

0

0

80A

265

90

8

9

100A

345

5

0

0

200A

750

20

1

0

Bend Machine File The Bend Machine file defines bend manufacturing information for a particular bending machine. The Bend Machine file is associated with the pipe material codes in the Pipe Manufacture Directory file. This material code is associated with the Pipe Master Catalog file through the Piping Master Catalog Directory file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the start, middle, and end clamp lengths from the Bending Machine file. This data is based on pipe size and is used during bend creation and design rule checking. Note: The Bend Machine file units of measurement must be the same as those in the Pipe Outer Diameter file. The following examples illustrate bend creation: Example 1: Only One Bend in a Pipe Spool

1 Start segment length

46


2 Bending start 3 Bend radius 4 End segment length Example 2: More Than One Bend in a Pipe Spool

1 Start segment length 2 Bending start 3 Bend radius 4 Middle segment length 5 End segment length The Bending Machine file format is described in the next table. FIELD NAME

DESCRIPTION

SIZE


START_CLAMP_LEN

Minimum clamp length required before the first bend of the pipe spool. Design rule: The length of the start segment should be equal or longer than this value.

MID_CLAMP_LEN

Minimum clamp length required between two bends of the pipe spool. Design rule: The length of the middle segment should be equal or longer than this value.

END_CLAMP_LEN

Minimum clamp length after the last bend of the pipe spool. Design rule: The length of the end segment should be equal or longer than this value.

47


Example: Bend Machine File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/bend_machine/ bend_machine_one.ptd SIZE

START_CLAMP_LEN

½"

3.0

¾"

3.0

1"

3.0

1-1/2"

5.0

2"

5.8

3"

6.0

4"

10.5

6"

13.0

MID_CLAMP_LEN

END_CALMP_LEN

Miter File The Miter file defines miter information for pipe sizes that are assigned to specific pipe material codes. The pipe material codes are associated with the Pipe Master Catalog file through the Piping Material file. Pro/PIPING uses the Miter file to retrieve the miter radius, the minimum and maximum miter angles, and the number of cuts. The pipeline size and the vertex angle are used to select the miter type from the Miter file when you create miters. Note: The vertex angle must be greater than the minimum miter angle (MIN_ANGLE) and less than or equal to the maximum miter angle (MAX_ANGLE). The miter types can be one cut, two cut, three cut, or four cut. The miter radius and the number of cuts from the selected miter file are used to create miters. Note: The unit of measurement in the Miter file is defined using the Units System Directory File. The Miter file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

SIZE


RADIUS

Radius of the miter

MIN_ANGLE

Minimum miter angle

48


Field Name

Description

MAX_ANGLE

Maximum miter angle

CUT_NUMBER

Number of miter cuts

Example: Miter File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/miter/miter_steel.ptd SIZE

RADIUS

MIN_ANGLE

MAX_ANGLE

CUT_NUMBER

250A

0

0

30

1

250A

267

30

60

2

250A

267

60

90

3

300A

0

0

30

1

300A

319

30

60

2

300A

319

60

90

3

350A

0

0

30

1

350A

356

30

60

2

350A

356

60

90

3

400A

0

0

30

1

400A

406

30

60

2

400A

406

60

90

3

450A

0

0

31

1

450A

457

30

60

2

450A

457

60

90

3

500A

0

0

31

1

500A

508

30

60

2

500A

508

60

90

3

49


End Compatibility File The End Compatibility file defines all of the compatible pipe and fitting end types used in piping design. Pro/PIPING uses this file to determine if two ends are compatible and can be mated. End type compatibility is based on end types and fitting ratings. End Type Compatibility occurs during specification-driven pipeline creation, routing, and fitting insertion. The End Compatibility file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

Mandatory

END_TYPE1

First pipe or fitting end type

YES

RATING1

First fitting rating

NO

END_TYPE2

Second pipe or fitting end type

YES

RATING2

Second fitting rating

NO

Note: You can define the End Compatibility file name by setting the piping_end_compatibility_file configuration option (default is piping_end_compatibility.ptd). Example: End Compatibility File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_end_compatibility.ptd END_TYPE1

RATING1

END_TYPE2

BE

BW

BW

BW

FF

150

GF

RATING2

150

Insulation File The Insulation file defines the insulation data for pipes and fittings. Pro/PIPING retrieves the insulation material code and material thickness from the Insulation file and uses this insulation data for use in insulation modeling and reporting.

50


The Insulation file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

TYPE

Insulation type. Pro/PIPING supports the following insulation types: o

GENERAL

o

TRACE_PIPE

Note: Only enter an insulation type in the first entry field for each type. CATEGORY

Pro/PIPING accepts any of the Piping Master Catalog Directory file categories.

MATL_CODE

Insulation material code.

MATL_THK

Insulation thickness. Note: Required when the insulation material thickness is applicable.

SIZE

Pipe and fitting nominal diameter. Pro/PIPING uses this data to apply the selected insulation (material type and thickness) to the pipes and fittings.

STOCK_NO

Stock number for the insulation material.

Example: Insulation File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/insulation/general_fitting.ptd TYPE

CATEGORY SIZE

MATL_CODE MATL_THK

GENERAL

PIPE

32A

MWCOVER

30

PIPE

40A

MWCOVER

30

PIPE

50A

MWCOVER

30

PIPE

65A

MWCOVER

30

PIPE

80A

MWCOVER

30

PIPE

100A

MWCOVER

30

PIPE

125A

MWCOVER

30

STOCKNO

51


TYPE

CATEGORY SIZE

MATL_CODE MATL_THK

PIPE

MWCOVER

150A

PIPE

SWIRE

PIPE

BOND

PIPE

GCLOTH

BEND

TAPE

ELBOW

TAPE

FLANGE

MWCOVER

FLANGE

GCLOTH

FLANGE

GYARN

FLANGE

SHOOK

VALVE

MWCOVER

VALVE

GCLOTH

VALVE

GYARN

VALVE

SHOOK

STOCKNO

30

25

25

Tip: Pipe Insulation Definition When you define pipe insulation, start from the object being insulated and work outward. Define each insulation material part, one by one, in the radius direction. The following diagram illustrates the insulation definition process:

52


Pipe Insulation: Mineral wool cover/provision refrigeration pipe cover Steel wire Bond Cloth: Glass cloth/galvanized steel

Insulation define direction

Appearance Map File The Piping Appearance Map Master Catalog (MCAT) file archives all of the colors used during piping design. Click View > Color and Appearance to create or modify colors. You assign colors to specifications during Specification Directory file creation and modification. You can define the Appearance Map file name by setting the piping_appearance_map_file configuration option (default is piping_appearance.map). Combined Size Code File The combined size code file defines combined size codes for pipes and fittings of various combinations of sizes. You can use the combined size code to define the stock number format for pipes and fittings that represent all combinations of sizes. The Combined Size Code file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Definition

SIZE

Size of the pipe or the inlet size of the fitting

NSIZE

New size or the outlet size of the fitting

BSIZE

Branch size or branch let size of the fitting

COMBINED_SIZE_CODE

Combined size code that represents a combination of sizes

Pro/PIPING, by default, uses the size code specified in the default combined size code file for all the pipes and fittings.

53


Example: Combined Size Code File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/pipeod/combined_size_code.ptd SIZE

NSIZE

BSIZE

100A

COMBINED_SIZE_CODE 100

100A

50A

100A

100A

A09 65A

010

Note: •

The pipes and fittings in the first row of the previous table have only one size. Therefore, no values are specified for NSIZE and BSIZE.

•

A REDUCER fitting having main size 100A and new size 50A can be represented by a combined size code A09. This combined size code represents the size combination 100A x 50A. Because the combined size code such as A09 is userdefined, it may not have any visual relation to the actual fitting size combination.

•

A TEE fitting with a branch size of 65A is represented by a combined size code 010 as shown in the third row of the previous table.

Tip: Defining Size Codes Pro/PIPING uses the following rules to assign size codes while defining the material classification code format and the stock number format for pipes, fittings, and assembly fitting records in the Auto-Selection files: •

The combined size code defined in SIZE_CODE_FILE that is specified in the Piping Master Catalog Directory file is used to represent keyword COMBINED_SIZE_CODE.

•

The size code defined in PIPE_OD_FILE that is specified in the Piping Master Catalog Directory file is used to represent keywords such as SIZE_CODE, NSIZE_CODE, and BSIZE_CODE.

Units System File The Units System file specifies the units system that can be used for the various parameter values in the piping data files. You can define the Units System file using the UNITS_SYSTEM_DIC_FILE configuration option. The default file is piping_units_system_dic_file.ptd. The units system defined in standard Pro/ENGINEER is used to specify units in the piping data files.

54


The Unit System file format is described in the next table. Field Name

Description

FILE

Data file name

PRO_UNIT_SYS

Pro/ENGINEER units system used for the data file Pro/PIPING supports the following predefined Pro/ENGINEER units system: o

PROE_DEF—Inch Lbm Second

o

CGS—Centimeter Gram Second

o

FPS—Foot Pound Second

o

IPS—Inch Pound Second

o

MKS—Meter Kilogram Second

o

MMKS—Millimeter Kilogram Second

o

MMNS—Millimeter Newton Second

Note: Pro/PIPING also uses the other user-defined Pro/ENGINEER units systems.

Example: Units System File Default Path /text/piping_data/master_catalog/piping_units_system_dic_file.ptd File

PRO_UNIT_SYS

pipeod/od_steel

MMKS

pipeod/od_copper

MMKS

pipeod/od_albrass-nicu

MMKS

pipethk/thk_copper

MMKS

pipethk/thk_steel

MMKS

pipethk/thk_sus

MMKS

55


File

PRO_UNIT_SYS

bend/bend_albs

MMKS

bend/bend_copper

MMKS

bend/bend_steel

MMKS

miter/miter_steel

MMKS

insulation/exhaust

MMKS

insulation/general

MMKS

insulation/general_fitting

MMKS

insulation/sweat

MMKS

insulation/trace_pipe

MMKS

piping_material

MMKS

bend_machine/bend_machine

MMKS

bend_machine/bend_springback_elong_steel

MMKS

piping_manufacture_dir

MMKS

Project Data Files About Project Data Files Project Data files are Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store all project specific design information. You create Project Data files when you set up Specification-Driven Piping for each piping project. To set up Specification-Driven Piping, you must define each piping specification and assign piping data to them using the Define Piping Specification dialog box (PIPING > Set Up > Spec DB). Pro/PIPING writes this piping data to the following Project Data files: •

Specification Directory Files—Store all piping specifications, mnemonics, colors, layers, insulation codes, and assigned Auto-Selection files that you selected for a piping project.

•

Auto-Selection Files—Contain all pipes, fittings, bends, miters, and assembly fittings that you selected for a piping project. Pro/PIPING retrieves this data from the Master Catalog (MCAT) files.

•

Insulation Directory Files—Contain all insulation files, insulation codes, and colors that you selected for a piping project. Pro/PIPING retrieves this data from the Master Catalog (MCAT) files.

56


The Fitting Category Map Files are Project Data files in which you assign fitting categories to Fitting Category buttons in the Insert Fitting and Insert Group Fitting dialog boxes. These buttons allow you to easily access all fittings for the selected pipeline specification during fitting insertion. How Project Data Files Work As you design a piping project and select piping specifications, Pro/PIPING uses the Project Data files to retrieve the piping data that you assigned to each specification and dynamically populates the current dialog box. This simplifies the piping design process. For example, before you begin designing your piping project, you set up Specification-Driven Piping. You assign piping data to piping specification records A7A, 12A, and 14C. Pro/PIPING retrieves the data from the Master Catalog (MCAT) files and saves the records in the Project Data files. As you create the pipeline or insert a fitting for specification 12A, only the piping data that you assigned to the specification 12A record becomes available and populates the dialog box. All other data remains archived. Note: Pro/PIPING saves all Project Data files in one directory. You can change this directory by setting the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. About Specification Directory Files Specification Directory files are Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store all piping specifications for a piping project. You create Specification Directory files when you set up Specification-Driven Piping for each piping project. To create a Specification Directory file, you define all piping specification records by assigning the following data using the Define Piping Specification dialog box: •

Specification—All project specification names for a piping project.

•

Mnemonic—Fluid or piping system assigned to each specification.

•

Color—Color assigned to each specification. Pro/PIPING retrieves colors from the Piping Appearance Map Master Catalog (MCAT) file.

•

Layer—Layer assigned to each specification.

•

Auto-Selection File—Auto-Selection file assigned to each specification. AutoSelection files store all pipe, fitting, and assembly fitting data that you assigned for each specification record.

•

Insulation Code—Insulation code assigned to each specification. The insulation code points to the Insulation Directory file. This file stores the insulation data that you assigned to a specification.

57


How Specification Directory Files Work Pipeline Creation After you open the Create Pipeline dialog box (PIPING > Pipeline > Create/Route), Pro/PIPING retrieves all piping specifications from the Specification Directory file. You select a specification and Pro/PIPING retrieves the specification name, mnemonic, color, and layer from the Specification Directory file for the selected specification. This file also directs Pro/PIPING to the Auto-Selection and Insulation Directory files where Pro/PIPING retrieves the pipe, fitting, and insulation data that you assigned to the specification. Pro/PIPING populates the Create Pipeline dialog box with this data. You select the piping data needed and click to create the pipeline. Pro/PIPING copies the selected piping data to the linestock and insulation features, and opens the ROUTE PIPE submenu. You can begin to route the pipeline. Fitting Insertion After you select a pipeline and insertion point, Pro/PIPING retrieves the piping data from the Specification Directory file. This data includes the specification name and the pipe size from the pipeline. The piping data directs Pro/PIPING to the AutoSelection file where Pro/PIPING retrieves the fittings that you assigned to the specification. Pro/PIPING populates the appropriate fitting insertion dialog boxes with this data. You select a fitting with the Fitting Category buttons. After you click a button, Pro/PIPING retrieves only the fittings (in the category) that you assigned to the Auto-Selection file for that specification. For example, you click PIPING > Fitting > Insert and select the pipeline for specification 12A. You select the valve fitting category button to select a valve fitting. Pro/PIPING retrieves all valve fittings that you assigned to the specification 12A Auto-Selection file (12a_asfile.ptd). After you select the valve fitting, click insert it. The following table describes the Specification Directory file format: Field Name

Description

Required

SPEC

Specification name.

YES

MNEMONIC

Mnemonic name (system or fluid).

NO

COLOR

Color name.

YES

LAYER

Layer name - Maximum 31 characters.

NO

AUTO_SELECT_FILE

Auto-Selection File name assigned to each specification. Points to the AutoSelection File.

YES

58

to


Field Name

Description

Required

INS_CODE

Insulation code assigned to each specification. Points to the Insulation Directory File.

NO

Note: You can define the Specification Directory file name by setting the piping_spec_dir_file configuration option (default is piping_spec_dir.ptd). Example: Specification Directory File Default Path: /text/piping_data/sample_project/piping_specs_dir.ptd SPEC MNEMONIC COLOR

LAYER

AUTO_SELECT_FILE INS_CODE

A7A

WC

YELLOW

a7a_layer

a7a_asfile

ES

B7A

HC

BLUE

b7a_layer

b7a_asfile

EH

MAGENTA

d2b_layer

d2b_asfile

EK

D2B

To Create a Specification Directory File Note: Because Pro/PIPING requires that you select an Auto-Selection file for each specification record (in the Specification Directory file), you must create the AutoSelection files before you define the specification records. 1. Create or open a piping an assembly. 2. Click Applications > Piping. The PIPING menu appears. 3. Click Set Up > Spec DB. The Define Piping Specification dialog box opens. 4. Click

to create a new file. The New File dialog box opens.

5. Under Type, select Spec Directory File and enter a file name. This file will contain all specifications for the entire piping project. It is recommended that you use a descriptive file name such as project_name_specs.ptd. 6. Click to open the file. Pro/PIPING displays the file name in the border next to Specification Directory File. You can begin to define a specification record. 7. Under Define Record, enter a piping specification name (required). The Specification box lists all specification records in the current Specification Directory file. 8. Type a mnemonic (optional). The Mnemonic box lists each mnemonic assigned to a specification record in the current Specification Directory file. If you assign a mnemonic, Pro/PIPING assigns the selected color to both the specification and the mnemonic. 59


9. Type a layer name in the Layer box for specification and mnemonic (optional). 10. Select a color (required). Colors can be assigned to the specification and mnemonic. The Color box lists all colors stored in the Piping Appearance Map (MCAT) File. You can define new colors (View > Color and Appearance). to open the Select Auto 11. Select an Auto-Selection file (required). Click Selection File dialog box. Select an Auto-Selection file and double-click. The selected file populates the Auto Selection box. The current directory is based on the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 12. Do one of the following: o

Select the Insulation Code check box to assign an insulation code to the current specification record (optional). The Insulation Code box lists all insulation codes in the Insulation Directory Project Data file.

o

Clear the Insulation Code check box and make the insulation codes unavailable to the specification.

13. Click to add the new specification record to the Specification Directory file. Pro/PIPING lists the record under Select Record. 14. Click to save the file. The current directory is based on the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 15. Click File > Exit. About Auto-Selection Files Auto-Selection files are Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store subsets of data that you select from the Master Catalog (MCAT) files. You create an Auto-Selection file for each project specification record (Specification Directory file) by using the Define Piping Specification dialog box. Auto-Selection files allow Pro/PIPING to retrieve only the piping data that you assigned to a specification. Each Auto-Selection file contains the following data: •

Pipe Data—Pipe categories, sizes, schedules, end types, material codes, Pipe MCAT file names, and stock numbers. Pro/PIPING retrieves this data from the appropriate MCAT files and saves it in pipe records that you define.

•

Fitting Data—Fitting selection names, categories, sizes, end types, ratings, material codes, bolt nut codes, fitting MCAT file names, and stock numbers. Pro/PIPING retrieves this data from the appropriate MCAT files and saves it in fitting records that you define.

•

Assembly Fitting Data—Assembly fitting selection names, sizes, configurations, and stock numbers. Pro/PIPING retrieves this data from the appropriate MCAT files and saves it in assembly fitting records that you define.

60


Note: After you create an Auto-Selection file, you must assign it to the corresponding specification record (in the Specification Directory file) using the Define Piping Specification dialog box (Auto-Selection box). For example, you assign the Auto-Selection file created for specification 11C (11c_asfile.ptd) to the specification 11C record in the Specification Directory file. This allows the Specification Directory file to direct Pro/PIPING to the correct AutoSelection file. How Auto-Selection Files Work After you select a specification for pipeline creation or select a pipeline for fitting insertion, Pro/PIPING retrieves the specification data from the Specification Directory file. The Specification Directory file also directs Pro/PIPING to the appropriate AutoSelection file to retrieve the pipe, fitting, and assembly fitting data. Pro/PIPING retrieves the Auto-Selection piping data from the pipe, fitting, and assembly fitting records that you defined for each specification. This data populates appropriate dialog boxes. Auto-Selection Files simplify the piping process and reduce design error by making available only a subset of the Master Catalog file piping data. The following table describes the Auto-Selection File format: Field Name

Description

CATEGORY

Pipe or fitting category

SNAME

Fitting selection name

SIZE

Pipe or fitting inlet nominal size

NSIZE

Fitting outlet nominal size

BSIZE

Fitting branch outlet nominal size

SCH_RATE

Pipe schedule or fitting rating

MATL_CODE

Pipe or fitting material code

MCAT_FILE

Master Catalog (MCAT) file name

STOCKNO

Pipe or fitting stock number

MCCS_CODE

Pipe or fitting Material Classification Code

CODE

Fitting code—Indicates how a certain fitting is to be inserted

BOLT_NUT_CODE

Bolt and Nut Code for the fitting

61


Example: Auto-Selection File Default Path: /text/piping_data/sample_project/ms_asfile.ptd CATEGORY

S SIZE NAME

PIPE

SCH_ RATE

MATL_ CODE

MCAT_ FILE

STOCK NO

MCCS_ CODE

CODE

10A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -010

311A B4001 0

PIPE

PIPE

15A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -015

311A B4001 5

PIPE

PIPE

20A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -020

311A B4002 0

PIPE

PIPE

25A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -025

311A B4002 5

PIPE

PIPE

32A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -032

311A B4003 2

PIPE

PIPE

40A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -040

311A B4004 0

PIPE

PIPE

50A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -050

311A B4005 0

PIPE

PIPE

65A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -065

311A B4006 5

PIPE

PIPE

80A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -080

311A B4008 0

PIPE

PIPE

100A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st

PIPEA B40PE

311A B4010

PIPE

62

N SIZE

B SIZE

BOLT_ NUT_ CODE


CATEGORY

S SIZE NAME

N SIZE

B SIZE

SCH_ RATE

MATL_ CODE

MCAT_ FILE

STOCK NO

MCCS_ CODE

eel

-100

0

CODE

PIPE

125A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -125

311A B4012 5

PIPE

PIPE

150A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -150

311A B4015 0

PIPE

PIPE

200A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -200

311A B4020 0

PIPE

PIPE

250A

40

AB

pipe/p ipe_st eel

PIPEA B40PE -250

311A B4025 0

PIPE

BEND

40

AB

bend/ bend_ steel

BEND

MITER

40

AB

miter/ miter_ steel

MITE R

BRAN CH

BRA N

15 A

40

AA

fitting/ tee_st raight _bw_s teel

BRAN AA40B W-015

357A A4001 5

BRAN CH

BRAN CH

BRA N

20 A

40

AA


BRAN AA40B W-020

357A A4002 0

BRAN CH

BRAN CH

BRA N

25 A

40

AA


BRAN AA40B W-025

357A A4002 5

BRAN CH

63

BOLT_ NUT_ CODE


CATEGORY

S SIZE NAME

N SIZE

BRAN CH

BRA N

32 A

BRAN CH

BRA N

BRAN CH

SCH_ RATE

MATL_ CODE

MCAT_ FILE

STOCK NO

MCCS_ CODE

CODE

20A

40

AA

fitting/ tee_re ducin g_bw _steel

BRAN AA40B W032X0 20

357A A4003 2020

BRAN CH_R EDU CING

50 A

40A

40

AA



357A A4005 0040

BRAN CH_R EDU CING

BRA N

15 0A

80A

40

AA



357A A4015 0080

BRAN CH_R EDU CING

BRAN CH_ LET

OLE T

20 A

15A

5

AA

fitting/ weldol et

OLETA A5BW015

357A A5020

BRAN CH_L ET

BRAN CH_ LET

OLE T

25 A

15A

5

AA

fitting/ weldol et

OLETA A5BW015

357A A5025

BRAN CH_L ET

BRAN CH_ LET

OLE T

25 A

20A

5

AA

fitting/ weldol et

OLETA A5BW020

357A A5025

BRAN CH_L ET

ELBO W

ELB OW4 5LR

50 A

40

AA

fitting/ elbow _45lo ng_b w_ste el

ELBO W45LR AA40B W-050

351A A4005 0

ELBO W

ELBO W

ELB OW4 5LR

65 A

40

AA



351A A4006 5

ELBO W

64

B SIZE

BOLT_ NUT_ CODE


CATEGORY

S SIZE NAME

ELBO W

ELB OW9 0LR

FLAN GE

N SIZE

B SIZE

SCH_ RATE

MATL_ CODE

MCAT_ FILE

STOCK NO

MCCS_ CODE

CODE

20 0A

40

AA



351A A4020 0

ELBO W

NEC KFL ANG E

15 A

30

AA

fitting/ flange _neck _rf

NECK FLANG EAA30 FLRF015

33AA 30015

FLAN GE

CFA

FLAN GE

NEC KFL ANG E

20 A

30

AA

fitting/ flange _neck _rf

NECK FLANG EAA30 FLRF020

33AA 30020

FLAN GE

CFA

FLAN GE

SLIP FLA NGE

10 A

20

AA

fitting/ flange _slip

SLIPFL ANGE AA20F LRF010

33AA 20010

FLAN GE

CFB

FLAN GE

SLIP FLA NGE

15 A

20

AA



33AA 20015

FLAN GE

CFB

FLAN GE

SLIP FLA NGE

20 0A

20

AA



33AA 20200

FLAN GE

CFB

FLAN GE

SLIP FLA NGE

25 0A

20

AA



33AA 20250

FLAN GE

CFB

GENE

BFL ANG

10

5

AA

fitting/ flange

BFLAN GEAA5

33AA

INLIN

CFC

65

BOLT_ NUT_ CODE


CATEGORY

S SIZE NAME

MCAT_ FILE

STOCK NO

MCCS_ CODE

CODE

RAL

E

A

_blan k

FLFF010

5010

E

GENE RAL

BFL ANG E

15 A

5

AA

fitting/ flange _blan k

BFLAN GEAA5 FLFF015

33AA 5015

INLIN E

GASK ET

GAS KET

10 A

20

AG

fitting/ gaske t_slip

GASK ETAG2 0GKFF -010

34AG 20010

GASK ET

GASK ET

GAS KET

15 A

20

AG

fitting/ gaske t_slip

GASK ETAG2 0GKFF -015

34AG 20015

GASK ET

REDU CER

CRE D

20 A

15A

40

AA

fitting/ red_c oncen tric_b w_ste el

CRED AA40B W020X0 15

356A A4002 0015

INLIN E_RE DUCI NG

REDU CER

CRE D

25 A

15A

40

AA

fitting/ red_c oncen tric_b w_ste el

CRED AA40B W025X0 15

356A A4002 5015

INLIN E_RE DUCI NG

REDU CER

ERE D

25 0A

200 A

40

AA

fitting/ red_e ccentr ic_bw

ERED AA40B W250X2 00

356A A4025 0200

INLIN E_RE DUCI NG

VALV E

GAT E

50 A

20

AA

fitting/ vl_gat e_flrf

GATE AA20F LRF050

322A A2005 0

INLIN E

CFD

VALV

GAT

65

20

AA

fitting/ vl_gat

GATE AA20F

322A A2006

INLIN

CFD

66

N SIZE

B SIZE

SCH_ RATE

MATL_ CODE

BOLT_ NUT_ CODE

CFC


CATEGORY

S SIZE NAME

N SIZE

B SIZE

SCH_ RATE

E

E

A

VALV E

GAT E

80 A

20

JOINT

COU PLIN G

25 A

JOINT

COU PLIN G

JOINT

MATL_ CODE

MCAT_ FILE

STOCK NO

MCCS_ CODE

CODE

e_flrf

LRF065

5

E

AA

fitting/ vl_gat e_flrf

GATE AA20F LRF080

322A A2008 0

INLIN E

40

AA

fitting/ coupli ng_sw _steel

COUP LINGA A40S W-025

354A A4002 5

INLIN E_JOI NT

32 A

40

AA



354A A4003 2

INLIN E_JOI NT

COU PLIN G

40 A

40

AA



354A A4004 0

INLIN E_JOI NT

ANGL E_VAL VE

ANG LE_ VAL VE

15 A

10

AA

fitting/ vl_an gle_flf f

ANGL E_VAL VEAA1 0FF015

322A A1001 5

COR NER

CFL

ANGL E_VAL VE

ANG LE_ VAL VE

20 A

10

AA

fitting/ vl_an gle_flf f

ANGL E_VAL VEAA1 0FF020

322A A1002 0

COR NER

CFL

ASSE MBLY

DRA IN_A

15A

BRAN ,NIPP LE,G ATE, NIPPL E

DRAIN _A-015

ASSE MBLY

ASSE MBLY

DRA IN_A

20A

BRAN ,NIPP LE,

DRAIN _A-020

ASSE MBLY

67

BOLT_ NUT_ CODE

CFD


CATEGORY

S SIZE NAME

N SIZE

B SIZE

SCH_ RATE

MATL_ CODE

MCAT_ FILE

STOCK NO

MCCS_ CODE

CODE

GATE ,NIPP LE

To Create an Auto-Selection File Note: Because Pro/PIPING requires that you select an Auto-Selection file for each specification record (in the Specification Directory file), you must create AutoSelection files before defining the specification records. You must also create at least one Auto-Selection record in order to create an Auto-Selection file. 1. Create or open a piping assembly. 2. Click Applications > Piping. The PIPING menu appears. 3. Click Set Up > Spec DB. The Define Piping Specification dialog box opens. 4. Click


5. Under Type, select Auto-Selection File and type a file name. This file will contain all pipe and fitting data assigned to one piping specification. It is highly recommended that you use a file name that includes the file descriptor. For example, _asfile.ptd. 6. Click to open the file. Pro/PIPING displays the file name in the border next to Auto-Selection File. 7. Under Auto-Selection File, select the Pipe, Fitting, and Assembly (fitting) tabs to define these records for each specification. To Create an Auto-Selection Pipe Record Note: •

You must read To Create an Auto-Selection File to follow the steps below.

•

The Pipe tab (Define Piping Specification dialog box) allows you to define all pipe records for Auto-Selection files. You assign an Auto-Selection file to a piping specification in the Specification Directory file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the AutoSelection file pipe data to create pipelines.

To define an Auto-Selection pipe record, select pipe data from the boxes under Define Record. 1. Under Select Pipe, select a pipe category (required). The Category box lists all pipe categories retrieved from the Piping Master Catalog (MCAT) Directory file.

68

BOLT_ NUT_ CODE


2. Select a Pipe MCAT file (required). The Master Catalog box lists all Pipe MCAT files assigned to the selected pipe category in the Piping MCAT Directory file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the file names from the Piping MCAT Directory file. 3. Select a pipe material code (required). The Material Code box lists all pipe material codes assigned to the selected Pipe MCAT file and defined in the Piping Material MCAT file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the material codes from the Piping Material MCAT file. 4. Select a pipe schedule (required). The Schedule box lists all pipe schedules assigned to the selected Pipe MCAT file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the schedules from the Pipe MCAT file. 5. Select a pipe end type (required). The End Type box lists all pipe end types assigned to the selected Pipe MCAT file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the end types from the Pipe MCAT file. a. You can confirm or change the pipe sizes assigned to the selected Pipe next to Sizes. The PIPE Size Table dialog MCAT file (optional).Click box opens. Pro/PIPING lists all pipe sizes assigned to the selected Pipe MCAT file. Each pipe size contains a check box to indicate selection status. Pro/PIPING selects all sizes by default. Clear each check box to make a pipe size unavailable from the pipe record. You can click the Pro/PIPING default selections. b. Click

to reset the list to

to save all changes. The PIPE Size Table dialog box closes.

6. Select a stock number format for the pipe record (required). The Select Stock Number Format box lists the stock number formats defined for the pipe records in the current Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING displays the pipe stock number during information reporting. Under Select Stock Number Format, perform the following tasks to select the pipe stock number format: a. Select the stock number format keywords. You can select Pro/PIPING format keywords from the Keyword box, enter words or ASCII characters required by your project, or choose a combination of both. b. Select a delimiter. A delimiter separates areas in a listing. You can select a delimiter from the Delimiter box or enter a new delimiter. Note that delimiters must be enclosed with commas omitting any white space (,-,). 7. Select a material classification code (MCCS) format for the pipe record (optional). The Select Material Classification Code Format box lists all material classification code formats defined for the pipe records in the current AutoSelection file.

69


Under Select Material Classification Code Format, select an MCCS format as follows: a. Select the MCCS format keywords. You can select Pro/PIPING format keywords from the Keyword box, enter words or ASCII characters required by your project, or choose a combination of both. b. Select a delimiter. A delimiter separates areas in a listing. You can select a delimiter from the Delimiter box or enter a new delimiter. Note that delimiters must be enclosed with commas omitting any white space (,-,). 8. Select either one or both of the following pipe corner type check boxes for the pipe record (optional): o

Allow Bend—Enables corner bends for the selected pipe.

o

Allow Miter—Allows mitered corners for the selected pipe.

9. Click to add the new pipe record to the Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING lists the record under Select Record. 10. Click to save the Auto-Selection file. The current directory is based on the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 11. Repeat the above steps to define additional pipe records. or Click the Fitting tab to define all fitting records for the current Auto-Selection file. or Click File > Exit. To Create an Auto-Selection Fitting Record Note: •


•

The Fitting tab (Define Piping Specification dialog box) allows you to define all fitting records for Auto-Selection files. You assign an Auto-Selection file to a piping specification in the Specification Directory file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the Auto-Selection file fitting data during fitting insertion.

To define an Auto-Selection fitting record, select the fitting data from the boxes under Define Record. 1. Under Select Fitting, select a fitting category (required). The Category box lists all fitting categories retrieved from the Piping Master Catalog (MCAT) Directory file.

70


2. Select a Fitting MCAT file (required). The Master Catalog box lists all Fitting MCAT files assigned to the selected fitting category in the Piping MCAT Directory file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the file names from the Piping MCAT Directory file. 3. Select a fitting material code (required). The Material Code box lists all fitting material codes assigned to the selected Fitting MCAT file and defined in the Piping Material file. 4. Select a fitting rating (required). The Rating/Schedule box lists all fitting ratings available in the selected Fitting MCAT file. 5. The End Type boxes list the first and second end type values available for the selected fitting and defined in the respective master catalog file. Note: The selection in the End Type boxes is based on the following: o

If the fitting master catalog specifies only one value for the first or the second end type or both end types, the appropriate end type box displays an end type value that you cannot modify.

o

If the fitting master catalog specifies more than one value for the first, second, or both end types, the appropriate end type boxes display a list of the end type values. Select the required end types from the list.

o

If the fitting master catalog does not specify any value for either the first or the second end type, you cannot select any value for the corresponding end type.

6. The Bolt Nut Code box lists the bolt nut codes available in the Bolt-Nut Selection file. Select the bolt nut code to be assigned to the fitting from the list. Pro/PIPING assigns the default bolt nut code that is specified to the selected fitting in the Piping MCAT Directory File. 7. You can select the fittings based on their sizes from the selected Fitting MCAT file (optional). a. Click adjacent to Sizes. One of two Size Table dialog boxes opens according to the type of fitting selected from the Master Catalog box. Pro/PIPING lists all fitting sizes assigned to the selected Fitting MCAT file. Each fitting size contains a check box to indicate selection status. Pro/PIPING selects all sizes by default. Clear each check box to make a fitting size unavailable from the fitting record. You can click to reset the list to the Pro/PIPING default selections, which is based on all the available sizes in the selected fitting MCAT file. b. Click

to save all changes. The Size Table dialog box closes.

8. Select a stock number format for the fitting record (required). The Select Stock Number Format box lists all stock number formats defined for the fitting records in the current Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING displays the fitting stock number during information reporting.

71


Under Select Stock Number Format, perform the following tasks to select the fitting stock number format: a. Select the stock number format keywords. You can select Pro/PIPING format keywords from the Keyword box, enter words or ASCII characters required by your project, or choose a combination of both. b. Select a delimiter. A delimiter separates areas in a listing. You can select a delimiter from the Delimiter box or enter a new delimiter. Note that delimiters must be enclosed with commas omitting any white space (,-,). 9. Select a material classification code (MCCS) format for the fitting record (optional). The Select Material Classification Code Format box lists all material classification code formats defined for the fitting records in the current AutoSelection file. Under Select Material Classification Code Format, perform the following tasks to select an MCCS format: a. Select the MCCS format keywords. You can select Pro/PIPING format keywords from the Keyword box, enter new keywords unique to your project, or choose a combination of both. b. Select a delimiter. A delimiter separates areas in a listing. You can select a delimiter from the Delimiter box or enter a new delimiter. Note that delimiters must be enclosed with commas omitting any white space (,-,). 10. Under Specify Selection Name, enter a fitting selection name (required). The Specify Selection Name box lists all selection names defined for the fitting records in the current Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING uses the fitting selection names to populate the Selection Name boxes in the Insert Fitting and Insert Group Fitting dialog boxes during fitting insertion. Note: You can select or specify a new value using the Specify Selection Name list only if the required fitting selection name is not specified in the Piping MCAT Directory file. 11. Click to add the new fitting record to the Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING lists the record under Select Record. 12. Click to save the Auto-Selection file. The current directory is based on the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 13. Repeat the above steps to define additional fitting records. or Click the Assembly tab to define all assembly fitting records for the current Auto-Selection file. or Click File > Exit.

72


To Create an Auto-Selection Assembly Fitting Record Note: •


•

The Assembly tab (Define Piping Specification dialog box) enables you to define all assembly fitting records for Auto-Selection files. You assign an AutoSelection file to a piping specification in the Specification Directory file. Pro/PIPING retrieves the Auto-Selection file assembly fitting data during fitting insertion.

•

An assembly fitting is a group of fittings that are inserted as one unit.

To define an assembly fitting record, select assembly fitting data from the boxes under Define Record. 1. Under Select Assembly, select the fittings that make up an assembly fitting (required). From the Fitting Selection Name box, select each fitting name according to its sequence in the assembly, beginning with the branch fittings. For example, BRAN, NIPPLE, GATE, NIPPLE. The Fitting Selection Name box lists all fittings in the fitting records (Fitting tab) for the current Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING populates the Configuration box with the assembly fitting configuration (the fitting names and assembly sequence). The Configuration box lists all configurations defined for the assembly fitting records. 2. You can confirm or change the assembly fitting sizes (optional). Note that Pro/PIPING determines assembly fitting sizes according to the pipe sizes defined in the pipe records (Pipe tab) for the current Auto-Selection file. a. Click next to Sizes. The Size Table dialog boxes opens. Pro/PIPING lists all pipe sizes assigned to the pipe records (Pipe tab). Pro/PIPING retrieves the pipe sizes from the current Auto-Selection file. Each pipe size contains a check box to indicate selection status. Pro/PIPING selects all sizes by default. Clear each check box to make a size unavailable from the assembly fitting record. You can click Pro/PIPING default selections. b. Click

to reset the list to the

to confirm all changes. The Size Table dialog box closes.

3. Select a stock number format for the assembly fitting record (required). The Select Stock Number Format box lists all stock number formats defined for the assembly fitting records in the current Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING displays assembly fitting stock numbers during information reporting. Under Select Stock Number Format, perform the following tasks to select an assembly fitting stock number format: a. Select the stock number format keywords. You can select Pro/PIPING format keywords from the Keyword box, enter words or ASCII characters required by your project, or choose a combination of both.

73


b. Select a delimiter. A delimiter separates areas in a listing. You can select a delimiter from the Delimiter box or enter a new delimiter. Note that delimiters must be enclosed with commas omitting any white space (,-,). 4. Select a material classification code (MCCS) format for the assembly fitting record (optional). The Select Material Classification Code Format box lists all material classification code formats defined for the assembly fitting records in the current Auto-Selection file. Under Select Material Classification Code Format, perform the following tasks to select an MCCS format: a. Select the MCCS format keywords. You can select Pro/PIPING format keywords from the Keyword box, enter words or ASCII characters required by your project, or choose a combination of both. b. Select a delimiter. A delimiter separates areas in a listing. You can select a delimiter from the Delimiter box or enter a new delimiter. Note that delimiters must be enclosed with commas omitting any white space (,-,). 5. Under Select Selection Name, enter an assembly fitting selection name (required). The Select Selection Name box lists all selection names defined for the assembly fitting records in the current Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING uses the assembly fitting selection names to populate the Selection Name boxes in the Insert Fitting dialog box. 6. Click to add the new assembly fitting record to the Auto-Selection file. Pro/PIPING lists the record under Select Record. 7. Click to save the Auto-Selection file. The current directory is based on the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 8. Repeat the above steps to define additional assembly fitting records. or Click File > Exit. Preview Fitting Graphics You can preview selected fittings as you define a fitting record (Fitting tab) for the current Auto-Selection file. After you select a Fitting Master Catalog file, click the Preview Fitting Graphics band located at the bottom of the Define Piping Specification dialog box. The preview panel expands and displays the selected fitting. You can spin, zoom, and move the fitting in the panel. Pro/PIPING displays each fitting selection dynamically as you make selections. Pro/PIPING Component Window You can also preview fittings in the Component Window. Select the Preview in Separate Window check box in the preview panel and Pro/PIPING displays the fitting (and the file name) in the Component Window.

74


Note: You must clear the Preview in Separate Window check box to close the window. Clicking File > Exit from the separate window closes Pro/ENGINEER. Size Tables Pro/PIPING uses size tables to list all pipe and fitting sizes in the selected Pipe or Fitting Master Catalog (MCAT) file. You select an MCAT file (in the Define Piping Specification dialog box) to define a pipe or fitting Auto-Selection file record. Pro/PIPING opens two different size tables according to the following selections: Pipes and Standard Fittings Size Table for a Pipe

Size Table for a Flange Fitting

The Size Table format is discussed in the next table. Left Section

Right Section

Lists all sizes defined in the MCAT file that you selected.

Displays the size selection status with a check box. Pro/PIPING selects all sizes by default. You can clear a check box to make the size unavailable.

Size Transitional Fittings (Reducers, Branch Reducer Fittings, and so on)

75


The following table describes the Size Table format above: Left Section

Right Section

Lists all main sizes defined in the MCAT File that you selected.

Displays the branch or new size selection status with a check box. Pro/PIPING selects all branch or new sizes by default. You can clear a check box to make the size unavailable. In the above example, there are two reducer fitting sizes with the main size 32A: •

32A (main size) to 20A (new size)

•

32A (main size) to 25A (new size)

Format Keywords The following tables describe the stock number and material classification code (MCCS) format keywords for pipes, fittings, and assembly fitting records in the AutoSelection files.

76


Pipes Keywords

Description

MATL_CODE

Pipe material code

MCAT_FILE

Pipe Master Catalog file name

SCH_RATE

Pipe schedule

END_TYPE

Pipe end type

SIZE


COMBINED_SIZE_CODE

Combined size code for a size combination

SIZE_CODE

Size code for pipe nominal diameter

Fittings Keywords

Description

SNAME

Fitting selection name

MATL_CODE

Fitting material code

MCAT_FILE

Fitting Master Catalog file name

SCH_RATE

Fitting rating

END_TYPE

Fitting inlet end type

NEND_TYPE

Fitting outlet end type

SIZE

Fitting inlet size

NSIZE

Fitting outlet size

BSIZE

Fitting branch outlet size

SIZE_CODE

Size code for fitting inlet size

NSIZE_CODE

Size code for fitting outlet size

BSIZE_CODE

Size code for fitting branch outlet size

COMBINED_SIZE_CODE


77


Assembly Fittings Keywords

Description

SNAME

Assembly fitting selection name

SIZE

Assembly fitting size

SIZE_CODE

Size code for the assembly fitting size

COMBINED_SIZE_CODE


About Insulation Directory Files Insulation Directory files are Pro/TABLE (ASCII) files that store all insulation data for a piping project. To create an Insulation Directory file, define insulation records by assigning the following insulation data using the Define Piping Specification dialog box: •

Insulation codes—All insulation codes assigned to a piping project. Pro/PIPING retrieves these codes from the Insulation Directory file and uses them to identify each insulation type during the insulation modeling and reporting process. You assign each code to an Insulation Master Catalog (MCAT) file.

•

Insulation MCAT file names—All Insulation file names stored in the Piping MCAT Directory file. These file names point to the Insulation MCAT files. Pro/PIPING retrieves insulation data for pipe and fittings from these files.

•

Insulation colors—Color name for each quilt representation of insulation. You can assign a color to each insulation code. Pro/PIPING retrieves colors from the Piping Appearance Map (MCAT) File.

After you create an Insulation Directory file, you can assign an insulation code to each project specification record (Specification Directory file) using the Define Piping Specification dialog box (Insulation Code box). How Insulation Directory Files Work After you select a specification for pipeline creation, Pro/PIPING retrieves the specification data including the insulation code from the Specification Directory file. The insulation code directs Pro/PIPING to the appropriate insulation record (in the Insulation Directory file) where Pro/PIPING retrieves the insulation color and the Insulation MCAT file name. The Insulation file name points Pro/PIPING first to the Piping MCAT Directory file and then to the Insulation MCAT file. Insulation data is retrieved from both files. Pro/PIPING copies the insulation data to the insulation features for insulation modeling and reporting.

78


The following table describes the Insulation Directory file format: Field Name

Description

INS_CODE

Insulation code. Pro/PIPING uses these codes to identify each insulation type during the insulation modeling and reporting process.

INS_FILE

Insulation MCAT file name.

COLOR

Color name for each quilt representation of insulation.

Note: You can define the Insulation Directory file name by setting the piping_insulation_dir_file configuration option. Example: Insulation Directory File Default Path /text/piping_data/sample_project/ piping_insulation_dir.ptd INS_CODE

INS_FILE

COLOR

ES


Aqua

EH

insulation/exhaust

Violet

EN


Wheat

EK


Wheat

EC

insulation/sweat

Cyan

To Create an Insulation Directory File 1. Create or open a piping assembly. 2. Click Applications > Piping. The PIPING menu appears. 3. Click Set Up > Spec DB. The Define Piping Specification dialog box opens. 4. Click


5. Under Type, select Insulation Directory File and type a file name. This file will contain the insulation data for the entire piping project. It is recommended that you use a descriptive file name such as project_name_insulation_dir.ptd. 6. Click to open the file. Pro/PIPING displays the file name in the border next to Insulation Directory File. Begin defining an insulation record.

79


7. Under Define Record, type an insulation code (required). The Insulation Code box lists all insulation codes assigned to the insulation records in the current Insulation Directory file. 8. Select an Insulation Master Catalog (MCAT) file (required). This step assigns an Insulation file to an insulation code. The Insulation File box lists all Insulation files defined in the Piping MCAT Directory file. Pro/PIPING retrieves all insulation data from both MCAT files. 9. Select a color for the solid representation of the insulation (required). The Insulation Color box lists all Pro/PIPING colors stored in the Piping Appearance Map (MCAT) file. You can define new colors. 10. Click to add the new insulation record to the Insulation Directory file. Pro/PIPING lists the record under Select Record. 11. Click to save the Insulation Directory file. The current directory is based on the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 12. Click File > Exit. Note: To assign an insulation record to a project specification, select an insulation code when you define a specification in the Specification Directory file. To Modify Project Data Files Note: Project Data files (Specification Directory, Auto-Selection, and Insulation Directory files) contain piping records that you defined for specific piping projects. You can modify these records using the following steps: 1. Create or open a piping assembly. 2. Click Applications > Piping. The PIPING menu appears. 3. Click Set Up > Spec DB. The Define Piping Specification dialog box opens. 4. Click . The Open File dialog box opens. The current directory is based on the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 5. Double-click one of the following Project Data Files: o

Specification Directory file

o

Auto-Selection file

o

Insulation Directory file

Pro/PIPING displays the file name in the border next to the file type. 6. Under Select Record, select a record to modify. Note that for Auto-Selection files, you must select the appropriate tab (Pipe, Fitting, or Assembly) before selecting a record. 7. Under Define Record, modify the data in the appropriate boxes.

80


to add the changes to the selected record. Pro/PIPING either creates a 8. Click new record or modifies the existing record and displays all changes under Select Record. 9. Click to save the file. The current directory is based on the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 10. Click File > Exit. Deleting a Record Under Select Record, select the record to delete. Click 10 above.

and follow steps 9 and

About the Fitting Category Map File The Fitting Category Map file is a Pro/TABLE (ASCII) file that maps each fitting category to a fitting category icon file. Mapping the icon file enables you to select a fitting category (icon) button in the Insert Fitting and Insert Group Fitting dialog boxes and retrieve a list of fittings for the selected category and specification. Pro/PIPING provides seven fitting category icons. You can design as many fitting category icons as you need. The Fitting Category Map file contains the following data: •

Icon Number—Orders the fitting category (icon) buttons under Fitting Selection in the Insert Fitting and Insert Group Fitting dialog boxes. The order begins from left to right beginning with the number 1.

•

Icon Bitmap—Points Pro/PIPING to the icon graphics file.

•

Fitting Category—Points Pro/PIPING to the Auto-Selection file to retrieve fitting selection names. Note: If the bitmap file is not of .bif extension, you must specify the appropriate filename extension for that file in the fitting category map file.

•

Valve Number—Specifies whether a valve number is required for the fittings whose categories are specified under the FITTING_CATEGORY column in the Fitting Category Map file.

You can assign and reassign fitting categories to icons at any time by mapping each fitting category to an icon bitmap file and assigning an order number. Note: Pro/PIPING groups all unmapped fitting categories in the General category and icon.

81


How the Fitting Category Map File Works After you select a pipeline and an insertion point for fitting insertion (PIPING > Fitting > Insert), Pro/PIPING retrieves the specification data including the specification name and pipe size from the pipeline. The specification name points Pro/PIPING to the Auto-Selection file that you assigned to the specification (in the Specification Directory file) and retrieves the data. After Pro/PIPING populates either the Insert Fitting or Insert Group Fitting dialog boxes with the data, you select a fitting category icon button to select all fitting categories assigned to this icon (in the Fitting Category Map file). Pro/PIPING retrieves the list of fitting selection names. This list contains only those fittings that were assigned to those fitting categories in the Auto-Selection file for that specification. You created this Auto-Selection file during Specification-Driven Piping setup. You select a fitting and insert it. For example, you click Fitting > Insert on the PIPING menu and select the specification 12A pipeline and insertion point. Pro/PIPING populates the boxes under Pipeline Selection. You select the valve category button under Fitting Selection. Pro/PIPING retrieves the list of all valves for specification 12A and populates the Selection Name box. This list was retrieved from the Auto-Selection file that you created for specification 12A (12a_asfile.ptd). You select a fitting and click insert it. The following table describes the Fitting Category Map file format: Field Name

Field Type

Description

ICON_NUMBER

Integer

Icon number. Icons are ordered from left to right under Fitting Selection in the fitting insertion dialog boxes. Ordering begins with the number 1. If more than 14 icons are displayed, a scroll bar appears.

ICON_BITMAP

Character

Icon bit map file name

FITTING_CATEGORY

Character

Fitting category. You can assign multiple categories using a comma (,) as delimiter.

VALVE_NUMBER

82

Character

Valve number for the fitting category. YES—Specifies that a valve number is required for the fitting categories specified using the FITTING_CATEGORY field. NO—Specifies that a valve number is not required for the fitting categories specified using the FITTING_CATEGORY field.

to


Note: You can define the Fitting Category Map file name by setting the piping_fitt_category_map_file configuration option. Example: Fitting Category Map File The following table describes the Pro/PIPING default Fitting Category Map file. Note that the Fitting Category Icon column is for illustrative purposes only. Default Path /text/piping_data/sample_project/ piping_fitt_category_map.ptd ICON_NUMBER ICON_BITMAP FITTING_CATEGORY VALVE_NUMBER 1

fit_valve

VALVE, ANGLE_VALVE, RELIEF_VALVE

YES

2

fit_flange

FLANGE

NO

3

fit_elbow

ELBOW

NO

4

fit_branch

BRANCH, BRANCH_LET, ELBOW_LET

NO

5

fit_red

REDUCER

NO

6

fit_general

GENERAL, GASKET

NO

7

fit_assembly

ASSEMBLY

NO

To Map an Icon File 1. Locate the piping_fitt_category_map.ptd file. The Pro/PIPING default path is /text/piping_data/sample_project/ piping_fitt_category_map.ptd. 2. Open the file in a text editor. 3. Type the following data: o

Icon Number—Pro/PIPING orders the fitting category icons in two rows containing seven icons per row. Ordering is from left to right beginning with the number 1.

o

Icon Bitmap—Bitmap file name for the fitting category icon.

o

Fitting Category—Fitting category associated with the icon bitmap file. Note: If the bitmap file is not of .bif extension, you must specify the appropriate filename extension for that file in the fitting category map file.

83


4. Save the file. Note: If you are mapping a new icon bitmap file, store the file in the Pro/PIPING resource directory before you map it. Fitting Categories Pro/PIPING uses fitting categories for data retrieval. You can define Pro/PIPING fitting categories as needed. Note that you must add each new fitting category to the Piping Master Catalog (MCAT) Directory file and the Fitting Category Map (Project Data) file. Refer to these topics for more information. Pro/PIPING provides the following fitting categories: Fitting Category

Description

VALVE

Valve, such as gate valve, globe valve, and so on

ANGLE_VALVE

Angle valve

RELIEF_VALVE

Relief valve

FLANGE

Flange

GASKET

Gasket

ELBOW

Elbow

ELBOW_LET

Elbow olet

BRANCH

Branch

BRANCH_LET

Branch olet

GENERAL

General fitting

ASSEMBLY

Assembly fitting

Creating Fitting Category Icons Pro/PIPING allows you to create new fitting category icons as needed. You can create new icons with any graphics application that supports GIF or PCX formats. The following Pro/PIPING icon conventions must be maintained: File Type

File Format

File Extension

Icon Size (pixels)

Resource Location (Icon File Library)

Bitmap

GIF, PCX

.gif, .pcx

24 x 24

/text/resource

84


After you create the icon files, store the files in the Pro/PIPING resource location and map them to their appropriate fitting categories in the Fitting Category Map file. For more information about mapping fitting category icon files, refer to the Fitting Category Map file topics.

Fitting Library Files About Fitting Library Files Pro/PIPING supports fitting libraries for industrial piping based on the Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). The various library parts and assemblies are created using the standard Pro/ENGINEER features. However, these parts and assemblies are created based on a set of specific library creation rules. To Set Up a Library Component The supplied fitting library is based on the Family Table parts. 1. You can expand the supplied library based on the library creation rules. 2. You can edit and expand the Master Catalog to include the Master Catalog Directory (MCAT) information that is required by the library parts that you add. 3. You can generate a fitting library based on either the Family Table Parts or Family Table Parts with associated accelerator parts or standalone parts. Fitting Library Creation About Creating Library Fitting Parts Follow the general process when creating library fitting parts: 1. Create the fitting geometry. 2. Create the fitting ports. 3. Specify the inlet port. 4. Orient the stem axis. 5. Assign the fitting parameters. 6. Specify the mating plane Fitting Library Creation Rules The following are rules to follow when creating a library fitting: •

Rule 1—Create a fitting with a minimum of one or more ports.

•

Rule 2—Make sure that the positive z-axis direction of every port in a fitting is perpendicular to the fitting face at the respective port and oriented to point outward from the fitting. 85


This rule applies to all fittings. •

•

Rule 3 o

For In-line fittings, if there are two or more ports, the z-axes of two of the ports must be collinear with the fitting local z-axis.

o

For In-line Eccentric fittings, if there are two or more ports, they must be parallel to the local z-axis. The inlet port should be located on the local zaxis, and the outlet port should be offset along the local y-axis with its zaxis parallel to the local z-axis.

o

For Corner fittings, if there are two or more ports, you must include an angle equal to the vertex angle where the fitting is inserted. The inlet port should be located on the local z-axis.

Rule 4—For Lateral fittings, the y-axis of the inlet port and the z-axis of the lateral outlet port must include an angle equal to the lateral angle of the fitting. o

Locate the inlet port on the local z-axis.

o

Locate the outlet port along the lateral axis that lies on the local z-y plane of the fitting.

Local Coordinate System A fitting local coordinate system is a conceptual coordinate system you use to define and create a library part. The coordinate system of the inlet port of a library part represents the fitting local coordinate system. The local z-axis represents the fitting axis that is aligned with the pipeline segment during fitting insertion. The local positive z-axis is perpendicular to the inlet face of the fitting and is oriented to point outward of the fitting at the inlet port. The local y-axis is used to define the Fitting Stem or Stem Axis. The Fitting Stem or Stem Axis is an imaginary axis that is parallel to the local y-axis. The local y-axis is the axis along which special graphical details are created for certain fittings during their library part preparation. The local positive y-axis is used to determine the default stem orientation of a fitting during fitting insertion. Rules and Naming Conventions to Create Library Parts •

The system of units for a library part is determined based on the fitting library standard. Ensure that all the library parts for a given standard are created using the same system of units.

•

Prepare template parts for each of the piping standards. Use these template parts to create individual library parts for the respective piping standards.

•

Delete all redundant features from the library part to create the geometry efficiently.

86


Follow the rules given below to define a Family Table for library parts: o

Insert the SIZE column after the Instance Name column.

o

Insert the NEW_SIZE or the BRANCH_SIZE column, whichever is applicable, after the SIZE column.

o

All other columns that represent linear dimensions of the fitting must follow the above columns in the Family Table.

o

Create relations wherever possible to minimize the number of columns in the Family Table.

o

If the values remain constant in a particular column, delete such redundant columns.

o

Assign a descriptive name to all the Family Table column headings and name it consistently across library parts.

o

Create a fitting with consistent and uniform orientation.

o

Optionally, create bolt holes for fitting libraries. To achieve a proper bolt hole alignment between the various flanged fittings,

o

o

The first bolt hole in all the flanged fittings must be located at the same angular location with reference to the positive y-axis of the inlet port.

o

Bolt holes on the flanged end must be symmetric about the y-axis of the inlet port.

Save the library part in the default view.

To Create a Template for a Library Part 1. Activate a new Pro/ENGINEER part. 2. Specify the required system of units. 3. Create the default datum planes. 4. Set the default orientation of the part to Isometric. 5. Create the FITTING_GEOMETRY, FITTING_DATUM, and FITTING_PORTS layers. Make the FITTING_GEOMETRY and FITTING_DATUM layers invisible and the FITTING_PORTS layer visible. During the creation of the actual library part, the fitting solid features are associated with the FITTING_GEOMETRY layer. The fitting inlet, fitting outlet, and the branch ports are associated with the FITTING_PORTS layer. All other datum features are associated with the FITTING_DATUM layer. Tip: Creating Library Parts The following are some best practices to accurately create library parts: •

Study the drawings and details accurately before you start modeling.

87


Understand the design intent before you plan your work.

•

Use a common configuration file to create different library parts.

•

Use function keys to achieve consistency and speed.

•

Copy features or use existing patterns instead of creating additional individual features.

•

Minimize the feature count as much as possible.

•

Avoid creating solids that do not have any association with other solids during any intermediate step of part creation.

•

Avoid saving library parts with suppressed features.

•

Group various features together and name the group accordingly.

•

Ensure that no errors or warning messages appear when a feature is regenerated.

Fitting Geometry About Fitting Geometry Fitting Geometry is created either as a part or an assembly of parts. The geometry of the required fitting is created using the basic modeling features of Pro/ENGINEER. The library fittings are created with sufficient geometric details to distinguish them from each other. Example: Fitting Geometry The following example shows a simple geometry created for a gate valve using the basic Pro/ENGINEER functions. The figure below shows details like the port directions, and the fitting axis.

88


Fitting Ports About Fitting Ports A fitting port is a standard Pro/ENGINEER coordinate system feature (CSYS) on the fitting. Its origin represents: •

The location at which a pipe is physically welded to a fitting, as in butt-welded or branchlet fittings.

•

The location up to which the pipe extends into the fitting, as in socket-welded and screwed fittings.

•

The location up to which the pipe extends inside a fitting, as in flange fittings.

•

The location of a flange face that mates with another flange face.

89


To Create Fitting Ports Fitting Port Creation for Branch Outlet Fittings The branch outlet fitting must have an inlet port and outlet ports as shown in the following figures.

The inlet port of the fitting is aligned with the surface of the main pipe segment as follows: •

The z-axis of the outlet port of the fitting is aligned with the branch pipe segment, if an existing junction is identified for the fitting insertion.

•

In orthogonal branch outlet fittings, the z-axes of inlet and outlet ports are parallel to each other. The non-orthogonal branch outlet fittings such as latrolets, have an angle between the z-axes of the inlet and the outlet ports. Based on this, lateral fittings are distinguished from other branch outlet fittings.

90


Port Location for Fittings with Butt Welded/Flanged Ends In the following graphic, the arrow shows the pipe contact location.

For butt-welded fittings, the pipe is welded to the butt-welded ends of the fitting. The fitting ports are located at the butt-welded ends as shown in the figure. If a butt-welded fitting has two butt-welded ends along its local z-axis, then either end can be defined as the inlet port. For flanged fittings, the flanged face of the fitting mates with a matching gasket or a suitable flanged face of another fitting. The fitting ports must be located at the flanged face as shown in the figure. If a flanged fitting has two flanged ends along its local z-axis, then either end can be defined as the inlet port. The positive z-axes of the inlet and outlet ports are pointing outward of the fitting and are aligned to the fitting local z-axis. Note: The two ports need not be created in any particular sequence and their names are user-definable. Of the two ports, one must be defined as the inlet port. By convention, the port with the SIZE parameter is defined as the inlet port.

91


Port Location for Fittings with socket Welded/Threaded Ends For fittings with socket-welded or threaded ends, the pipe extends up to the origin of the port that represents the end of the socket or the threaded hole. The arrow in the following figure points to the pipe contact location.

92


In the following figure, PORT1 is located on the inside face of the socket, and PORT0 (a flanged end) is located on the outside flange face. For threaded fittings, the pipe is threaded up to the origin of the port that represents the end of the threaded hole or socket.

Mandatory Port Requirements Based on the fitting code, the mandatory port requirements for the various fittings are as summarized: Fitting Code

Inlet Port

Outlet Port

Branch Port

Typical Fitting

INLINE

YES

YES

NO

Fittings with the same inlet and outlet sizes (valves)

INLINE_REDUCING

YES

YES

NO

Inline fittings with different inlet and outlet sizes (reducers)

93


Fitting Code

Inlet Port

Outlet Port

Branch Port

Typical Fitting

INLINE_JOINT(i)

YES

YES

NO

Coupling

FLANGE(ii)

YES

YES

NO

Any flange

GASKET(ii)

YES

YES

NO

Any gasket

CORNER

YES

YES

NO

Any valve

CORNER_REDUCING

YES

YES

NO

Reducing elbows

CORNER_LET

YES

YES

NO

Any elbowlet

ELBOW(iii)

YES

YES

NO

Any elbow

BRANCH

YES

YES

YES

Straight tee

BRANCH_REDUCING

YES

YES

YES

Reducing tee

BRANCH_LET

YES

YES

NO

Weldolet

The following points must be noted about fitting codes and their insertion behavior: •

The INLINE_JOINT is a special fitting code that has the same fitting insertion behavior as the INLINE code. Joint fittings such as couplings and sleeves must be assigned this code. The code is used by the automatic joint fitting selection functionality.

•

The FLANGE and GASKET are special fitting codes that have the same fitting insertion behavior as the INLINE code. Flange and gasket fittings such as a weldneck flange, slip-on flange, or any type of gasket, must be assigned their respective codes. The FLANGE and GASKET codes are used in the respective automatic flange and gasket fitting selection functionality.

•

The ELBOW is a special fitting code that has the same fitting insertion behavior as the CORNER code. Elbow fittings such as 90 degree long/short radius and 45 degree long/short radius, must be assigned this code. This fitting code is used to automatically select an elbow fitting and insert it as a trimmed elbow or, insert elbows at all vertices of a pipeline with a single operation.

•

The BRANCH_LET is a special fitting code for special branch outlet fittings (olet fittings and half couplings). The library part model of a branch outlet fitting must have a string value of BRANCH_LET in the string parameter FIT_TYPE.

Fitting Insertion Location and Alignment Considerations A fitting is aligned to the selected insertion point on the pipe segment using predefined reference locations on the fitting library part. Based on the general piping design and pipe modeling practices, preferred locations such as NEAR, FAR or CENTER on a fitting are used to constrain the fitting. The

94


Fitting Insertion functionality provides the option to choose one of these alignment options during fitting insertion. The Fitting Insertion functionality aligns the specified NEAR, FAR or CENTER locations with the placement point location specified on the pipe segment. A parametric dimension is created up to the placement/alignment location. You can modify this dimension and reposition the fitting along the inserted pipeline segment. NEAR, FAR, and CENTER Alignment Locations Based on Fitting Ports For fittings with NEAR or FAR alignment locations that coincide with the respective inlet and outlet port locations, such as butt-welded and flanged fittings, you are not required to provide any additional information during library part creation. For such fittings, the NEAR/FAR alignment locations are automatically determined to be at the inlet/outlet port origins. The CENTER location is determined as the midpoint of the NEAR and FAR locations.

1 NEAR location (inlet port origin) 2 CENTER location 3 FAR location (outlet port origin)

95


By default, the NEAR option aligns the fitting inlet port with the selected insertion point on the pipe segment. Similarly, the FAR option aligns the fitting outlet port with the selected insertion point on the pipe segment. The CENTER option aligns the midpoint between the fitting inlet and outlet to the selected insertion point on the pipe segment. NEAR, FAR, and CENTER Alignment Locations Based on Fitting Ports and an OFFSET Parameter For fittings with NEAR/FAR alignment locations that do not coincide with the respective inlet/outlet port locations as in the case of socket-welded and screwed fittings, you can still use the inlet/outlet port locations as default NEAR/FAR alignment locations. The CENTER location is determined as the midpoint of the NEAR and FAR locations. Alternatively, you can use an optional OFFSET parameter associated with either or both of the ports to specify an offset location from the inlet/outlet ports. Refer the following figure for details.

1 Optional NEAR location (20.0mm from inlet port) 2 Default NEAR location (inlet port with offset of 20.0mm) 96


3 Automatic CENTER location 4 Default FAR location (outlet port with offset of 20.0mm) 5 Optional FAR location (20.0mm from outlet port) Using the OFFSET parameter and the ability to enable/disable it during fitting insertion, you can apply the desired NEAR and FAR alignment locations as required by your design. By this, you will be able to offset a fitting port to a desired location and align that location to the point on the pipe segment where it is inserted. You can create your linear parametric dimensions up to this point on the pipe segment. Using the OFFSET parameter and appropriate offset value, you can optionally create your linear dimensions up to a fitting face (specified by the offset value from the respective port) for socket-welded and threaded fittings. Inlet Ports About Inlet Ports If a fitting has two or more ports, the z-axes of at least two of the ports must be aligned along the local z-axis of the fitting or parallel to the local z-axis of the fitting. Corner fittings and lateral branchlet fittings are the exceptions. One of the two ports must be specified as the fitting's inlet port. This applies to corner and branchlet fittings as well. Specify the inlet port during the library part creation by attaching the SIZE parameter to an appropriate port of the fitting. To Specify an Inlet Port You can specify an inlet port by attaching the SIZE parameter to an appropriate port of the fitting during library part creation. During fitting insertion, the Fitting Insertion functionality automatically aligns the local z-axis of the fitting with the pipe segment on which the fitting is inserted. By default, the fitting is inserted using the NEAR option, which aligns the fitting inlet port with the specified insertion location on the pipeline. The fitting outlet port is placed downstream in the direction of flow of the inlet port. The concept of the inlet port is especially important for direction-specific fittings such as check valves and special types of globe valves. You can change the default behavior of the fitting insertion functionality by using the Flip option on the Orientation tab of the Insert Fitting dialog. Inlet Port Alignment for Branch Outlet Fittings The inlet port of the branch outlet fittings can be aligned either with the outer or inner surface of the main pipeline. The inlet port of the neck outlet fitting is always aligned with the outside surface of the main pipeline.

97


Nozzle outlet fittings and weldolet fittings are always aligned with the inner surface of the main pipe segment.

In certain cases, the inlet port of the fitting is aligned at a distance from either the inlet or the outlet surface of the main pipe segment. Stem Axis Direction About the Stem Axis of a Fitting The stem axis of a fitting is an imaginary axis that is parallel to the local y-axis of the fitting. It is applicable only to certain fittings and it represents the following: •

The branch direction of a junction fitting along the positive stem axis.

•

The hand wheel direction of a valve along the positive stem axis.

•

The eccentric offset direction of a reducer along the positive or negative stem axis.

•

The reference axis for bolt hole straddling of a flange (straddling is done with reference to the positive stem axis).

98


For fittings involving the above graphical details, you must create the appropriate geometry either with reference to or along the stem axis directions specified, to achieve a consistent default orientation during fitting insertion. Example: Stem Axis Direction

In the above figure, axis A_3 of the cone is created along the positive stem axis direction of the fitting, parallel to the local positive y-axis of PORT0 (the inlet port that has the SIZE parameter). The fitting insertion functionality aligns the local z-axis of the fitting with the pipe segment and automatically orients the local y-axis to its default direction, based on the orientation rules defined in the fitting insertion functionality. The default direction of the fitting is the fitting stem, since it is created parallel to the local y-axis. During fitting insertion you can further rotate the stem about the pipe segment using the Rotation Angle option. Fitting Parameter About Fitting Parameters The fitting parameters of a pipe are the non-graphic data associated with the library components during their design phase. You can associate fitting parameters to the library components using the standard Pro/ENGINEER parameter feature. Fitting parameters provide the details of the modeling automation while inserting fittings, checking design rules, and reporting. To Assign User-Defined Parameters 1. Open a generic part, for example, a fitting. 2. Click Tools > Family Table. The Family Table dialog box opens.

99


3. Click Insert > Columns. The Family Items, Generic dialog box opens. 4. Select Parameter to open the Select Parameter dialog box. 5. Select Alternate Mass Properties from the list at the bottom of the dialog box. 6. Add all the required to the family table and close the Family Table dialog box. 7. Click Edit > Setup > Mass props. The Setup Mass Properties dialog box opens. 8. Select Geometry and Parameters. Click Generate Report and click Ok. 9. Open a piping assembly and click Edit > Regenerate. You can display all the values assigned to the user-defined parameters using the Report Pipeline dialog box. Fitting Parameters Based on Fitting Code The fitting code specifies the insertion behavior of the fitting. It is assigned to a fitting generic part as a string parameter denoted as FITTING_CODE. Fitting codes are pre-defined and cannot be changed. Each library fitting is associated with a fitting code and is designed in accordance with the rules as applicable for the associated fitting code. The following table lists the fitting parameters for the various fitting codes: Fitting Codes

FITTING_ CODE

S I Z E

NEW_ SIZE

BRANCH_ END_ Y_ECCEN- FLOW_CONS OFF SIZE TYPE TRICITY TRAINED SET

INLINE

YES

Y E S

NO

NO

YES

Optional

Optional

Opti onal

INLINE_ REDUCI NG

YES

Y E S

YES

NO

YES

Optional

NO

Opti onal

INLINE_ JOINT

YES

Y E S

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

Opti onal

FLANGE

YES

Y E S

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

Opti onal

GASKET

YES

Y E S

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

Opti onal

100


Fitting Codes

FITTING_ CODE

S I Z E

NEW_ SIZE

BRANCH_ END_ Y_ECCEN- FLOW_CONS OFF SIZE TYPE TRICITY TRAINED SET

CORNER

YES

Y E S

NO

NO

YES

NO

Optional

NO

CORNER _REDUC ING

YES

Y E S

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

CORNER _LET

YES

Y E S

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

ELBOW

YES

Y E S

NO

NO

YES

NO

Optional

NO

BRANCH

YES

Y E S

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

BRANCH _REDUC ING

YES

Y E S

Option al

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

BRANCH _LET

YES

Y E S

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

Fitting Branch Size Parameter The branch size parameter must be inserted on the branch port of a fitting. It is a string type feature parameter denoted as BRANCH_SIZE. This parameter accepts any valid pipe nominal diameter value. Insert this parameter only if the branch port size of a fitting is different from its inlet port size. You can define a single reducing tee fitting by inserting the SIZE parameter on the inlet port and the BRANCH_SIZE parameter on the branch port. Similarly, you can define a double reducing TEE fitting by inserting the SIZE parameter on the inlet port and the NEW_SIZE parameter on the outlet port and the BRANCH_SIZE parameter on the branch port. Flow Constrained Fitting Parameter The FLOW_CONSTRAINED parameter is an integer type Part parameter. Insert FLOW_CONSTRAINED on the library part for flow direction specific fittings such as a Check Valve and unidirectional angle valves.

101


The FLOW_CONSTRAINED parameter is used as a status flag by the flow direction reversal functionality for flipping the fitting during flow reversal. Because this integer parameter is used as a status flag, its value is ignored by the software. The assignment of a value for an integer parameter is mandatory. You must assign an integer value (such as 1) consistently, but it is not used by the software. Latrolet Fitting Orientation Latrolet is a non-orthogonal branch outlet fitting. Latrolets can be placed in either of the two orientations as shown.

Orientations of Latrolet (Left to Right: 0 degrees and 180 degrees) If the branch pipe segment already exists, the fitting is automatically aligned. If the angle of the latrolet does not match with the existing branch angle, the insertion of such a fitting is not allowed. The tolerance angle for such a check must be specified in the configuration option variable PIPE_FITT_ANGLE_TOLERANCE. If this variable is not specified, the default tolerance angle of 1.5 degrees on either side is used for checking. To achieve this orientation, create the inlet port of the fitting with its positive y-axis aligned with the 0 degree orientation of the fitting, so that the latrolet orientation is created by default. Use the Flip option to change to the 180 degree orientation. Fitting Inlet Size Parameter The Fitting Inlet Size parameter is inserted only on one of the ports of a fitting. It is a string type feature parameter denoted as SIZE. A fitting port that has the SIZE parameter is designated as the inlet port of the fitting. This parameter accepts any valid pipe nominal diameter value. The size values assigned to this parameter must match the size values that you have specified in various master catalog files. Fitting Outlet Size Parameter The fitting outlet size parameter is inserted on the outlet port of a fitting. It is a string type feature parameter denoted as NEW_SIZE. This parameter accepts any valid pipe nominal diameter value. Insert this parameter only if the outlet port size of a fitting is different from its inlet port size.

102


Fitting End Type Code Parameter The end type parameter must be inserted on the inlet port of a fitting with appropriate end type values. It is a string type feature parameter denoted as END_TYPE. It is mandatory to insert this parameter on the inlet ports of all the fittings. If all the ports of a fitting are of the same end types, you need not assign this parameter to all the ports. It is sufficient if you assign the END_TYPE parameter to the inlet port. If a fitting does not have an END_TYPE parameter in its outlet or the branch ports, the system automatically assigns the END_TYPE parameter specified for the inlet port to all the other unspecified ports. However, if a fitting has different end types for its inlet, outlet and branch ports, an END_TYPE parameter needs to be inserted with appropriate values at the inlet, outlet or the branch ports. The system uses these specified end types for the respective ports. The end type values that are used for fitting end types in the supplied library and the fitting MCAT files are as listed: •

BW – Butt Welded

•

SW – Socket Welded

•

SC – Screwed

•

FLFF – Flanged Flat Face

•

FLRF – Flanged Raised Face

•

FLRJ – Flanged Ring Joint

•

FLTG – Flanged Tongue end of Tongue and the Groove mating

•

FLGR – Flanged Groove end of Tongue and Groove mating

Note: Though the end type codes are user definable you must use the following rules: 1. The flanged end-types must start with the character "F". 2. The screwed end-types must start with the character "SC". 3. Use the same end type values in the End Type Compatibility file that will be used for the end type compatibility checking. The END_TYPE parameter is used while inserting fittings for performing automatic end type checking between the adjoining fittings. It is also used for automatically inserting mating flanges and gaskets when you insert flanged fittings. Fitting Eccentricity Parameter The fitting eccentricity parameter must be inserted on a library part of an eccentric fitting and is applicable only for a fitting that has either the inlet or the outlet port eccentricity along the local y-axis of the fitting. It is an integer type part parameter denoted as Y_ECCENTRICITY. This parameter generally behaves like a status flag and its value is not relevant.

103


The Y_ECCENTRICITY parameter behaves like a status flag while inserting eccentric fittings, for enabling the centerline offset. Fitting Alignment Offset Parameter The fitting alignment offset parameter is an optional parameter and can be inserted on any selected port of a fitting with an appropriate offset value. It is a real type feature parameter denoted as OFFSET. The value of the OFFSET parameter must be the distance between a port and its corresponding face. It is mainly used for socketwelded and screwed fittings. The following figure shows a screwed valve:

The fitting insertion functionality provides an additional option to enable alignment based on the OFFSET parameter. If you enable this option during fitting insertion, the NEAR/FAR alignment locations are determined using the respective port and the OFFSET parameter on it. The OFFSET parameter is also used for interference checking between two adjacent fittings. The following points must be noted while assigning offset parameter values to a fitting: •

Assign only positive values. The system ignores negative values, and in this case an absolute value is used as the offset.

•

When you use the offset value that is associated with a given port, the optional alignment location for the port is offset along its positive z-axis.

104


If a port has the same end type and offset value as the inlet port, specify the OFFSET parameter only for the inlet port.

•

If a port has a different end type as the inlet port, you must specify an OFFSET parameter for that port and assign appropriate values depending on the end type of that port. When the end types are different, the offset value specified for the inlet port will not be applicable to the other port.

Surface Area Parameter The surface area is assigned directly to a fitting library part using the real value parameter PRO_MP_ALT_AREA. Specify a value for the PRO_MP_ALT_AREA parameter in the same system of unit for area, as specified for the fitting library part. The surface area of a fitting library part is calculated when you perform the model analysis of a pipeline assembly using the Model Analysis dialog box. If you have specified the value PARAMETERS for the PRO_MP_SOURCE parameter, Pro/ENGINEER uses the value that you have specified for PRO_MP_ALT_AREA for the fitting, and relates it to the analysis parameter PRO_MP_AREA, to calculate the surface area. If you do not specify any value for PRO_MP_ALT_AREA, or if you specify the value GEOMETRY for the PRO_MP_SOURCE parameter, the geometry of the fitting library part is used for surface area calculations. Center of Gravity Parameters You can directly assign the center of gravity for a fitting library part using the real parameters, PRO_MP_ALT_COGX, PRO_MP_ALT_COGY, and PRO_MP_ALT_COGZ. The values that you assign for PRO_MP_ALT_COGX, PRO_MP_ALT_COGY, and PRO_MP_ALT_COGZ are used for center of gravity calculations if you specify the value PARAMETERS for the PRO_MP_SOURCE parameter. If you do not specify any values for the center of gravity parameters, or if you specify the value GEOMETRY for the PRO_MP_SOURCE parameter, the geometry of the fitting library part is used for center of gravity calculations. Pro/PIPING automatically updates the center of gravity information when you modify or replace a fitting. The Report Pipeline dialog box reports the center of gravity information if you select COG_X, COG_Y, or COG_Z as the columns in the Report Format dialog box. In case of fittings, if you assign PRO_MP_ALT_COGX, PRO_MP_ALT_COGY, and PRO_MP_ALT_COGZ parameters to a fitting, Pro/PIPING transforms these parameters with respect to the start location of the pipeline and reports the center of gravity information. The x-, y-, and z- coordinates of the center of gravity of pipe segments and fittings are reported in the linear units of the piping assembly. Weight Parameter You can assign the PRO_MP_ALT_MASS parameter to library parts for weight calculation. The Model Analysis feature uses this parameter along with other userdefined parameters for the appropriate model analysis calculations. If you have set the value of the PRO_MP_SOURCE parameter to PARAMETERS, Model Analysis uses the associated value for mass property calculations. If the value for the PRO_MP_SOURCE parameter is set to GEOMETRY, or if you have not assigned values

105


for other parameters, Model Analysis uses the geometry of the part for model analysis calculations. Note: If the mass_property_calculate configuration option is set to automatic, regenerating the piping assembly assigns the Mass Property parameters to all fittings in the assembly. Valve Number Fitting Parameter The valve number parameter is assigned to a fitting component feature. It is a string type parameter denoted as VALVENUMBER. Mating Plane Specifying a Mating Plane A mating plane is used to mate a fitting with other fittings. You can use a datum plane or a solid surface as a mating plane if it satisfies the following conditions: •

The datum plane or the solid surface aligns with the x-y plane of the related port.

•

The normal of the datum plane or the solid surface is in the same direction as the z-axis of the related port.

Note: You cannot use a quilt as a mating plane. The ANSI Standard About the ANSI Standard The ANSI pipe fitting library conforms to the ANSI standards. Each fitting in the library needs to have a fitting generic part created in association with it. For more information on creating a generic part for each fitting in the ANSI pipe fitting library, see the topic Fitting Library Creation Rules. Each fitting and pipe in the ANSI library also needs Master Catalog Files, which you create in the Piping Specification Database. Fitting Component End Types The end type codes for the various fitting components that are used in the ANSI fitting library are as given: Code

End Type

BE

Beveled End

PE

Plain End

BW

Butt Welded

SW

Socket Welded

106


Code

End Type

SC

Screwed

FLFF

Flanged Flat Face

FLRF

Flanged Raised Face

FLRJ

Flanged Ring Joint

FLTG

Flanged Tongue end of Tongue and Groove mating

FLGR

Flanged Groove end of Tongue and Groove mating

Example: List of ANSI Pipes and Fittings in the Library The following table lists the ANSI pipes and fittings in the ANSI Pipe Fitting Library: Fitting Category: VALVE Fitting Name

EndType

Rating

Size Range in Inches

Model Name

Standard

Fitting Code

Ball Valve

BW

600#

1/2~12

vl_ball _bw

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Ball Valve

900#

1 ~ 12

Ball Valve

FLPF

150,300#

½ ~ 12

vl_ball _flff

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Ball Valve

FLRF

150,300,600#

½ ~ 12

vl_ball _flrf

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Ball Valve Ball Valve

900#

FLRJ

Ball Valve Ball Valve Ball Valve

150#

300,600,900#

FLTG

600#

900#

1 ~ 12

1 ~12

vl_ball _flrj

1/2 ~ 12

1/2 ~ 12

1"~12"

vl_ball _fltg

107


Fitting Name

EndType

Rating


Model Name

Standard

Fitting Code

Check Valve Swing Type

BW

150#

1/8"~36"

vl_che ck_bw

ANSI B16.10

INLINE


300#

1/2"~36"

ANSI B16.10

INLINE


600#

1/2"~24"

ANSI B16.10

INLINE


900#

3/4"~24"

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE


FLPF

Check Valve Swing Type Check Valve Swing Type

150#

300#

FLRF

150#

1/2"~24"

vl_che ck_flff

1"~24"

1/2"~24"

vl_che ck_flrf


300#

1"~24"

ANSI B16.10

INLINE


900#

3/4"~24"

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

108


Fitting Name

EndType

Rating


Model Name

Standard

Fitting Code


FLRJ

150,300#

1"~24"

vl_che ck_flrj

ANSI B16.10

INLINE


600#

1/2"~24"

ANSI B16.10

INLINE


900#

3/4"~24"

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE


FLTG

Check Valve Swing Type Gate Valve

600#

900#

BW

150,300#

1/2"~24"

vl_che ck_fltg

3/4"~24"

1/8"~36"

vl_gat e_bw

Gate Valve

600#

1/2"~24"

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Gate Valve

900#

1"~24"

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Gate Valve

FLPF

150,300#

1/2"~24"

vl_gat e_flff

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Gate Valve

FLRF

150,300,600#

1/2"~24"

vl_gat e_flrf

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Gate Valve Gate Valve Gate Valve

900#

FLRJ

1"~24"

150#

1"~24"

vl_gat e_flrj

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

300,600#

1/2"~24"

vl_gat e_flrj

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

109


Fitting Name

EndType

Rating


Model Name

Standard

Fitting Code

900#

1"~24"

vl_gat e_flrj

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

600#

1/2"~24"

vl_gat e_fltg

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

900#

1"~24"

vl_gat e_fltg

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

150#

1/8"~36"

vl_glo be_bw

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Globe Valve

300#

1/2"~36"

vl_glo be_bw

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Globe Valve

600#

1/2"~6"

vl_glo be_bw

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Globe Valve

900#

3/4"~6"

vl_glo be_bw

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Gate Valve Gate Valve

FLTG

Gate Valve Globe Valve

BW

Globe Valve

FLPF

150,300#

1/2"~6"

vl_glo be_flff

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Globe Valve

FLRF

150,300,600#

1/2"~6"

vl_glo be_flrf

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

900#

3/4"~6"

vl_glo be_flrf

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

150#

1"~6"

vl_glo be_flrj

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Globe Valve

150,300#

1/2"~6"

vl_glo be_flrj

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Globe Valve

900#

3/4"~6"

vl_glo be_flrj

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

600#

1/2"~6"

vl_glo be_flt g

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

900#

3/4"~6"

vl_glo be_flt g

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

600,900#

1"~12"

vl_plu g_bw

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Globe Valve Globe Valve

Globe Valve

FLRJ

FLTG

Globe Valve

Plug Valve

110

BW


Fitting Name

EndType

Rating


Model Name

Standard

Fitting Code

Plug Valve

FLPF

150,300#

1"~12"

vl_plu g_flff

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Plug Valve

FLRF

150,300,600,90 0#

1"~12"

vl_plu g_flrf

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Plug Valve

FLRJ

150,300,600,90 0#

1"~12"

vl_plu g_flrj

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Plug Valve

FLTG

600,900#

1"~12"

vl_plu g_fltg

ANSI B16.10

INLINE

Example: List of JIS Fittings Fitting Category

Fitting Name

EndType

Rating

Size Part Name Range

Fitting Code

Valve

Angle Valve

FLFF

5K,10K,16K

15400

Vl_angle_flff

Corner

FLRF

10K,20K,

32200

Vl_angle_flrf

Corner

30K,40K

Valve

Hose Connectio n

SC

10K

10100

Vl_angle_sc

Corner

FLFF

5K,10K

15-65

Vl_angle_hoff

Corner

FLFF

5K, 16K

15200

Vl_l_chk_ang

Corner

FLFF

10K

25100

Vl_em_soff_a

Corner

25-50

Vl_se_cls_ang

Corner

Angle Valve Valve

Lift Check Angle Valve

Valve

Emergency Shut Off Angle Valve

Valve

Self Closing

FLFF/SC

111


Fitting Category

Fitting Name

EndType

Rating


Fitting Code

FLFF

5K, 10K, 16K

15400

Vl_sd_chk_ang_ff

Corner

FLRF

20K

32250

Vl_sd_chk_ang_rf

Corner

FLFF

5K, 10K, 16K

15600

Vl_gate_flff

Inline

FLRF

10K, 20K

50300

Vl_gate_flrf

Inline

SC

5K, 10K

15-80

Vl_gate_sc

Inline

FLFF

5K, 10K, 16K

15400

Vl_gb_flff

Inline

FLRF

10K, 20K, 30K,

323250

Vl_gb_flrf

Inline

Angle Valve Valve

Screw Down Stop Check Valve (angle)

Valve

Valve

Gate Valve

Globe Valve

40K

Valve

Hose Connectio n

SC

5K, 10K

10100

Vl_gb_sc

Inline

FLFF

5K, 10K

15-65

Vl_gb_ho_ff

Inline

FLFF

5K, 16K

15150

Vl_l_chk_gb

Flow_ Constra ined

FLFF

10K

25100

Vl_em_soff_gb

Flow_ Constra ined

Globe Valve Valve

Lift Check Globe Valve

Valve

Emergency Shut Off Globe Valve

112


Fitting Category

Fitting Name

EndType

Rating


Fitting Code

Valve

Swing Check

FLFF

5K, 10K

25250

Vl_swg_chk_flff

Flow_ Constra ined

FLRF

10K, 20K

50300

Vl_swg_chk_flrf

Flow_ Constra ined

25-50

Vl_se_cls_gb

Flow_ Constra ined

Valve

Valve

Self Closing Globe

FLFF

Valve Valve

Screw Down Stop

FLFF

5K, 10K, 16K

15400

Vl_sd_chk_gb_ff

Flow_ Constra ined

FLRF

20K

32250

Vl_sd_chk_gb_rf

Flow_ Constra ined

BW

10, 40, 70, 140,

15900

Tee_reducing_bw

Branch _ reducin g

Check Valve (Globe)

Branch

Reducing Tee

80, 160, SPP, 12Y, 79Y, 95Y, 5S, 10S, 20S SW

10, 40, 70, 140, 80, 160

6-100

Tee_reducing_sw

Branch _ reducin g

SW

10, 40, 70, 140

10100

Tee_red_grd_sw

Branch _ reducin g

113


Fitting Category

Fitting Name

EndType

Rating


Fitting Code

Branch

Straight Tee

BW

10, 40, 70, 140, 80, 160, SPP

15300

Tee_straight_bw

Branch

SW

10, 40, 70, 140, 16, 40, SPP

6-100

Tee_straight_sw

Branch

SC

TMP

4-40

Tee_bite_sc

Branch

SC

10, 40, 70, 140, 80, 160, SPP

4-40

Tee_union_bite_sc

Branch

BW

10, 40, 70, 140, 80, 160, 12Y,

252600

Elbow_45_bw

Elbow

252600

Elbow_90_bw

Elbow

Union (Bite Type Tee) Elbow

Elbow 45 Degree (ButtWelding

79Y, 95Y, SPP

Type) Elbow 90 Degree

BW

(ButtWelding

79Y, 95Y, SPP

Type) Elbow 45 Degree

10, 40, 70, 140, 80, 160, 12Y,

SW

10, 40, 70, 140

10100

Elbow_45_sw

Elbow

SW

10, 40, 70, 140

10100

Elbow_90_sw

Elbow

(SocketWelding Type) Elbow 90 Degree (SocketWelding Type)

114


Fitting Category

Fitting Name

EndType

Rating


Fitting Code

Elbow 90 Degree

SC

10, 40, 70, 140, 80, 160, SPP

4-40

Elbow_90_b_sc

Elbow

FLFF

5K

10900

Flange_blank

Flange

Corrosion Flange

FLFF

5K, 10K

50600

Corrosion

Flange

Composite Flange

FFRF/SO

5K, 10K

50600

Composite_alloy

Flange

FLRF/SO

5K, 10K

50100

Composite_copper

Flange

FLFF/SO

5K, 10K, 16K

101000

Flange_slip_ff

Flange

FLRF/SO

20K, 30K, 40K

10600

Flange_slip_rf

Flange

FLFF/SO

5K, 10K

15-40

Solid_braz_aly_fl

Flange

(Bite Type) Flange

Blank Flange (Flange Type)

(Alloy) Composite Flange (Copper) Slip-on Flange for Flat Face Type Slip-on Flange for Raised Face Type Solid Brazing Type Slip-on Flange (Alloy)

115


Fitting Category

Fitting Name

EndType

Rating


Fitting Code

Solid Brazing Type

FLFF/SO

5K, 10K

10-40

Solid_braz_cpr_fl

Flange

FLFF/SW

280K

15-80

Socketweld_fl

Flange

FLRF/BW

30K

15400

Flange_neck_rf

Flange

Slip-on Flange (Copper) Socket Welding Flange

General

Boss

BW/SC

6-40

Boss_bw

Branch Let

Expansion Joint

SO

40800

Exp_cpl_so

Joint

Sleeve Joint

BW

10500

Sleeve_bw

Joint

Socket

SW

5-100

Socket_sw

Inline

Coupling Joint for

SW

6-100

Coupling_sw

Joint

SW

50200

Suction_a_sw

Inline

SW

150650

Suction_b_sw

Inline

BW

15500

Cap_bw

Inline

(General Type)

Copper Pipe Suction Mouth "A" Type Suction Mouth "B" Type Cap

116


Fitting Category

Fitting Name

EndType

Rating


Fitting Code

Gasket for neck

GKFF

30K

15400

Gasket_neck

Gasket

Gasket for neck steam

GKFF

30K

15400

Gasket_neck_steam

Gasket

Gasket for slip

GKFF

5K, 10K, 16K, 20K, 30K

101000

Gasket_slip

Gasket

Gasket for slip

GKFF

5K, 10K, 16K, 20K, 30K, 40K

101000

Gasket_slip_steam

Gasket

Sea Water Strainer S Type

FLFF

10K

15350

Strainer_ff

Inline

Steam Trap

FLFF

15-50

Trap_piston

Inline

Concentric Reducer

BW

15600

Red_concentric_bw

Inline_ Reducin g

SW

6-100

Red_concentric_sw

Inline_ Reducin g

BW

15500

Red_eccentric_bw

Inline_

Steam

Reducer

Eccentric Reducer

Reducin g

Update Model About Update Model Pro/PIPING allows you to change piping data in the Project Data, the Master Catalog (MCAT) Specification Database files, or both and then update the piping model data in your current piping project. You can stay current with industry standards and change piping specifications, and update the active assembly information and/or line stock by using the Update Model dialog box (PIPING > Set Up > Update Model). Pro/PIPING applies the new data to all subsequent modeling.

117


You can change the following piping data and update the current model: •

Color

•

Corner types

•

Material code

•

Stock number format

•

Outside diameter (OD)

•

Wall thickness

•

Material density

•

Miter parameters

•

Bend parameters

•

Bend machine parameters

To Change and Update Colors You can change piping colors in a specification and update the current model with the changes. 1. Modify the specification. Click Set Up > Spec DB. The Define Piping Specification dialog box opens. . The Open File dialog box opens. The current directory is based on 2. Click the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 3. Double-click the Specification Directory file that contains the specification that you want to modify. The Open File dialog box closes. In the Define Piping Specification dialog box, the file name appears in the border next to Specification Directory File. 4. Under Select Record, select the specification record that you want to modify. 5. Under Define Record, select a new piping color from the Color box. You can define new colors (View > Color and Appearance). 6. Click to insert the changes to the selected record. Pro/PIPING modifies the existing record and displays the changes under Select Record. 7. Click to save the changes to the file. The current directory is based on the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 8. Click File > Exit. The Define Piping Specification dialog box closes. 9. Update the model. Click Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box opens.

118


10. Under Assembly, click the changes.

and select the assembly to which you want to apply

11. Under Model Information, select the Color check box. 12. Click . The Confirm Cancel dialog box opens. Click Yes to confirm the update. The dialog boxes close and Pro/PIPING updates the active assembly information. Pro/PIPING confirms the update in the Message Area. 13. Verify the changes. Click PIPING > Info. In the Report Pipeline dialog box, select Type > Segment. 14. Click and select a pipe segment in the graphics window. Note that the segment must be from the updated assembly. Pro/PIPING displays the pipeline information in the Information Window.

To Change and Update Corner Types You can change piping corner types in a specification and update the current model with the changes. 1. Modify the specification. Click PIPING > Set Up > Spec DB. The Define Piping Specification dialog box opens. . The Open File dialog box opens. The current directory is based on 2. Click the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 3. Double-click the Auto-Selection file that is associated with the specification that you want to modify. The Open File dialog box closes. In the Define Piping Specification dialog box, the file name appears in the border next to AutoSelection File. 4. Under Select Record, select the specification record that you want to modify. 5. You can change corner types in the following ways: o

Bend and Miter Corner Types—Under Define Record, check the Allow Bend or Allow Miter or both to accept bend or mitered corner types or both the corner types. Clear the check boxes to make these corner types unavailable to the specification.

o

Fitting Corner Types—Select the Fitting tab on the Define Piping Specification dialog box. To add a corner fitting, either add a corner fitting to an existing fitting record or create a new fitting record that contains a corner fitting. You can delete a fitting records that contain corner fittings to make them unavailable to the specification.

6. Click to insert the changes to the selected record. Pro/PIPING modifies the existing record and displays the changes under Select Record. 7. Click to save changes to the file. The current directory is based on the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 119


8. Click File > Exit. The Define Piping Specification dialog box closes. 9. Update the model. Click Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box opens. 10. Under Select Assembly, click apply the changes.

and select the assembly to which you want to

11. Under Model Information, select the Corner Types check box. 12. Click . The Confirm Cancel dialog box opens. Click Yes to confirm the update. The dialog boxes close and Pro/PIPING updates the active assembly information. Pro/PIPING confirms the update in the Message Area. 13. Click PIPING > Regenerate to apply the changes to the piping model displayed in the graphics window. 14. Verify the changes. Click PIPING > Route > Pipe Envrnmt > Corner Type. The Corner Type menu lists the allowed corner types (Fitting, Bend, Miter) for the active assembly.

To Change and Update Material Codes You can change pipe and fitting material codes in a specification or line stock and update the current model with the changes. 1. Modify the Piping Material Master Catalog (MCAT) file. Open the Piping Material file using a text editor and modify the material code for the selected pipe or fitting MCAT file. Save all changes. 2. Modify the specification. Click PIPING > Set Up > Spec DB. The Define Piping Specification dialog box opens. . The Open File dialog box opens. The current directory is based on 3. Click the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 4. Double-click the Auto-Selection file that is associated with the specification that you want to modify. The Open File dialog box closes. In the Define Piping Specification dialog box, the file name appears in the border next to AutoSelection File. 5. Under Select Record, select the specification record that you want to modify. 6. Select the Pipe or Fitting tabbed pages for the material code type. Pro/PIPING displays the updated material code in the Material Code box under Define Record. 7. Click to insert a new record that contains the changes. Pro/PIPING adds the record and displays the changes under Select Record. Note that you must delete the existing record before Pro/PIPING can insert the record with the new material code.

120


to save changes to the file. The current directory is based on the 8. Click directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 9. Click File > Exit. The Define Piping Specification dialog box closes. 10. Update the model. Click Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box opens. 11. Under Select Assembly, click apply the changes.


12. Under Model Information, select the Material Data check box. 13. Click . The Confirm Cancel dialog box opens. Click Yes to confirm the update. The dialog boxes close and Pro/PIPING updates the active assembly information. Pro/PIPING confirms the update in the Message Area. 14. Regenerate (PIPING > Regenerate) to apply the changes to the piping model displayed in the graphics window. 15. Verify the changes. Click PIPING > Info. In the Report Pipeline dialog box, select Type > Segment. 16. Click and select a pipe segment in the graphics window. Note that the segment must be from the updated assembly. Pro/PIPING displays the pipeline information in the Information Window.

To Change and Update Stock Number Formats You can change the pipe and fitting stock number formats in a specification and update the current model with the changes. 1. Modify the specification. Click PIPING > Set Up > Spec DB. The Define Piping Specification dialog box opens. . The Open File dialog box opens. The current directory is based on 2. Click the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 3. Double-click the Auto-Selection file that is associated with the specification that you want to modify. The Open File dialog box closes. In the Define Piping Specification dialog box, the file name appears in the border next to AutoSelection File. 4. Under Select Record, select the specification record that you want to modify. 5. Select the Pipe, Fitting, or Assembly (fitting) tabs for the type of stock number format to change. 6. Under Define Record and Select Stock Number Format, select new format keywords from the Keyword box or enter unique keywords. You can delete any keyword to make it unavailable to the specification.

121


to insert the changes to the selected record. Pro/PIPING modifies the 7. Click record and displays the changes under Select Record. 8. Click to save changes to the file. The current directory is based on the directory path in the piping_project_data_dir configuration option. 9. Click File > Exit. The Define Piping Specification dialog box closes. 10. Update the model. Click Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box opens. 11. Under Select Assembly, click apply the changes.


12. Under Model Information, select the Stock Number check box. 13. Click . The Confirm Cancel dialog box opens. Click Yes to confirm the update. The dialog boxes close and Pro/PIPING updates the active assembly information. Pro/PIPING confirms the update in the Message Area. 14. Regenerate (PIPING > Regenerate) to apply the changes to the piping model displayed in the graphics window. 15. Verify the changes. To display the stock number in the updated format, click PIPING > Info. In the Report Pipeline dialog box, select Type > Segment. 16. Click and select a pipe segment in the graphics window. Note that the segment must be from the updated assembly. Pro/PIPING displays the pipeline information in the INFORMATION WINDOW.

To Change and Update Outside Diameters You can change pipe outside diameters (OD) in a specification or line stock and update the current model with the changes. 1. Locate the Pipe Outer Diameter (OD) Master Catalog (MCAT) file for the selected pipeline or line stock. The default path for these files is /text/piping_data/master_catalog/pipeod/. Each Pipe Outer Diameter file is named for a line stock material type (for example, od_steel.ptd.) 2. Use a text editor and change the outside diameter value for a selected line stock. Save all changes. 3. Update the model. Click PIPING > Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box opens. 4. Under Select Assembly, click apply the changes.


5. Under Model Information, select the Outer Diameter check box.

122


. The Confirm Cancel dialog box opens. Click Yes to confirm the 6. Click update. The dialog boxes close and Pro/PIPING updates the active assembly information. Pro/PIPING confirms the update in the Message Area. 7. Regenerate (PIPING > Regenerate) to apply the changes to the piping model displayed in the graphics window. 8. Verify the changes. Click PIPING > Info. In the Report Pipeline dialog box, select Type > Segment. 9. Click and select a pipe segment in the graphics window. Note that the segment must be from the updated assembly. Pro/PIPING displays the pipeline information in the Information Window.

To Change and Update Wall Thickness You can change pipe wall thickness in a specification or line stock and update the current model with the changes. 1. Locate the Pipe Thickness Master Catalog (MCAT) file for the selected pipeline or line stock. The default path for these files is /text/piping_data/ master_catalog/pipethk/. Each Pipe Thickness file is named for a line stock material type (for example, thk_steel.ptd.). 2. Use a text editor and change the wall thickness value for a selected line stock. Save all changes. 3. Update the model. Click PIPING > Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box opens. 4. Under Select Assembly, click apply the changes.


5. Under Model Information, select the Wall Thickness check box. 6. Click . The Confirm Cancel dialog box opens. Click Yes to confirm the update. The dialog boxes close and Pro/PIPING updates the active assembly information. Pro/PIPING confirms the update in the Message Area. 7. Regenerate (PIPING > Regenerate) to apply the changes to the piping model displayed in the graphics window. 8. Verify the changes. Click PIPING > Info. In the Report Pipeline dialog box, select Type > Segment. 9. Click and select a pipe segment in the graphics window. Note that the segment must be from the updated assembly. Pro/PIPING displays the pipeline information in the Information Window.

123


To Change and Update Material Density You can change pipe material density in a specification and update the current model with the changes. 1. Locate the Piping Material Master Catalog (MCAT) file for the selected pipeline or line stock. The default path for this file is /text/piping_data/master_catalog/. 2. Use a text editor and change the material density value for the selected pipeline or line stock. Save all changes. 3. Update the model. Click PIPING > Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box opens. 4. Under Select Assembly, click apply the changes.


5. Under Model Information, select the Density check box. 6. Click . The Confirm Cancel dialog box opens. Click Yes to confirm the update. The dialog boxes close and Pro/PIPING updates the active assembly information. Pro/PIPING confirms the update in the Message Area. 7. Regenerate (PIPING > Regenerate) to apply the changes to the piping model displayed in the graphics window. 8. Verify the changes. Click Analysis > Model Analysis. In the Model Analysis dialog box, retrieve a solid part density.

To Change and Update Miter Parameters You can change pipe miter parameters in a specification and update the current model with the changes. 1. Locate the Miter Master Catalog (MCAT) file for the selected pipeline or line stock. The default path for these files is /text/piping_data/ master_catalog/miter/. Each Miter file is named for a line stock material type (for example, miter_steel.ptd.) 2. Use a text editor and change the miter parameter value for the selected pipeline or line stock. Save all changes. 3. Update the model. Click PIPING > Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box opens. 4. Under Select Assembly, click apply the changes.


5. Under Model Information, select the Miter Parameters check box.

124


. The Confirm Cancel dialog box opens. Click Yes to confirm the 6. Click update. The dialog boxes close and Pro/PIPING updates the active assembly information. Pro/PIPING confirms the update in the Message Area. 7. Click PIPING > Regenerate to regenerate and apply the changes to the piping model displayed in the graphics window.

To Change and Update Bend Parameters You can change pipe bend parameters in a specification and update the current model with the changes. 1. Locate the Bend Master Catalog (MCAT) file for the selected pipeline or line stock. The default path for these files is /text/piping_data/ master_catalog/bend/. Each Bend file is named for a line stock material type (for example, bend_steel.ptd.). 2. Use a text editor and change the bend parameter value for the selected pipeline or line stock. Save all changes. 3. Update the model. Click PIPING > Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box opens. 4. Under Select Assembly, click apply the changes.


5. Under Model Information, select the Bend Parameters check box. 6. Click . The Confirm Cancel dialog box opens. Click Yes to confirm the update. The dialog boxes close and Pro/PIPING updates the active assembly information. Pro/PIPING confirms the update in the Message Area. 7. Click PIPING > Regenerate to regenerate and apply the changes to the piping model displayed in the graphics window. 8. Verify the changes. Click Set Up > Design Rules. The Define Design Rules dialog box opens. 9. Do one of the following: o

Under By Segment, click

o

Under By Parameters, select a linestock.

and select a pipe segment.

. The Design Rule Parameters dialog box opens and displays the 10. Click updated bend parameters.

125


To Change and Update Bend Machine Parameters You can change bend machine parameters in a specification and update the current model with the changes. 1. Locate the Bend Machine Master Catalog (MCAT) file for the selected pipeline or line stock. The default path for these files is /text/piping_data/ master_catalog/bend_machine/. 2. Use a text editor and change the bend parameter value for the selected pipeline or line stock. Save all changes. 3. Update the model. Click PIPING > Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box opens. 4. Under Select Assembly, click apply the changes.


5. Under Model Information, select the Bend m/c Parameters check box. 6. Click . The Confirm Cancel dialog box opens. Click Yes to confirm the update. The dialog boxes close and Pro/PIPING updates the active assembly information. Pro/PIPING confirms the update in the Message Area. 7. Click PIPING > Regenerate to apply the changes to the piping model displayed in the graphics window.

Tip: Updating Multiple Changes You can use the Update Model dialog box to apply multiple changes to the Project Data and MCAT files and save time. 1. Complete any changes and save them. 2. Click PIPING > Set Up > Update Model. The Update Model dialog box opens. 3. Under Select Assembly, click apply the changes.


4. Under Model Information, select all check boxes that correspond to the modified data. 5. Click . The Confirm Cancel dialog box opens. Click Yes to confirm the update. The dialog boxes close and Pro/PIPING updates the active assembly information. Pro/PIPING confirms the update in the Message Area. 6. Click PIPING > Regenerate to apply the changes to the piping model displayed in the graphics window. Note: To quickly apply the changes to another assembly, click under Select Assembly in the Update Model dialog box and select another assembly. Then, repeat the last three steps above.

126


Design Rule Parameters About Design Rule Parameters (Spec-Driven) In Pro/PIPING, Design Rule parameters are line stock parameters that check selected pipelines to ensure that the pipes stay within their limitations. If there are any violations, this is considered a Line Stock violation. The system compares the characteristics of a selected pipeline with the values of the Design Rule parameters. If there are any violations, the pipeline is highlighted, which gives you the opportunity to correct the pipeline parameters. Pro/PIPING uses Design Rule parameters for both the Non Specification-Driven and the Specification-Driven Pro/PIPING modes.

To Define Design Rule Parameters (Spec-Driven) You use design rule parameters to verify whether the parameters of a routed pipe are within limitations. 1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Design Rules. The Define Design Rules dialog box opens. 2. Under By Segment, click and select a pipe segment. This allows you to assign design rule parameters to a pipe segment. or Under By Parameters, select a linestock. This allows you to assign Design Rule parameters to an entire line stock. 3. Click

. The Design Rule Parameters dialog box opens.

4. Type the Design Rule parameter values in any of the following boxes and ENTER. A highlighted dot at the bottom of the dialog box confirms the entry. o

Max Overall Length—Maximum allowable overall length of a continuous pipe segment.

o

Min Segment Length—Minimum allowable length of a continuous pipe segment.

o

Max Segment Length—Maximum allowable length of a continuous pipe segment.

o

Max Bends Number—Maximum allowable number of bends in a continuous pipe segment.

o

Min Bend Separation—Minimum allowable distance, in assembly units, between bends in one continuous pipe segment.

o

Start/End Clamp Length—Minimum allowable distance, in assembly units, from a pipe end to the next bend or endpoint.

127

Pro/PIPING (Spec-Driven) - Help Topic Collection o

Min Bend Radius—Minimum allowable bend radius, in assembly units, for a pipe segment.

o

Max Bend Radius—Maximum allowable bend radius, in assembly units, for a pipe segment.

o

Min Bend Angle—Minimum angle of the bend, in assembly units, for a continuous pipe segment.

o

Max Bend Angle—Maximum angle of the bend, in assembly units, for a continuous pipe segment.

o

Bend Arc Threshold— Angle at which Pro/PIPING defines the dimensioning scheme for large angle bends, such as 180 degrees (Default value in degrees: 165. You can enter a value between 0 and 360.)

o

Min Branch Separation—Minimum separation distance between two branches in a continuous pipe segment.

o

Min Branch Angle—Minimum allowable angle between a branch and the main.

o

Bend Table Name—Assign a bend table to the line stock. You can create a bend table at any time (Default value: NO_TABLE).

5. Click to apply the design rule parameters and close the Design Rule Parameters dialog box. 6. Click

to close the Define Design Rules dialog box.

Note: All bend radius and bend angle boxes are unavailable. Pro/PIPING retrieves this bend data from the Specification Database Bend Master Catalog (MCAT) file.

Bend Arc Threshold (Spec-Driven) The Bend Arc Threshold is a design rule parameter that appears in the Design Rule Parameters dialog box (Specification-Driven Piping). The Bend Arc Threshold is the angle at which Pro/PIPING defines the dimensioning scheme for large angle bends such as 180 degrees. The dimensioning scheme for the bend refers to how the bend is located along the pipe. Pro/PIPING can locate the bend by either the Theoretical Intersection Point or the Bend Arc Center Point. •

Bend angles that are larger than or equal to 180 degrees get dimensioned based on the Bend Arc Center Point.

•

Bend angles that are smaller than 180 degrees get dimensioned based on the Theoretical Intersection Point of the bend.

For a 180 degree bend, one bend value is reported for the location of the center of the arc of the 180 degree bend.

128


Example: Bend Arc Threshold (Spec-Driven) IF BEND_ARC_THRESHOLD = 165 (default) Then Route a 180-degree bend—Gets reported as one 180-degree bend from the arc center of the bend. IF BEND_ARC_THRESHOLD = 180 Then Route a 180-degree bend—Gets reported as one 180-degree bend from the arc center of the bend. IF BEND_ARC_THRESHOLD = 181 Then Route a 180-degree bend—Gets reported as two 90-degree bends from the theoretical intersection points.

Design Rules Checking About Design Rules Checking You can enable or disable the design rule check during the pipe modeling process. When you enable the design rule check, the location of violations can be displayed and you can rectify them at an early stage. The modeling process then proceeds with greater accuracy. Use the design rule checking functionality to: •

Select the design rules to check whenever violations can occur due to a specific pipe modeling operation. You can select all design rules or only a few design rules.

•

Indicate the location of a design rule violation.

Note: To enable the checking of design rules for piping assemblies that are created using versions of Pro/ENGINEER earlier than Wildfire, set appropriate values to the piping_wildfire_convert configuration option. To Check for Design Rule Violations (Spec-Driven) . The Design Rules Check dialog box opens.

1. Click Note: o

The Design Rules Check dialog box opens only when an active assembly contains a pipeline for which you can check design rules.

129


If you are working with a piping assembly that is created using versions of Pro/ENGINEER earlier than Wildfire, set the piping_wildfire_convert configuration option.

2. Under Setup, select one or more of the following design rules to check. o

Missing Fitting—Checks for missed fittings and gaskets. Under Design Rules Tree, click a missed fitting type to display the violation information under Violation Details.

o

Segment Violations—Checks for violations in segment length. Under Design Rules Tree, click a segment violation type to display the violation information under Violation Details.

o

Bend Violations—Displays the bend violation results for a pipeline. Under Design Rules Tree, click a bend violation type to display the violation information under Violation Details.

o

Branch Violations—Displays the branch violations in a pipeline. Under Design Rules Tree, click a branch violation type to display the violation information under Violation Details.

o

Flow Violations—Checks for conflicts in the flow direction. Under Design Rules Tree, click Flow Violations to display the name of the datum point feature at the location of flow conflict under Violation Details.

o

End Type Compatibility—Checks for conflicts in the end type for two mated fittings. Under Design Rules Tree, click End Type Compatibility to display the first end type and rating and the second end type and rating under Violation Details.

o

Invalid Pipeline Label Size—Checks for conflicts when the pipe pieces do not have the same size as specified in the pipeline label. Under Design Rules Tree, click Invalid Pipeline Label Size to display the invalid pipeline label size under Violation Details.

The number of violations is displayed in parentheses adjacent to the appropriate tree node under Design Rules Tree. Note: If you do not want to check for any of the previous design rule violations, clear the appropriate design rule from the Setup list. 3. If required, click Tree and select one of the following:

130

o

Expand All—Expands all the tree nodes.

o

Expand One—Expands only the selected tree node and not its component child nodes.

o

Expand Branch—Expands the selected tree node and all its component child nodes.

o

Collapse All—Collapses all the tree nodes.

o

Collapse One—Collapses only the selected tree node or a child node of a tree node.


Collapse Branch—Collapses the selected tree node and all its component child nodes.

Note: A tree node and its child nodes represent design rules in all the above cases. or

4. Click 5. Click Window.

to select a record under Violation Details.

to display the design rule violation information in the Information

Displaying Missing Fitting Violations Missed fitting types are displayed under Design Rules Tree in the Design Rules Check dialog box as follows: •

Corner Fitting—Displays violation results for missing corner fittings.

•

Flange-Gasket—Displays violation results for missing gaskets and flanges. The following columns are displayed under Violation Details: o

Sname—The selection name of the fitting that has the missing flange and gasket.

o

Location—The upstream, downstream, or the branch stream location where the violation has occurred.

Displaying Segment Violations Segment violation types are displayed under Design Rules Tree in the Design Rules Check dialog box as follows: •

Min Segment Length—Displays violation results if you create a pipe segment with a length shorter than the minimum segment length.

•

Max Segment Length—Displays violation results if you create a pipe segment with a length greater than the maximum segment length. The violation results are displayed in the following columns under Violation Details when you click Min Segment Length or Max Segment Length:

•

o

Stockno—The stock number of the pipe.

o

Current—The current segment length.

o

Required—The required minimum or maximum segment length.

Total Segment Length—Displays violation results if you create pipe segments of a pipe in the active assembly where the pipe segments have length greater than the total pipe length. The violation results are displayed in the following columns under Violation Details: o


131


Current—The total segment length.

o

Required—The required total segment length.

Displaying Bend Violations Bend violation types are displayed under Design Rules Tree in the Design Rules Check dialog box as follows: •

Max Bend Numbers—Displays violation results if you create bends on a pipe segment greater than the specified maximum bend number value.

•

Start Clamp Length—Displays violation results if you create a pipe segment with its start clamp length less than the specified value.

•

Middle Clamp Length—Displays violation results if you create a pipe segment with its middle clamp length less than the specified value.

•

End Clamp Length—Displays violation results if you create a pipe segment with its end clamp length less than the specified value.

•

Min Bend Radius—Displays violation results if you create a pipe bend with its radius less than the specified value.

•

Max Bend Radius—Displays violation results if you create a pipe bend with its radius greater than the specified value.

•

Min Bend Angle—Displays violation results if you create a pipe bend with its angle less than the specified value.

•

Max Bend Angle—Displays violation results if you create a pipe bend with its angle greater than the specified value.

In all the previous cases, the violation results are displayed in the following columns under Violation Details: •


•

Current—The current bend number, start clamp length, middle clamp length, end clamp length, bend radius, or the bend angle.

•

Required—The required bend number, start clamp length, middle clamp length, end clamp length, minimum bend radius, maximum bend radius, minimum bend angle, or the maximum bend angle.

Displaying Branch Violations Branch violations are displayed under Design Rules Tree in the Design Rules Check dialog box as follows: •

Min Branch Separation—Displays violation results if you create branches on a pipe segment with the distance between the branches less than the specified minimum branch separation.

132


Min Branch Angle—Displays violation results if you create a branch with the angle between the branch and the main less than the specified minimum branch angle value.

In the previous cases, the violation results are displayed in the following columns under Violation Details: •


•

Current—The current branch separation or the branch angle.

•

Required—The required minimum branch separation or the minimum branch angle.

Checking Design Rules Pro/PIPING determines whether any design rule check has been enabled at the end of each of the pipe modeling operations as discussed in the following table. Use the Define Design Rules dialog box to change the default values specified in the table below. Design Rule

Where to Define in the SpecDB

Where to Store in the Model

Check After

Missing Fitting Corner fitting

Route Pipe, Modify Corner Type, Delete Fitting

Flange and gasket

Insert Fitting, Delete Fitting, Replace Fitting

Segment violations Minimum segment length

MIN_LEN column of the Pipe Manufacture Directory file

MIN_SEGMENT_LENGTH line stock parameter

Route Pipe, Modify Dimension, Modify Pipe, Modify Corner Type,

133


Design Rule



Check After Insert Fitting, Replace Fitting, Redefine Fitting, Cut Pipe

Maximum segment length

MAX_LEN column of the Pipe Manufacture Directory file

MAX_SEGMENT_LENGTH line stock parameter

Route Pipe, Modify Dimension, Modify Pipe, Modify Corner Type, Insert Fitting, Delete Fitting, Replace Fitting, Redefine Fitting, Delete Cut

Total segment length

MAX_OVERALL_LEN column of the Pipe Manufacture Directory file

MAX_OVERALL_LENGTH line stock parameter

Route Pipe, Modify Dimension, Modify Pipe, Modify Corner Type, Insert Fitting, Delete Fitting, Replace Fitting, Redefine Fitting, Delete Cut

Bend violations

134


Design Rule



Check After

Maximum bend numbers

MAX_BENDS column of the Pipe Manufacture Directory file

MAX_NUMBER_BENDS line stock parameter

Route Pipe, Modify Corner Type, Delete Fitting, Delete Cut

Start clamp length

START_CLAMP_LEN column of the Bending Machine file

The first element of the MIN_STRAIGHT_LENGTH_EN D line stock parameter

Route Pipe, Modify Dimension, Modify Pipe, Modify Corner Type, Insert Fitting, Replace Fitting, Redefine Fitting, Cut Pipe

Middle clamp length

MID_CLAMP_LEN column of the Bending Machine file

MIN_BEND_SEPARATION line stock parameter

Route Pipe, Modify Dimension, Modify Pipe, Modify Corner Type

End clamp length

END_CLAMP_LEN column of the Bending Machine file

The second element of the MIN_STRAIGHT_LENGTH_EN D line stock parameter

Route Pipe, Modify Dimension, Modify Pipe, Modify Corner Type, Insert Fitting, Replace Fitting, Redefine Fitting, Cut 135


Design Rule



Check After Pipe

Minimum bend radius

MIN_RADIUS column of the Bend file

MIN_BEND_RADIUS line stock parameter

Modify Corner Type, Update Bend Parameters

Maximum bend radius

MAX_RADIUS column of the Bend file

MAX_BEND_RADIUS line stock parameter

Modify Corner Type, Update Bend Parameters

Minimum bend angle

MIN_ANGLE column of the Bend file

MIN_BEND_ANGLE line stock parameter

Route Pipe, Modify Dimension, Modify Corner Type, Update Bend Parameters

Maximum bend angle

MAX_ANGLE column of the Bend file

MAX_BEND_ANGLE line stock parameter

Route Pipe, Modify Dimension, Modify Corner Type, Update Bend Parameters

MIN_BRANCH_SEPARATION line stock parameter

Route Pipe Branch To, Route Pipe Branch From, Modify Dimension

Branch violations Minimum branch separation

136

The default value is 50 mm or its equivalent in the pipeline assembly length unit.


Design Rule


Minimum branch angle


Check After

MIN_BRANCH_ANGLE line stock parameter

Route Pipe Branch To, Route Pipe Branch From, Modify Dimension

The default value is 30 degrees.

Flow conflict

End type compatibility

Route Pipe, Modify Pipeline, Extension or Series Flow Direction The End Type Compatibility file

Invalid pipeline label size

Delete Fitting, Replace Fitting Route Pipe, Modify Pipe, Modify Pipeline Label

Bend Tables About Bend Tables (Spec-Driven) Pro/PIPING uses bend tables to accurately calculate the length of straight pipe (developed length) required to make a bend of a specific bend radius and angle. The developed pipe length for the same bend can differ due to different materials and pipe outside diameters (OD). Bend tables are normalized for 90 degree bends. For other than 90 degree bends, Pro/ENGINEER takes those values and multiplies them by A/90, where A represents the specific bend angle in degrees.

137


Bend Table Menu The Bend Table menu allows you to access all Pro/PIPING bend tables for creation and modification. From the BEND TAB menu (PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow), you can perform the following tasks: •

Define—Creates Pro/PIPING bend tables.

•

Delete—Deletes Pro/PIPING bend tables.

•

Edit—Modifies Pro/PIPING bend tables. You can update a bend table at any time.

•

Show—Displays Pro/PIPING bend tables. You can confirm bend table data.

•

Read—Reads a bend table from a file to a part.

•

Write—Writes a bend table from a part to a file.

To Define a Bend Table (Spec-Driven) 1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow > Define. 2. Type a bend table name and click table outline.

. A Pro/TABLE window opens containing an

3. Enter the data in the table. or Select File > Read to use an existing bend table as a baseline. The Read File dialog box opens. Enter the name of the existing bend table file and click OK. The system reads the file data and writes it to the current bend table file. Modify the bend table data, if needed. 4. Click File > Save and Exit to save and close the bend table. You must now assign the new bend table to a pipe segment or line stock to use it.

Defining Bend Tables (Spec-Driven) Pro/PIPING allows you to define new bend tables. You define bend tables for 90 degree bends. For other than 90 degree bends, Pro/ENGINEER takes those values and multiplies them by A/90 where Α represents the specific bend angle in degrees. You do not have to insert a bend allowance value (A) in every cell in a bend allowance table. If you leave a particular cell blank, the system calculates the length value using interpolation.

138


The following table describes the Pro/PIPING bend table format: Column 1

Column 2

Column 3

Column 4

…

radius

radius

radius

radius

radius

outside diameter

bend allow

bend allow

bend allow

FORMULA equation ... ENDFORMULA ! CONVERSION equation ... START MATERIALS MATERIAL ... END MATERIALS ! TABLE

outside diameter

...

...

...

... ...

Note: •

Enter the words FORMULA, END FORMULA, CONVERSION, END CONVERSION, START MATERIALS, END MATERIALS and TABLE exactly as shown.

•

The following definitions apply for the above bend table format:

•

o

FORMULA—An equation for the developed length.

o

TABLE— A combination of pipe outer diameter (OD) and bend radius table data that will never be encountered in your pipe assembly. For example, 0.25 bend radius with an OD of 0.5 inches.

Comment lines can appear anywhere in a bend table. Each comment line in the table must start with an exclamation point (!).

139


To Modify a Bend Table (Spec-Driven) Pro/PIPING allows you to modify bend tables. You can edit only those bend tables created in the current assembly or applied to the current assembly. To modify a bend table within Pro/PIPING, do the following: 1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow > Edit. The TBL NAMES menu appears. 2. Select the bend table to modify from the TBL NAMES menu. This menu lists all bend tables that were applied to the assembly or were created when the assembly was currently in session. 3. A Pro/TABLE window opens and displays the selected table. 4. Modify the bend table. 5. Click File > Save or Exit. Pro/PIPING saves the bend table in the current directory. Note: You must assign a bend table to a pipe segment or line stock to use it.

To Delete a Bend Table (Spec-Driven) 1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow > Delete. 2. Select the bend table to delete from the TBL NAMES menu. This menu lists all bend tables that were applied to the assembly or were created when the assembly was currently in session. Pro/PIPING deletes the selected bend table.

To Show a Bend Table (Spec-Driven) Pro/PIPING allows you to show or view a bend table. Note that if you select to show a table, you cannot modify it. To show a bend table, follow these steps: 1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow > Show. 2. Select the bend table to show from the TBL NAMES menu. This menu lists all bend tables that were applied to the assembly or were created when the assembly was currently in session. 3. A Pro/TABLE window opens and displays the selected bend table. 4. After viewing the table, click File > Exit. The Pro/TABLE window closes.

To Read a Bend Table to a Model (Spec-Driven) You can read a bend table from a bend table (.bnd) file into a model. Pro/PIPING creates a bend table from the file data and applies it to the current model. 1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow > Read. The DATA FILES menu appears. 2. Select a bend table name. Pro/PIPING lists all saved bend tables. If you select Names, the Open dialog box opens in which you select a bend table (.bnd) file to read. The Pro/ENGINEER Message Area confirms the action. 140


To Write a Bend Table to a File (Spec-Driven) Pro/PIPING saves each bend table that you define to the current model. If you want to save a bend table to a separate file, you can write it to a bend table (.bnd) file. 1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Bend Allow > Write. The TBL NAMES menu appears. 2. Select the bend table to modify from the TBL NAMES menu. This menu lists all bend tables that were applied to the assembly or were created when the assembly was currently in session. The Pro/ENGINEER Message Area confirms the action.

Bend Table Data (Spec-Driven) The table data (A) represents the developed bend lengths or allowances (with the presence of the CONVERSION formula) for specific bend radii and pipe outer diameters (T). The table data and the conversion equation are used together, so make sure that the two together give you the correct results. Observe the following points when using bend table data: •

Create your bend tables for 90 bends. For other than 90 bends, Pro/ENGINEER takes those values and multiplies them by A/90, where A is the specific bend angle in degrees.

•

You do not have to insert a bend allowance value (A) in every cell in a bend allowance table.

•

If you leave a particular cell blank, the system uses interpolation to calculate the length value.

•

For bend radii and outside diameters (OD) between the values in adjacent cells, a linear interpolation is used.

Note: The values in the bend tables are independent of the model units. They do not change if you change the model units. For example, you originally create a pipe assembly with the model units set to inches. The outside diameter is 0.25 and the bend radius is 0.5. The system looks up the bend table to find the developed length at the ordinates (0.25, 0.5). If you change the model units to centimeters and keep the model the same size, the pipe OD becomes 0.625 and the bend radius 1.270. The system looks up the table to find the developed length at the ordinates (0.625, 1.270).

Formula Equations (Spec-Driven) Formula is an equation used to calculate the developed length for any radius or outside diameter (OD) that falls outside the range of the table data. Pro/PIPING provides the following variables for use in the table: •

L—Developed straight length of the bend.

•

R—Bend radius.

141


T—Pipe outer diameter (OD).

•

ANGLE—Bend Angle (in degrees).

Formula Equation Rules Follow these rules when you enter the formula equation in a bend table: •

The formula must be the first equation in the table.

•

The formula must begin with the descriptor FORMULA, in the first column. o

If an equation is simple, write it in the second column on the same line as the descriptor, as in the following examples: FORMULA L = (0.55*T) + (PI*R)/2.0 FORMULA L = (ANGLE*PI/180)*(R+T/2)

o

If the formula is more complex and/or contains some logic statements, then the FORMULA descriptor must precede the actual formula on its own line. The formula must also be concluded by the descriptor END FORMULA, on its own line and in the first column. The following example illustrates this process: FORMULA IF (R/T) < 1.10 | (R/T) > 1.83 L = (PI*R*T)/2.0 ELSE L = (PI/2)*(R + (T*0.35)) END FORMULA

In a multi-statement formula like this, you can enter the statements in columns other than column one.

Conversion Equations (Spec-Driven) The conversion equation tells the system how table data (A) is related to the developed length (L). If no conversion equation is defined, the system assumes that the table data equals the required length (L = A). For example, if the table data represents the bend deduction value, the equation might look like the following: L = 2*(T + R) - A Note: L must never be negative.

142


Conversion Equation Variables You can use the following variables in a conversion equation: •

L—Developed straight length of stock.

•

R—Bend radius.

•

T—Material thickness.

•

ANGLE—Bend Angle (in degrees).

•

A—Bend allowance value contained in the table data section.

Conversion Equation Rules Follow these rules when you enter the conversion equation in a bend table: •

Only use a conversion equation when the developed length L is not equal to your table values A.

•

The conversion must begin with the descriptor CONVERSION, in the first column. o

If the equation is a simple one, then it can be written in the second column on the same line as the descriptor, as in this example: CONVERSION L = 2*(T +R) - A

o

If the formula is more complex and/or contains some logic statements, then the CONVERSION descriptor must precede the actual formula on its own line and the formula must be concluded by the descriptor END CONVERSION, again on its own line and in the first column.

To Assign a Bend Table (Spec-Driven) Note: Pro/PIPING allows you to assign a bend table at any time in the design process. 1. Click PIPING > Set Up > Design Rules. The Define Design Rules dialog box opens. 2. Select the line stock by doing one of the following: o

Under By Segment, click window.

o

Under By Parameters, select a line stock name from the Model Tree or Piping System Tree.

3. Click

and select pipe segment from the graphics

. The Design Rule Parameters dialog box opens.

4. Select a bend table from the Bend Table Name box (Default value: NO_TABLE). This box lists all bend tables defined for the pipe segment or line stock.

143


5. Click closes.

to apply the bend table. The Design Rule Parameters dialog box

6. Click

to close the Define Design Rules dialog box.

Set Display About Setting Display Options The Set Display dialog box opens after you click the Set Display option in the PIPE SETUP menu. The Set Display dialog box allows to set the action options related to pipelines, pipeline labels, spool labels, flow direction, pipe solid, valve numbers, and insulation.

To Set Display Options 1. Click PIPING > Set Up. Click Set Display in the PIPE Setup menu. The Set Display dialog box opens. 2. Click

to select the pipeline in the Pro/ENGINEER window.

3. In the Display Options area, select any of the options. o

Pipeline—Show or hide an entire pipeline

o

Pipeline Label—Create, show, hide or delete a pipeline label

o

Spool Label—Show or hide a pipeline spool label

o

Flow Direction—Show or hide the flow direction arrows of a pipeline

o

Pipe Solid—Show or hide the solid representation of a pipeline

o

Valve Number—Show or hide the valve number of a valve fitting

o

Insulation—Show or hide the solid representation of a insulation.

4. In the Action Options area, select the appropriate option. 5. Click

to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

Specification-Driven Piping Assemblies About Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven) Pro/PIPING organizes all pipelines, fittings, and equipment for a piping system in assemblies and subassemblies. Pro/PIPING creates piping assemblies after you create pipelines. All subsequent modeling occurs within the currently active assembly. Pro/PIPING allows you to do the following: •

Change active assemblies at any time in the piping design process by selecting a pipeline in the graphics window.

144


Convert existing piping assemblies created in one piping design mode to the other mode on-the-fly using the User-Driven piping design mode.

To Make a Piping Assembly Active (Spec-Driven) You can change the currently active assembly at any time in the piping design process. 1. Create or open a piping assembly. 2. Click Applications > PIPING. The PIPING menu appears. 3. Click PIPING > Active Asm. 4. Select a pipeline from the graphics window. The assembly associated with the selected pipeline becomes the active assembly. Pro/PIPING displays the active assembly name in the graphics window. You can also select an assembly from the Model Tree or the Piping System Tree.

About Converting Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven) The User-Driven piping design mode allows you to convert piping assemblies at any time in the piping design process using the Spec Driven check box on the PIPING menu. You can convert existing Non Specification-Driven or Specification-Driven piping assemblies to the other design mode on-the-fly and continue designing your piping system. After setting piping_design_method configuration option to the User-Driven mode, the following actions occur: •

If a piping assembly is not open, Pro/PIPING defaults to the Non SpecificationDriven design mode. Select the Spec Driven check box to switch to the Specification-Driven design mode.

•

If an existing piping assembly is open or after you open an existing piping assembly, Pro/PIPING switches to the piping design mode in which the assembly was created. The Spec Driven check box indicates the design mode. You can always convert the assembly to switch design modes.

Assembly Conversion Processes Pro/PIPING executes two different piping assembly conversion processes based on the piping assembly type. Assembly Type

Conversion Process

Specification-Driven to Non Specification-Driven

Clear the Spec Driven check box on the PIPING menu. After this process, Pro/PIPING considers all pipelines as Non Specification-Driven. All existing fittings will remain Specification-Driven.

Non Specification-Driven to

Select the Spec Driven check box on the PIPING 145


Assembly Type

Conversion Process

Specification-Driven

menu. You must assign specification-specific data in the Convert Pipeline dialog box for each pipeline in the active assembly. After entering this data, the Pro/ENGINEER message area displays each pipeline and its conversion status. All pipelines must be converted to Specification-Driven. All existing fittings will remain Non SpecificationDriven.

Note: •

The piping assembly conversion processes occur on a pipeline basis only. Fittings are not converted.

•

Mixed models are not allowed. Non Specification-Driven and Specification-Driven pipelines cannot be included in the same piping assembly.

•

Mixed assemblies are allowed. Non Specification-Driven and Specification-Driven assemblies and subassemblies can be grouped.

•

All existing line stocks are automatically deleted. The Non Specification-Driven mode permits different line stock assignments to each pipe segment.

•

Pipe solids failure can occur due to pipeline size changes.

To Convert Non Specification-Driven Piping Assemblies (SpecDriven) You can convert Non Specification-Driven Piping assemblies to Specification-Driven Piping assemblies. This allows you to use existing pipe systems in the SpecificationDriven Piping design mode. 1. Configure Pro/PIPING for the User-Driven piping design mode. 2. Create or open a Non Specification-Driven piping assembly to convert. 3. Click Active Asm on the PIPING menu and select a piping assembly from either the Piping System Tree or the graphics window. 4. Select the Spec Driven check box on the PIPING menu. The Convert Pipeline dialog box opens. Pro/PIPING displays the active assembly under Active Assembly. 5. If you have set the piping_schematic_driven configuration option to yes, the Schematic Driven option will be available under Pipeline. To convert a pipeline using the schematic information, perform the following steps: a. Check the XML File option under Schematic Driven to make

146

active.


and select an XML file from the directory path specified by the b. Click piping_schematic_xml_dir configuration option or your current working directory. You can browse to any required directory to select the XML file. c. The Schematic Label option under Schematic Driven lists all the eligible pipelines for conversion, based on the information in the specified XML file. Select a pipeline from the eligible list. d. Click the Label tab. The Specification, Size, Schedule, Mnemonic, Number, and Insulation boxes get updated. e. Click the Parameters tab. The Oper. Pressure, Oper. Temperature, Design Pressure, and Design Temperature boxes get updated if the schematic information contains the respective operating and design pipeline parameters. f.

Click the Defined tab. The User Defined Parameters get updated.

Note: To convert a pipeline without the schematic information, clear the XML File option and perform the following steps. 6. Select a pipeline to convert from the Select Pipeline box. If only one pipeline is available, Pro/PIPING displays its name beside Pipeline. 7. Click the Label tab. Under Pipeline Label, do the following: o

Select a specification, size, and schedule for the selected pipeline.

o

If applicable, select mnemonic, number, and insulation. Note that a pipeline number uniquely identifies a pipeline and it is needed for the Piping System Tree to organize pipelines (by their number) in a piping system.

8. If applicable, type pipeline parameter values. Click the Parameters tab. Under Pipeline Parameters, enter the parameter values. By default, Pro/PIPING makes the pipeline parameters unavailable. 9. If applicable, type user-defined pipeline parameters. Click the Defined tab. Under User Defined Parameters, do one of the following: o

Type a parameter name in the Name box (must begin with a letter) and a corresponding value in the Value box. Click the pipeline.

o

to add the parameter to

. Retrieve existing user-defined pipeline parameters from a file. Click The Open dialog box opens. Select the file to retrieve and double-click.

Pro/PIPING displays the user-defined parameters. 10. Click 11. Click

to save the parameters to a file. to accept all pipeline data and begin the conversion process.

The Pro/ENGINEER Message area displays the pipeline conversion status. Pro/PIPING generates new line stocks based on the assigned specification. 147


Note: •

You must perform this conversion process each time you switch from the Non Specification-Driven to the Specification-Driven design mode.

•

You must select each assembly to convert. Mixed assemblies are allowed.

•

Every pipeline in the active assembly must be converted.

•

All existing fittings remain Non Specification-Driven.

•

All existing line stocks are automatically deleted.

•


To Convert Specification-Driven Piping Assemblies (Spec-Driven) You can convert Specification-Driven Piping assemblies to Non Specification-Driven Piping assemblies. This allows you to use the existing pipe systems in the Non Specification-Driven piping design mode. 1. Configure Pro/PIPING for the User-Driven piping design mode. 2. Create or open a Specification-Driven piping assembly to convert. 3. On the PIPING menu, clear the Spec Driven check box. Pro/PIPING considers all pipelines as Non Specification-Driven. Note: •

Every pipeline in the active assembly must be converted because the Non Specification-Driven mode permits different line stock assignments for each pipe segment.

•

All existing fittings remain Specification-Driven. So, if you convert the pipeline to Specification-Driven, Pro/PIPING selects and inserts all Specification-Driven fittings according to the pipeline specification.

•


Converting Piping Assemblies to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Format When you work with pipeline assemblies that are created in versions of Pro/PIPING earlier than Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire, the piping data stored in the assembly must be updated or converted to the Wildfire format. Otherwise, you cannot check design rules, display flow direction, or perform an automatic reordering of the piping model. If parameters such as STOCKNUMBER and MATERIALDATA are stored in the fitting component features that are created in versions of Pro/PIPING earlier than Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire, then these parameters must be converted to appropriate parameters in the Wildfire format. For example, STOCKNUMBER must be converted to STOCKNO and MATERIALDATA must be converted to MATERIALCODE and MATERIALDESC in the Wildfire format. When you specify automatic as a value for the piping_wildfire_convert configuration option, piping assemblies are automatically converted when you invoke

148


the Pro/PIPING application. If you set the piping_wildfire_convert configuration option to manual, you can use the Piping Assemblies Conversion dialog box and select one of the following conversion types to convert pipeline assemblies. The Piping Assemblies Conversion dialog box opens when you click Applications > Piping. •

Automatic—Automatically converts all the piping assemblies in the current Pro/PIPING session.

•

Never—Piping assemblies are not converted in the current Pro/PIPING session.

•

Manual—Selects the piping assemblies to be converted from the Select Piping Assemblies to Convert list. All the assembly names are selected by default. You can select any assembly that you want to convert from the list.

Note: When you convert piping assemblies, the assembly revision number is updated automatically.

Specification-Driven Pipelines About Specification-Driven Pipelines You begin designing specification-driven piping systems by creating specificationdriven pipelines using the Create Pipeline dialog box (PIPING > Pipeline > Create/Route). You create each pipeline in a piping assembly by using the OPER PIPE LINE menu. The OPER PIPE LINE menu allows you perform the following pipeline tasks: •

Create/Route—Creates a pipeline and provides you with the ROUTE PIPE menu to route the pipeline immediately.

•

Delete—Deletes the selected pipeline and provides you with the option of deleting or suspending all associated children.

•

Rename—Renames the selected pipeline.

•

Merge—Merges the selected pipeline components into another pipeline.

•

Spec Break—Changes the specification between the selected pipe segments or fittings.

•

Suppress—Suppresses the selected pipeline and all associated children.

•

Resume—Resumes suppressed pipelines by name.

To Create a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) 1. Create or open a Specification-Driven piping assembly. 2. Click Applications > Piping. The PIPING menu appears. 3. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Create/Route. The Create Pipeline dialog box opens.

149


Note: To create a pipeline without the schematic information proceed to step 5. 4. If you have set the piping_schematic_driven configuration option to yes the Schematic Driven option will be available under Pipeline. To create a pipeline using the schematic information, perform the following steps: a. Check the XML File option under Schematic Driven to make

active.

and select an XML file from the directory path specified by the b. Click piping_schematic_xml_dir configuration option or your current working directory. You can browse to any required directory to select the XML file. c. The Schematic Label option under Schematic Driven lists all the eligible pipelines for creation, based on the information in the specified XML file. Select a pipeline from the eligible list. d. Click the Label tab. The Specification, Size, Schedule, Mnemonic, Number, and Insulation boxes get updated. e. Click the Parameters tab. The Oper. Pressure, Oper. Temperature, Design Pressure, and Design Temperature boxes get updated if the schematic information contains the respective operating and design pipeline parameters. f.

Click the Defined tab. The User Defined Parameters get updated.

Note: To create a pipeline without the schematic information, clear the XML File option and perform the following steps. 5. Click the Label tab. Under Pipeline Label, do the following: a. Select a specification, size, and schedule for the selected pipeline. b. If applicable, select mnemonic and number. Note: A pipeline number uniquely identifies a pipeline and it is needed for the Piping System Tree to organize pipelines (by their number) in a piping system. c. Click the Insulation check box to select or clear the Insulation box. The Insulation box displays the default insulation type that is defined for the selected specification in the Piping Specification Directory file. Specify another value by selecting from the Insulation list. Note: The Insulation list displays all the values that are specified in the Insulation Directory file. 6. Under Pipeline Assembly, click and select an active assembly for the new pipeline to be created with the Create Sub Assembly option from the Model Tree. Pro/PIPING displays the selection in the Select Assembly box. Pro/PIPING selects the top assembly (or last assembly selected) by default. 7. Choose one of the following tasks: o

150

Create a subassembly for the new pipeline. Under Create SubAssembly, select the Name check box and select or type a subassembly name.


Pro/PIPING creates all pipeline features for the new pipeline in this subassembly. o

Clear the Name check box. A new subassembly is not created. Pro/PIPING creates all pipeline features for the new pipeline in the active assembly displayed in the right bottom corner of the graphics window.

8. If applicable, enter pipeline parameter values. Click the Parameters tab. Under Pipeline Parameters, type the pipeline parameter values. By default, Pro/PIPING makes the pipeline parameters unavailable. 9. If applicable, type user-defined pipeline parameters. Click the Defined tab. Under User Defined Parameters, do one of the following: o

Enter a parameter name in the Name box and a corresponding value in the Value box. Note that all parameter names must begin with a letter. Click to add the parameter to the pipeline.

o

. Retrieve existing user-defined pipeline parameters from a file. Click The Open dialog box opens. Select the file to retrieve and double-click.

Pro/PIPING displays the user-defined parameters in the list boxes. 10. Click

to save the user-defined parameters to a file.

11. Click to accept all pipeline data and create the pipeline. The ROUTE PIPE menu appears. Begin routing the pipeline. Note: The pipeline_assembly_name_format and pipeline_label_format configuration options set the pipeline label and assembly name formats respectively.

To Delete a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) 1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Delete. 2. Select the pipeline to delete from the graphics window. The CONFIRMATION menu appears. 3. Click Confirm. The CHILD OPTS menu appears. 4. Select one of the following menu commands: o

Delete All—Deletes all highlighted children. The CONFIRMATION menu appears. Click Confirm.

o

Suspend All—Suspends all highlighted children. The children remain displayed in the graphics window.

o

Child Info—Displays all information about the children to be deleted or suspended in the Information Window.

151


To Rename a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) 1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Rename. 2. Select the pipeline to rename. 3. Enter a new name for the pipeline and click of this task in the Message Area.

. Pro/PIPING confirms the status

Specification-Driven Pipeline Merging About Merging Pipelines In complex piping projects that involve multiple design changes and revisions, large piping systems are initially modeled as a single pipeline without considering the various connected pipelines. At a later stage in the design process, you can split the components of the large pipeline progressively into individual pipelines. This method of pipeline design provides flexibility and improves productivity. You can also separate different portions of a single pipeline into multiple pipelines. This is possible when you create the required pipelines using the Create Pipeline dialog box. You can then use the merge feature to select and merge the required connected portion of the pipeline to the respective pipeline. Note: •

When merging pipelines, Pro/PIPING does not perform automatic propagation of the pipelines.

•

Connected pipelines remain connected even after the merge operation.

To Merge Pipelines 1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Merge. The Merge Pipeline dialog box opens. 2. Under Select From Pipeline, select a pipeline from the graphics window or the Model Tree. 3. Under Select Start Segment/Fitting, select the start pipe segment or fitting. By default, an arrow is displayed along the downstream flow direction of the pipeline at the selected pipe segment or fitting. This indicates that all of the connected portion along the downstream portion of the pipeline is selected if you do not specify any additional end pipes or fittings. 4. Under Select End Segment/Fitting(s), select one or more pipes or fittings to end the selection bounds. to add a pipe or a fitting, or click 5. Click from the end bounds.

to remove a pipe or a fitting

6. Under Select To Pipe Line, select the pipeline on which the components of the From Pipeline are merged.

152


7. Click

to merge the components from the From Pipeline to the To Pipeline

or Click

to repeat the merge pipeline operation by selecting a different pipeline.

Workflow for Creating a New Pipeline by Merging Pipelines The following figure shows how two pipelines have been modeled with the required pipeline specifications and fittings.

The yellow circles in the previous figure represent the following modeling steps performed to achieve the required pipeline configuration: 1. Create the AA-1002-100A pipeline using the Create Pipeline dialog box. The specification AA has components with the rate 10K. 2. Route the entire pipeline from the location 2A to the location 2B as shown in the previous figure. 3. Insert a 10K gate valve with automatic10K flange and gasket. 4. Insert an elbow fitting at the vertex. 5. Insert a 10K globe valve along the vertical segment. 6. Create a new pipeline using the Create Pipeline dialog box. Specify AA as the specification, 1001 as the number, and 100A as the size. 7. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Merge, and select the pipeline that you have created in step 6 as the To Pipeline in the Merge Pipeline dialog box.

153


8. Select the segment that you created in step 1 as the start segment under Select Start Segment/Fitting. Specify the upstream flange of the gate valve as the end segment under Select End Segment/Fittings(s). 9. Click . All the selected components, other than the flange, are merged to the selected To Pipeline as shown in the following figure.

154


Workflow for Merging Pipelines The following figure shows two pipelines that have been modeled with the required pipeline specifications and fittings:

To merge pipelines: 1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Merge. 2. Select the trajectory that starts from the gasket in the Merge Pipeline dialog box. Pro/PIPING highlights the selected components. Pro/PIPING selects all the components of the AA 1002-100A pipeline located downstream to the gasket indicated by the red arrow and associates them with the AA-1001-100A pipeline when you click

.

Selecting End Components When merging pipelines, Pro/PIPING selects the end components based on the following: •

If you do not specify end components when merging pipelines, all the components located in the downstream direction of the specified start pipe segment or fitting are associated with the selected To Pipeline during the merge operation.

•

The start and the first end piping components that you specify are used to check the validity of the subsequent end components.

155


Though you can select a break fitting as a bound when merging pipelines, the merge operation starts from the adjacent fitting or pipe segment within the selected boundary. Therefore, the From Pipeline retains the break fitting in this case.

Pro/PIPING highlights the connected portion of the pipeline with a larger point size. This point size is displayed until the pipeline is merged, or until you select a new start segment or a fitting, or until you end the session.

Considerations for Merging Pipelines •

The configuration of the pipeline that you want to merge does not change during the merge operation, that is, the merged pipes and fittings do not change in size, specification, schedule, and dimensions.

•

You can separate pipes and fittings merged from a pipeline and merge them back only to the original pipeline that contained these pipes and fittings. Pro/PIPING does not allow nested merge operations. All the pipes and fittings in the From Pipeline, including the ones that are not merged from the original pipeline, are merged back to the original pipeline. The bound selection and the To Pipeline selection are not required.

•

If the original pipeline is deleted, suppressed, or the original pipeline assembly is not retrieved in the current session, you cannot separate the pipeline components.

•

You cannot select a suppressed pipeline as a From Pipeline. Therefore, you cannot merge the pipes and fittings of a suppressed pipeline with other pipelines.

•

You cannot select a pipeline as a To Pipeline if: o

The selected pipeline already has pipes and fittings that are merged from another pipeline.

o

Part of the selected pipeline has already been merged to another pipeline.

•

If the To Pipeline already has pipes and fittings merged from one pipeline, you cannot merge pipelines to it from another pipeline.

•

You can merge different parts of a pipeline to one or more pipelines.

•

The insulation assigned to the selected pipes and fittings of the From Pipeline within the selected bounds is merged to the To Pipeline during the merge operation. The insulation assigned to the From Pipeline beyond the selected bounds is not merged to the To Pipeline.

•

Pipe spools and spool labels that contain the selected pipes and fittings of the From Pipeline are deleted from the From Pipeline after the merge operation.

•

The pipeline label attached to the selected pipes of the From Pipeline are deleted after the merge operation.

156


You cannot perform a merge operation if the piping features of the From Pipeline are included in the user-defined group. Ungroup the piping features before you proceed.

Specification Break About Specification Break The specification break functionality changes the specification of a pipeline at a specified location to accommodate the piping design requirements, such as changing material at a location on a pipeline, changing the pressure rating at a location on a pipeline, and so on. For example, you can change the material of a pipeline from stainless steel to carbon steel, or you can change the pressure rating from #150 to #300 at the required location on the pipeline.

To Insert a Specification Break 1. Click Applications > Piping. The PIPING menu opens. 2. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Spec Break. The Specification Break dialog box opens. 3. Under Select Start Segment/Fitting, select a fitting or pipe segment on the pipeline to start the specification break. 4. Under Select End Segment/Fitting(s), select one or more pipe segments or fittings on the same pipeline where you specified the start for the specification break. Pro/PIPING ends the specification break at this selection. The selected end segments or fittings appear in the Select End Segment/Fitting(s) box. Note: o

If you want the new specification that you have selected to be propagated till the end of the pipeline, do not use the Select End Segment/Fitting(s) option.

o

If the pipeline that you selected has one or more branch segments in the downstream direction of the segment or the fitting that you selected to start the specification break, select more than one fitting or pipe segment to stop the specification change along each branch of the pipeline.

5. Under Select Specification, the various specifications for the selected fitting or the pipe segment are displayed. If required, select a different specification name from the list. 6. Click to propagate the selected specification for the pipeline components between the start and end locations that you specified.

157


Example: Inserting a Specification Break In the following example, the downstream flange is selected as the start fitting. The elbow fitting and the check valve on the branch side of the TEE fitting are selected as the end fittings. The specification displayed in Select Specification in the Specification Break dialog box is A7K.

1 A3A 2 Start fitting 3 End fittings The pipeline specification after propagation changes as shown in the following figure:

1 A3A 2 A7K Note: In the previous example, if you do not select the check valve as one of the end fittings, all the fittings and segments in the branch side of the TEE fitting change to the new specification, A7K.

Suppressing Pipelines To Suppress a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) 1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Suppress. 2. Select the pipeline to suppress. The CONFIRMATION menu appears. 158


3. Click Confirm. Pro/PIPING suppresses the selected pipeline and all of its highlighted children.

To Resume a Suppressed Pipeline (Spec-Driven) 1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Resume. The SEL MENU appears and lists all suppressed pipelines by name. 2. Select a suppressed pipeline. Pro/PIPING resumes the pipeline. You can view the resumed pipeline in either the Model Tree, the Piping System Tree, or the graphics window.

Piping Layers About Piping Layers (Spec-Driven) You can use layers in a model or a layout as an organizational tool. By associating items with a layer, you can collectively manipulate them such as to delete, reorder, suppress, or show or blank them selectively. Pro/PIPING creates three piping layers after you create a pipeline. These layers are located in the active pipe assembly and use the naming convention established in the Specification Database during piping setup. Pro/PIPING creates the following three types of layers: •

ROUTE—Contains all routing features in piping assembly

•

FITTING—Contains all fitting components for the subassembly

•

SOLID—Contains all pipe solids for subassembly

To View Piping Layers (Spec-Driven) 1. Create or open a piping assembly. 2. Click Applications > Piping. The PIPING menu appears. 3. If you create a new assembly, you must create a pipeline to view the piping layers. From the PIPING menu, click Pipeline > Create/Route and create a pipeline. Pro/PIPING automatically creates piping layers after pipeline creation. 4. Click

, or click Show > Layer Tree to view the piping layers.

Specification-Driven Pipeline Routing About Specification-Driven Pipeline Routing Specification-driven pipeline routing is available to piping designers who work in large industrial environments. The piping specification database is the architecture that supports the specification-driven functions such as specification-driven routing or specification-driven fitting insertion. This database must be in place before you 159


can use specification-driven pipeline routing or any of the other specification-driven functions. Specification-driven pipeline routing gives you the ability to access and route only those pipelines that have been set up previously in the specification-driven database.

About Setting a Start Point You must set a start point before you can route a pipe segment from one point to another, extend a pipe segment, or branch a segment into a pipeline at a specified point. Use the Define Start dialog box to set a start point. The set start function allows you to perform the following actions: •

Set a start point using an existing point, an entry port, a pipe segment, or a pipe end.

•

Set a start point from the corner of a pipe segment that has a corner of type fitting.

•

Use the set start features of point type or entry port type to route a pipe segment by aligning the edge of the pipe segment to the edge of an existing pipe segment or to an existing plane.

•

Route a pipeline from the free port of a valid pipe fitting, such as a branch fitting or an inline fitting. The size of the pipe segment that is routed on a free port depends on the size of the fitting end that is free. Note: o

When you select fitting ports to route a pipeline, you can select only those free fitting ports that are not mated.

o

The set start point that is created is the projection of the port on the main segment. It is similar to setting a branch start point, but takes parameters from the fitting port automatically. The next route will appear to be from the center of the fitting itself. If the route segment is aligned with the fitting port it becomes a placement constraint for the fitting.

Note: You can route a pipeline from a set start feature only when you create it.

Route Pipe Menu The following commands are available on the ROUTE PIPE menu to route and manipulate line segments: •

Pipe Envrnmt—Sets the default shape and corner type, depending on the pipeline being routed.

•

Set Start—Sets a start point or create a branch start point.

•

Extend—Creates a new pipe segment by extending a pipeline in the specified direction.

160


To Pnt/Port—Creates a pipe piece from the current start point to the selected point, port, or pipe end.

•

Follow—Creates a pipeline by following an axis, curve, existing pipeline, or sketched path.

•

Connect—Connects entry ports or connects individual unconnected segments of the same pipeline or connects both.

•

Branch—Creates a section that taps into a pipeline at the point you have specified.

•

Insert Point—Inserts a point in the previously routed pipe segment.

•

Insert—Inserts a selected pipeline or a portion of it into the active pipeline.

•

Delete Last—Deletes the last routing operation.

•

Redefine—Redefines the references of the routing operation.

•

Suppress—Suppresses the pipe segments.

•

Resume—Resumes the suppressed pipe segment.

•

Modify Dim—Changes the dimensions of any piping features or assembly components.

•

Replace—Replaces selected pipeline segment with a routing operation.

These commands are available in both the Non Specification-Driven and Specification-Driven modes.

To Set a Start Point 1. Click PIPING > Route > Set Start. The Define Start dialog box opens. Select a start point from the following options on the menu and then select a location on the pipe segment: o

Any—Selects any point on the pipe segment.

o

Corner—Selects a valid corner for specifying the branch point. Available corners on the active pipeline are indicated by a crosshair.

o

End—Selects a pipe segment end.

o

Point—Selects a datum point.

o

Port—Selects an entry port for equipment or a free port for a fitting.

o

Segment—Selects a point on the pipe segment. Note: If the pipe segment is not in the active assembly, you can route the branch pipeline from the main pipeline that is not in the active assembly.

Note: Pro/PIPING automatically selects one of the previously specified start points based on any selection that you make on the graphics screen, even if you do not use the previously cited options.

161


2. Under Select Parameters, select the specification, size, and the schedule. Note: When you select the free port of a fitting, Pro/PIPING updates the pipe parameters depending on the fitting. You cannot edit the Specification, Size, and Schedule boxes if you select the free port of a fitting. 3. Click

to define the start part and close the dialog box.

To Route a Pipe in Specification-Driven Mode 1. Set a start point using PIPING > ROUTE PIPE > Set Start. 2. Create segments using either the To Pnt/Port, Extend, or Follow menu commands. You can create individual unconnected pipe segments. 3. Connect individual segments of the same pipeline using ROUTE PIPE > Connect > Define. 4. Create other pipelines to add branches to the main pipeline. Then create branches using ROUTE PIPE > Branch.

To Route a Pipeline by Referencing a Pipe Edge 1. Click PIPING > ROUTE PIPE > Set Start. The Define Start dialog box opens. 2. Select a start point of type Port. 3. Under Select Parameters, the Specification, Size, and the Schedule boxes display the default values. Select another value from the specification, size, and schedule lists, if required. 4. Under Align Pipe Edge, select the pipe edge or the plane that you want to reference. Based on your selection, specify one of the following: o

If you select a plane, under Select Pipe/Plane, click one of the following to specify the offset for the pipe segment that is to be routed with reference to the selected plane:

—Specifies the offset from the selected plane to the nearest edge of the pipe that is to be routed.

—Specifies the offset from the selected plane to the farthest edge of the pipe that is to be routed. o

If you select a pipe segment, click one of the following to specify the offset for the pipe segment that is to be routed, with reference to the selected pipe edge:

—Specifies the offset between the left edge of the existing pipe and the left edge of the pipe that is to be routed.

162


—Specifies the offset between the left edge of the existing pipe and the right edge of the pipe that is to be routed.

—Specifies the offset between the right edge of the existing pipe and the left edge of the pipe that is to be routed.

—Specifies the offset between the right edge of the existing pipe and the right edge of the pipe that is to be routed.

—Specifies the offset between the top edge of the existing pipe and the top edge of the pipe that is to be routed.

—Specifies the offset between the top edge of the existing pipe and the bottom edge of the pipe that is to be routed.

—Specifies the offset between the bottom edge of the existing pipe and the top edge of the pipe that is to be routed.

—Specifies the offset between the bottom edge of the existing pipe and the bottom edge of the pipe that is to be routed. Note: The green circle represents the pipe that is to be routed, while the black circle represents the selected pipe that you are referencing. 5. Under Specify Offset Distance, specify the required offset distance from the selected pipe edge or plane. Click 6. Click

to flip the offset direction, if required.

to route the pipeline along the required pipe edge.

163


Reference Edges for Routing When the reference pipe segment is not along the z-axis of the Global Csys, the left, right, top, and bottom edges are defined as shown in the following figure.

The plane ACBD that passes through the pipe segment AB and parallel to the y-z plane is the base for the left and the right edges of the pipe segment AB. The plane ABEF that passes through the pipe segment AB and perpendicular to the plane ACBD is the base for the top and bottom edges of the pipe segment AB. When the reference pipe segment is not along the z-axis of the Global Csys, the left, right, top, and bottom edges are defined as shown in the following figure.

The plane ABCD that passes through the pipe segment AB and perpendicular to the x-y plane is the base for the left and the right edges of the pipe segment AB. The plane EFGH that passes through the pipe segment AB and perpendicular to the plane ACBD is the base for the top and bottom edges of the pipe segment AB.

164


Associativity Between the Routed Pipeline and the Reference Pipeline The offset that you specify for the Set Start of a new pipe segment that is to be routed, is calculated from a reference pipe segment that has the biggest outer diameter in that pipe run. Note: Pro/PIPING does not consider the insulation diameter for offset calculations. When you change the biggest outer diameter of the reference pipe segment by either using the Modify Pipe dialog box or by inserting a reducer on the reference pipe segment, the actual distance is changed between the reference pipe segment and the new pipe segment created after routing. This maintains the offset that you specified earlier. In the following figure, the pipe segment in black is the reference pipe segment and the pipe segment in green is the new pipe segment created after routing. Before a reducer is inserted on the reference pipe segment, the distance between the reference pipe segment and the new pipe segment created after routing is as shown:

1 Original centerline distance 2 Original offset distance

165


After a reducer is inserted on the reference pipe segment, the distance between the reference pipe segment and the new pipe segment created after routing is updated as shown in the following figure:

1 Changed centerline distance 2 Original offset distance maintained

Routing Flexible Hoses About Routing Flexible Hoses in Specification-Driven Piping You must include a category FLEX_PIPE, in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd file to enable routing of flexible pipes in specification-driven piping.

To Enable Routing of Flexible Hoses in Specification-Driven Piping 1. Specify a new category, FLEX_PIPE, in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd file and save it. 2. Click Set Up > SpecDB. The Define Piping Specification dialog box opens. 3. Create a new auto selection file using the FLEX_PIPE category. 4. Open the piping_spec_dir.ptd file.

166


5. Create a new specification using the newly created auto selection file. If the autoselection file is not available in the Auto Selection box, click the location where the file is stored. 6. Click 7. Click

to browse to

to insert the new specification under Select Record. . The specification is now available while creating a pipeline.

To Use the PIPE ENV Menu The PIPE ENV menu is available for both straight and flexible pipelines. If you create a pipeline is using a specification that has PIPE as the category, you can change only the corner type of that pipeline using the PIPE ENV menu. 1. In the ROUTE PIPE menu, click Pipe Envrnmt. The PIPE ENV menu appears. 2. Click Corner Type to open the CORNER TYPE menu. 3. Under the CORNER TYPE menu, Bend, Fitting, or Miter are available for selection, depending on the size and specification of the pipeline. 4. Select the required corner type and click Done. If you create a pipeline using a specification that has FLEX_PIPE as the category, the Line Shape option is available in the PIPE ENV menu. 1. In the ROUTE PIPE menu, click Pipe Envrnmt. The PIPE ENV menu appears. 2. Click Line Shape to open the LINE SHAPE menu. 3. Do one of the following: o

Click Flexible and Free Length to determine the length of the flexible pipe segment.

o

Click Flexible and Set Length to specify a length for the flexible pipe after creating each segment.

o

Click Straight to route using straight pipelines.

Note: Free Length and Set Length are available only when you select Flexible in the LINE SHAPE menu. 4. Click Done.

Specification-Driven Routing with Extend About Specification-Driven Routing with Extend You can route a new pipe segment by extending the segment in a selected direction. To extend a pipe segment, use one of the following reference coordinate systems: •

Any coordinate system in the active assembly or any other assembly 167


The global coordinate system in the active assembly

•

The routing coordinate system

By default, Pro/PIPING uses the reference coordinate system that was used for the previous extend operation in the active assembly. If an extend operation was not performed earlier in the active assembly, the global coordinate system is used by default.

To Extend a Pipeline Using a Csys Reference 1. Click PIPING > Route > Set Start. The Define Start dialog box opens. 2. Specify the start point for the pipeline extension and close the Define Start dialog box. 3. Click PIPING > Route > Extend. The Extend dialog box opens. 4. Under Select Reference, do the following: o

Under Selection, click to select the reference coordinate system for the pipe segment to be routed. or Select one of the following from the list adjacent to reference coordinate system:

to specify the

Global Csys—Selects the global coordinate system as the reference coordinate system. Route Csys—Selects the routing coordinate system as the reference coordinate system. Other coordinate systems that you have used for the previous extend operations in the same extend session. o

Under Type, select the extend type as Csys to specify that the pipe segment will be extended to the given coordinates of the reference coordinate system.

5. Under To Coordinates, select the following dimension options: o

Select the system as Spherical, Cylindrical, or Cartesian and use the Angle box to specify which of the following formats the angle in the selected system be given: Degrees—Specifies the angle in the degrees format. Gradient Ratio—Specifies the angle in the ratio format. For example, if you want a 1:25 slope, you must specify 25. The end of the pipe segment will drop 1 unit for every 25 units forward.

168


Gradient Percent—Specifies the angle in the percentage format. For example, if you want a 1:25 slope, you must specify 4. The end of the pipe segment will drop 4 percent of its total forward length. Note: The Angle option is not applicable for the Cartesian system. The angle dimension is always displayed in degrees irrespective of the format specified in the Angle box. o

Select one of the following dimension types: Relative—The extension of the end of the segment to be extended is with reference to the start of the segment. Absolute—The extension of the end of the segment to be extended is with reference to the selected reference coordinate system.

o

Under Locking Axes, select the extend directions along the x-, y-, or zaxes, or along all three axes.

o

Under Coordinates, type the coordinate values along the respective axes in the available boxes or use the thumb wheel increments to specify the values. You can also click and drag the pipe segment to the required length. Pro/PIPING displays a preview of the pipe segment that is extended using the drag operation, in the graphics window. Click required coordinate boxes. The display changes to boxes are locked.

to lock the

to indicate that the

Note: The coordinates displayed under Coordinates vary depending on the selection that you make in the System box. If you select the system as Spherical, the coordinates displayed are r, theta, and phi. If you select the system as Cylindrical, the coordinates displayed are r, theta, and z. If you select the system as Cartesian, the coordinates displayed are x, y, and z. 6. Click

to extend the pipe segment to the specified coordinates.

To Extend a Pipeline Using a Csys Axis Reference 1. Click PIPING > Route > Set Start. The Define Start dialog box opens. 2. Specify the start point for the pipeline extension and close the Define Start dialog box. 3. Click PIPING > Route > Extend. The Extend dialog box opens. 4. Under Select Reference, do the following: o

Under Selection, click to select the reference coordinate system for the pipe segment to be routed. or

169


Select one of the following from the list adjacent to reference coordinate system:

to specify the


Under Type, select the extend type as Csys Axis to specify that the pipe segment will be extended along the selected axis of the reference coordinate system.

5. Under Along Csys Axis, do the following: a. Under Select Axis, select one of the reference coordinate system axes as the reference axis. b. Under Options, select one of the following to specify the length of the pipe segment: Length—Extends the pipe segment to the given length along the reference axis. Specify a value for the length in the Value box. Offset Fm Ref—Extends the pipe segment along the reference axis until its end is at a given offset distance from another selected reference plane or coordinate system. Do each of the following: Under Select Plane/Csys, select the reference plane or coordinate system. Specify a value for the offset distance in the Value box or click and drag the pipe segment to the required length. Pro/PIPING displays a preview of the pipe segment that is extended using the drag operation, in the graphics window. If a coordinate system is selected, use the Projection list to specify an axis as the projection axis. If you project the end of the pipe segment to the selected projection axis, the corresponding coordinate value will be equal to the given offset distance. Note: The Projection box is not available if you select a plane under Select Plane/Csys. Note: The options Offset, Offset Edge, Offset Edge Fm Ref, and Stop At are not available if you use the Csys Axis extend type. 6. Click length.

170

to extend the pipe segment along the reference axis with the required


To Extend a Pipeline by Referencing an Edge, Axis, or Segment 1. Click PIPING > Route > Set Start. The Define Start dialog box opens. 2. Specify the start point for the pipeline extension and close the Define Start dialog box. 3. Click PIPING > Route > Extend. The Extend dialog box opens. 4. Under Select Reference, do the following: o


to specify the


Under Type, select the extend type as Axis/Edge/Segment to specify that the pipe segment will be extended parallel to the selected axis, edge, or a pipe segment.

o

Select an axis, edge, or a pipe segment as the reference.

5. Under Parallel to Axis/Edge/Pipe Segment, select one of the following from the Options list: o

Length—Extends the pipe segment to the given length along the reference axis, edge, or pipe segment. Specify a value for the length in the Value box.

o

Offset Fm Ref—Extends the pipe segment along the reference axis, edge, or a pipe segment till the end of the pipe segment is at a given offset distance from another selected reference plane or coordinate system. Do each of the following: Under Select Plane/Csys, select the reference plane or coordinate system. Specify a value for the offset distance in the Value box or click and drag the pipe segment to the required length. Pro/PIPING displays a preview of the pipe segment that is extended using the drag operation, in the graphics window.

171


If a coordinate system is selected, use the Projection list to specify an axis as the projection axis. If you project the end of the pipe segment to the selected projection axis, the corresponding coordinate value will be equal to the given offset distance. Note: The Projection box is not available if you select a plane under Select Plane/Csys. Note: The options Offset, Offset Edge, Offset Edge Fm Ref, and Stop At are not available if you use an axis, edge, or pipe segment as a reference to extend the pipeline. 6. Click to extend the pipe segment along the reference axis, edge, or pipe segment with a required length.

To Extend a Pipeline by Referencing a Plane or a Point 1. Click PIPING > Route > Set Start. The Define Start dialog box opens. 2. Specify the start point for the pipeline extension and close the Define Start dialog box. 3. Click PIPING > Route > Extend to open the Extend dialog box. 4. Under Select Reference, do the following: o


to specify the


Under Type, select the extend type as Plane/Point to specify that the pipe segment will be extended up to the selected plane or a point.

o

Select a plane or a point as the reference.

5. Under Upto Plane/Point, select one of the following from the Options list: o

172

Length—Extends the pipe segment to the given length up to a reference plane or a point. Specify a value for length in the Value box.


Offset—Extends the pipe segment up to the reference plane or point until the end of the pipe segment is at a given offset distance from the reference plane or point. By default, Pro/PIPING displays the distance between the start of the pipe segment and the reference plane or point in the Value box. Change this value if required.

o

Offset Fm Ref—Extends the pipe segment up to the reference plane or point until the end of the pipe segment is at a given offset distance from another selected reference plane or coordinate system. Do each of the following: Under Select Plane/Csys, select the reference plane or coordinate system. Specify a value for the offset distance in the Value box or click and drag the pipe segment to the required length. Pro/PIPING displays a preview of the pipe segment that is extended using the drag operation, in the graphics window. If a coordinate system is selected, use the Projection list to specify an axis as the projection axis. If you project the end of the pipe segment to the selected projection axis, the corresponding coordinate value will be equal to the given offset distance. Note: The Projection box is not available if you select a plane under Select Plane/Csys.

o

Offset Edge—Extends the pipe segment up to the reference plane or point until the end of the pipe segment is at a calculated offset distance from the reference plane or point. Specify a value for the offset distance in the Value box. Note: Calculated offset distance = offset distance (+) or (-) 1/2 pipe outer diameter, depending on the offset direction.

o

Offset Edge Fm Ref—Extends the pipe segment up to the reference plane or point until the end of the pipe segment is at a calculated offset distance from another selected reference plane or pipe edge.

o

Stop At—Extends the pipe segment up to the reference plane or point.

6. Click to extend the pipe segment up to the reference plane or point with the required length.

173


Routing with Equipment Nozzles About Equipment Nozzles A nozzle is either a Pro/ENGINEER part or assembly that has a coordinate system representing a connection port. The following feature level parameters must be present in the port: •

SIZE—A string parameter that stores the nozzle size, which is used to set up the default pipe size when a pipe routing starts from the port. It is also used for the size match checking between a nozzle and its connected pipeline. Nozzle sizes specified here must match those in the specification database.

•

END_TYPE—A string parameter that stores the nozzle end type, which is used to automate the fitting selection. It is also used for end compatibility checking between a nozzle and its connected pipeline.

•

RATING—A string parameter used to store the nozzle rating, which is used to automate the fitting selection. It is also used for end compatibility checking between a nozzle and its connected pipeline.

To Route a Pipeline from an Equipment Nozzle 1. Use the Pro/ENGINEER Assembly mode to assemble a nozzle into an assembly. 2. Click Applications > Standard > Edit > Setup > Name > Feature to assign a name to the port of the nozzle, which will be used as the name of the nozzle. 3. Click Applications > Piping > PIPING > Info. The Report Pipeline dialog box opens. 4. If a pipeline starts or ends at a nozzle, the nozzle name appears as the From or To for the pipeline in the pipeline report. Generate this information, using the Report Pipeline dialog box. This name appears in the Information Window. If the assembly where the nozzle is assembled has a name and a FITTING_CODE parameter with the value of EQUIPMENT assigned to it, then its name is used as the equipment name. Output for the From or To is "Equipment_Name – Nozzle_Name". For example, E7A-N2 means Heater Exchange E7A and Nozzle N2. Note: You have to assign a FITTING_CODE parameter with the value of EQUIPMENT to an equipment part in order to designate the part as an equipment.

To Route from a Port 1. Click Route > Set Start and select an entry port if it has the Size parameter. The Define Start dialog box updates to the nozzle port size. 2. If you continue to route, the routing is based on the port size. 3. You can change the port size in the Define Start dialog box and continue to route. 174


To Route to a Port 1. Click the Route > To/Pnt Port command or the Route > Connect command. 2. Select a valid entry port in the piping assembly. The current pipe size may be different from the selected port size. If so, a warning message appears with a size mismatch message. 3. Using a reducer, you can change the size of the pipe or the port so that they match. An error message can appear when you modify the pipeline, and the port and pipe become mismatched.

Checking Pipe and Port Sizes The modified size of a pipe and the existing port size are checked against each other in the Modify Pipeline dialog box. If the modified pipe size does not match with its connected port size, warning messages appear.

Specification-Driven Routing with Follow About Specification Driven Routing with Follow You can create a pipeline that mirrors or follows an existing pipeline using the Route with Follow functionality. You can follow a pipeline within the same assembly or in other subassemblies. You can add to the path of an existing pipeline or create a line segment coincident with an axis. You can also sketch geometry for the pipeline to follow or select a chain of curves.

To Route a Pipeline with Follow 1. Click PIPING > Route > Follow. The PIPE FOLLOW menu appears. 2. You can route a pipe follow using anyone of the following methods. Select the routing option and then click Done. o

Sketch—Create a segment based on sketched geometry. The SETUP SK PLN and SETUP PLANE menus appear. Set up and specify a new sketching plane. A sketching window opens. When you have completed your sketch, exit the sketcher.

o

Curve—Create a segment based on a curve. The CHAIN menu appears. Select individual curves.

o

Pipe Line—Create a line segment based on an existing pipeline. The START/END menu appears, specify start end segments or select the entire line. When the CONSTRAINT menu appears, specify a distance (click DistInPlane), specify a start point (click Start Point and select a datum point or pipe end) or specify a datum point for the new pipe to go through (click Thru Point).

175


Axis—Create a line segment coincident with an axis.

3. When the INT FOLLOW menu appears, select Done Follow to create the pipe follow.

To Redefine Pipe Follow References 1. Click PIPING > Route > Redefine. 2. Select the follow segment you want to redefine. The INT FOLLOW menu appears. 3. Click Change. The CHG FOLLOW menu appears. 4. Select the change follow condition you want to change: o

Pipe Line—To redefine the seed pipeline of the pipe follow feature (this option appears if the original pipe follow feature is created by following a pipeline).

o

Sketch—To redefine the sketch of the pipe follow feature (this option appears if the follow feature is created by following a sketch).

o

Curve—To reselect the curve selected for the pipe follow feature (this option appears if the follow feature is created by following a curve).

o

Axis—To reselect the axis selected for the pipe follow feature (this option appears if the follow feature is created by following an axis).

o

Ends—To trim and extend the end of the current pipe follow segment.

o

Start/End—To change the start and end segments of the current pipe follow segment.

o

Constraint—To change the offset constraint type of the current pipe follow segment.

5. Make the changes to the pipe follow.

Branch Routing About Branch Routing Intersubassembly branch routing allows you to select a pipeline from another subassembly to branch to or from the active piping assembly.

To Set a Branch Start Point 1. Click PIPING > Route > Set Start. The Define Start dialog box opens. 2. Under Type, select Segment or Corner and then select a location on the pipe segment. 3. Under Select Parameters, select the specification, size, and the schedule.

176


Note: You cannot edit the Specification, Size, and the Schedule boxes if you select the Type as Corner. 4. Under Select Placement, select one of the following placement location types:

o

—Specifies the actual length along the pipe centerline.

o

—Specifies the length ratio along the pipe centerline. Note: For both of the above location types, by default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference location from the start end of the pipe segment. Click

under Location Parameter to flip the location with reference to

the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes change in the reference location.

to

to indicate a

o

—Specifies the distance from the upstream corner to the point.

o

—Specifies the distance from a plane to the point.

o

—Specifies the distance from an upstream fitting to the point. Use under Location Parameter to flip the reference port. Pro/PIPING changes

to

to indicate a change in the reference port.

Note: You can select another fitting on the same pipe run for reference, if required. You cannot flip the placement location of an elbow fitting. 5. Under Location Parameter, specify a location parameter. Use the thumb wheel to increase or decrease the offset distance or specify a value in the box adjacent to the thumb wheel to change the offset distance. 6. Click the arrow to open the Offset From section of the dialog box. Note: You cannot edit the Offset From section if the branch pipe size is equal to the main pipe size. Select from the following offset options:

o

—Offsets from the centerline of the main pipe to the centerline of the branch pipe.

177


o

o 7. Click

—Offsets from the top or bottom of the main pipe to the top or bottom of the branch pipe. —Flips the direction of the offset. to set the branch start point.

To Route a Branch to a Pipeline 1. Click PIPING > Route > Branch. The Branch Pipe dialog box opens. 2. Under Select Branch Location, select a point, a pipe segment, or a corner for specifying the branch point. 3. If you specify the branch point on a segment or at a corner, under Select Placement, select one of the following placement location types to place the branch point:

o

—Specifies the actual length along the pipe centerline.

o

—Specifies the length ratio along the pipe centerline. Note: For both the above location types, by default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference location from the start end of the pipe segment. Click under Location Parameter to flip the location with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes in the reference location.

to

to indicate the change

o

—Specifies the distance from the upstream corner to the point.

o

—Specifies the distance from a plane to the point.

o

—Specifies the distance from an upstream fitting to the point. Use under Location Parameter to flip the reference port. Pro/PIPING changes

to

to indicate a change in the reference port.

Note: You can select another fitting on the same pipe run for reference, if required. You cannot flip the placement location of an elbow fitting.

178


4. Under Location Parameter, specify a location parameter. Use the thumb wheel to increase or decrease the offset distance, or specify a value in the box adjacent to the thumb wheel to change the offset distance. 5. If you are inserting an angle branch, select Control placement using angle and use the slider or type a value to adjust the angles. If you select this option, you can modify only the angle. You can control the angle to use by clicking Angle Type at the top of the Branch Pipe dialog box and selecting one of the options: o

Angle To—The angle where the branching ends.

o

Angle From—The angle where the branching starts.

6. Click the arrow to open the Offset From section of the dialog box. Note: You cannot edit the Offset From section if the branch pipe size is equal to the main pipe size. Select from the following offset options:

o

—Offsets from the centerline of the main pipe to the centerline of the branch pipe.

o

—Offsets from the top or bottom of the main pipe to the top or bottom of the branch pipe.

o 7. Click

—Flips the direction of the offset. to complete the branch and close the dialog box.

About Stub-in Branches A stub-in branch is distinguished from a branch fitting because the stub-in branch does not contain any solid fitting part. The pipe solid parts of a stub-in branch intersect and are trimmed. The stub-in branch is either equal to or smaller in diameter than the main pipe, and can be created at an angle to the main pipeline, or offset from the top or bottom of the main pipe solid part.

Considerations for Creating a Point on a Pipe Segment From Either End If you insert a point on an extended segment and there is a bend at the end of the segment, the point dimension is created with reference to the vertex. This is true even though you have specified the location with reference to the end of the pipe segment in the dialog box. Therefore, when you modify the dimension of the point, the displayed value is the sum of the distance from the point to the segment and the distance from the segment end to the vertex.

179


Points on a Segment About Adding Points to Existing Routing Use the Insert Point command in the ROUTE PIPE menu to add new points to an existing pipe segment and change the shape of the pipe segment by moving these points to new positions. Note: You cannot use the Insert Point command on a pipe segment that is created using the Follow or the Connect commands.

To Add Dynamic Points to Existing Routing 1. Click ROUTE PIPE > Insert Point. 2. Select a pipe segment with a bend to insert the points. The ends of the pipe segment are highlighted. 3. Click Create and Dynamic in the CHOOSE POINT menu and click Done. An additional point is highlighted between the ends of the pipe segment. 4. Select a point or a section on the pipe segment to move. Two points are highlighted based on your selection. 5. Click No or Yes in the message area depending on whether you want to create a single break point or two break points. 6. Define the motion plane using the SETUP PLANE menu. 7. Use the sliders in the MOVE DRAG SEGMENT thermo tool to move the break point as well as the selected section of the pipe segment. You can move the selected section of the pipe segment normal to the plane as well as normal to the pipe segment. The new shape of the pipeline is displayed dynamically according to the slider movement. Use the sensitivity slider to control the step value of the slider movement. Note: Set the sensitivity slider value to 100 before you use the other sliders to move the point or the pipe segment. A section of the pipe segment is marked between the highlighted points as discussed in step 4. After setting the slider values, left-click in the area above the first slider in the MOVE DRAG SEGMENT thermo tool to display the new shape of the pipeline or right-click to reset the MOVE DRAG SEGMENT thermo tool. 8. Use the Offset Surf or the Offset Csys commands in the OFFSET PNT menu to define the dimensioning references of the datum point. The original pipe segment is now replaced with new datum points and Pipe to Point features.

180


To Add Static Points to Existing Routing 1. Click ROUTE PIPE > Insert Point. 2. Select a straight pipeline segment to modify. 3. To modify a free-length flexible pipe, go to Step 6. A theoretical bend intersection point appears on the screen as 'x.' 4. Click Select in the CHOOSE POINT menu to select an existing datum point. The pipe segment is reshaped to pass through the selected datum point. or Click Create and Static in the CHOOSE POINT menu and click Done. The DATUM POINT dialog box opens. Create a datum point. Note: To create a datum point using any other datum point creation tool, do the following: a. Open a datum point creation dialog box by clicking a datum point creation tool. For example, open the Offset CSys Datum Point dialog box without closing the DATUM POINT dialog box that you have opened earlier. b. Create a datum point using the Offset CSys Datum Point dialog box. c. Select the newly created datum point so that it appears as a reference in the DATUM POINT dialog box and click Ok. 5. Use the Offset Surf or the Offset Csys commands in the OFFSET PNT menu to define the dimensioning references of the datum point. The selected pipe segment is replaced with new points and Pipe to Point features. 6. Select a free-length flexible pipeline. You can add, delete, and move interpolation points as needed or move the control polygon points using the Modify Curve dialog box.

Specification-Driven Pipeline Insertion and Modification About Inserting and Modifying a Pipeline in Another Pipeline Pro/PIPING allows you to insert a pipeline or a part of the pipeline into another pipeline. This is useful to piping designers who work in large industrial environments and frequently use certain pipeline configurations. These pipeline configurations can be inserted into other pipelines and modified according to the requirement of designers to achieve productivity gains in modeling. The Insert Pipeline dialog box allows you to insert a selected pipeline, referred to as the From Pipeline, into the active pipeline, referred to as the To Pipeline. Use the Pipeline Insertion function to perform the following tasks: •

Copy a selected pipeline or a part of it and insert it on the To pipeline at the Set Start location.

181


Specify the first segment of the From Pipeline that is inserted into the To Pipeline.

•

Specify the orientation of the first segment of the From Pipeline in the To Pipeline assembly.

•

Specify the rotation angle about the first segment to orient the inserted From Pipeline.

•

Propagate the inserted From Pipeline based on the size and the specification information defined at the Set Start location on the To Pipeline.

To Insert and Modify a Pipeline in Another Pipeline 1. Click PIPING > Route > Set Start. The Define Start dialog box opens. 2. Select a starting location for the pipeline insertion referred to as the Set Start location and close the Set Start dialog box. 3. Click PIPING > Route > Insert. The Insert Pipeline dialog box opens. The Selection tab is selected by default. 4. Under Select Pipeline, to select the From Pipeline, do one of the following: o

Select a pipeline or any component of the pipeline from the current Pro/PIPING session.

o

and select a pipeline assembly using the Open dialog box. Click Pro/PIPING displays the selected pipeline assembly in a separate preview window. Click

to preview the selected From Pipeline in the preview window.

5. Under Select Start Segment/Fitting, select the pipe segment or fitting to start the selection bound. By default, an arrow is displayed along the downstream flow direction of the pipeline at the selected pipe segment or fitting. This indicates that the entire connected portion along the downstream portion of the pipeline is selected if you do not specify any additional end pipes or fittings. 6. Under Select End Segment/Fitting(s), select one or more pipes or fittings to to add a pipe or a fitting or click end the selection bounds. Click remove a pipe or a fitting from the end bounds. 7. Under Select First Segment, click segments and select one of them.

or

to

to view the list of first

Note: If you have not activated the preview window, Pro/PIPING automatically activates the preview window so that you can select the bound segments or the fittings. 8. Specify the orientation values for the inserted From Pipeline, if required, using the options that are available when you click the Orientation tab. Note: The Orientation tab is available only after you select the From Pipeline. 182


9. If required, under Rotation, specify the rotation angle of the selected first segment in the Angle box, or use the thumb wheel to specify the orientation. Specify any value between 0 and 360 degrees. Pro/PIPING temporarily displays the trajectory of the inserted From Pipeline in the graphics window. 10. Click


Selecting Pipeline Bounds You can select an entire From Pipeline or a part of the pipeline for insertion into the To Pipeline by selecting one or more bounding segments or fittings. The pipeline bounds are selected as follows: •

If you select only the start segment or fitting and do not specify end segments or fittings, Pro/PIPING selects the entire pipeline starting from the start component to its downstream as the pipeline for insertion. For example, in the following figure, segment S2 is the only bound that is selected.

Pro/PIPING selects and highlights the From Pipeline based on the preceding selection, as shown in the following figure:

•

If you select more than one segment or fitting, Pro/PIPING selects the portion of the pipeline between the selected components as the pipeline for insertion.

183


For example, in the following figure, the fitting F1 and the segment S4 have been selected as the bounds.

Pro/PIPING selects and highlights the From Pipeline based on the preceding selection, as shown in the following figure:

•

If you select pipeline configurations with branch series, the part of the pipeline between the selected bounds including the bounds is selected as the pipeline for insertion. For example, in the following figure, multiple pipeline bounds are selected along a branched pipeline.

184


Pro/PIPING selects and highlights the From Pipeline as shown in the following figure:

•

If you select a TEE fitting as a pipeline bound, the entire branch side part of the pipeline is selected as a pipeline bound. You can specify pipeline bounds on the branch side and specify another location along the branch side to restrict the bound. If you want to select pipeline components upstream or downstream of the TEE fitting, specify additional pipeline bounds along the required direction.

Selecting the First Segment You can insert and orient the From Pipeline using any of the pipe segments located on it. The first segment is used to orient the inserted From Pipeline. The first segment is selected based on the following: •

If the pipeline has three end segments, Pro/PIPING selects the segment that was created first in the From Pipeline as the first segment.

•

If an inline fitting is selected as one of the From Pipeline bounds, Pro/PIPING selects the pipe segment on which the inline fitting is inserted as the first segment.

•

If a TEE fitting is selected as the start component, Pro/PIPING automatically selects the branch segment of the TEE fitting as the first segment.

•

If the first segment of the From Pipeline is a stubin branch with an offset from its original main pipe, do one of the following to obtain the required offset for the branch, on the To Pipeline: o

Set the branch offset appropriately when you create the branch Set Start in the To Pipeline.

o

After the From Pipeline is inserted, redefine the branch Set Start.

Propagating the Inserted From Pipeline in the To Pipeline Assembly Pro/PIPING updates the From Pipeline inserted into the To Pipeline, based on the size and specification information that is defined at the Set Start location. During propagation, if a fitting cannot be found with the required size and specification, Pro/PIPING prompts you to either terminate the pipeline insertion or insert the pipeline without that fitting.

185


Note: •

The From Pipeline becomes a part of the To Pipeline after it is inserted into the To Pipeline.

•

When you insert a From Pipeline into the To Pipeline, the trajectory of the From Pipeline is copied into the To Pipeline assembly without any external references.

•

You can use any of the Pro/PIPING functionality to modify pipelines that are inserted into the To Pipeline.

•

A stub-in with a center or tangent offset is not inserted with an offset value. The offset value gets deleted after insertion.

Specification-Driven Piping Flow Direction About Specification-Driven Piping Flow Direction A pipeline has specific flow direction requirements based on the process flow requirements of the fluid inside the pipeline, such as gas, water, or fuel. The flow direction is usually specified in the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID). If a P&ID link does not exist, a reasonable default flow direction assignment can occur based on the modeling intent and predefined flow direction rules. Pro/PIPING automatically assigns a default flow direction to each pipeline you create during modeling. A set of Flow Direction Rules determine the direction of flow. You can enable or disable the display of flow direction during the modeling of the pipeline in the active assembly. Using Piping Flow Direction, you can perform the following tasks: •

Display the currently assigned flow direction of the following: o

A specified pipeline series

o

All series in a pipeline

o

Specified extensions

•

Reverse the assigned flow direction of a specified pipeline series and automatically reverse the direction-specific fittings on the series. A directionspecific fitting is identified by the FLOW_CONSTRAINED part parameter.

•

Reverse the assigned flow direction of all series in the specified pipelines and automatically reverse the appropriate direction-specific fittings.

•

Reverse the assigned flow direction of specified pipeline extensions and automatically reverse the direction-specific fittings on the series.

•

Decide the NEAR and FAR placement locations during fitting insertion.

•

Place flow-direction specific fittings during fitting insertion.

•

Automatically replace fittings during automatic propagation.

•

Generate from-to- reports during pipeline reporting.

186


To Create the Pipeline Model for a Pipeline with Branch Series 1. Create three pipe segments from the coordinate system ACSO in the Positive Z, Positive Y, and Negative X directions The default flow direction is determined by Flow Direction Rule 1. 2. Create a pipe segment from point APNT2 in the Negative Y direction. 3. Create a branch segment in the Negative Z direction from point APNT1. This segment has a physical gap between itself and the segment created in Step 2. See Step 4 for resolution. The default flow direction for the downstream series that was created during branching at point APNT1, is determined by Flow Direction Rule 2. 4. Connect the segments created in Step 2 and 3 in the direction shown in the example. The default flow direction for the branch series is determined by Flow Direction Rule 3.

Default Flow Direction Determination Rules When you create a pipeline in any sequence, the flow direction function assigns default flow directions automatically based on the following rules: •

Rule 1—The flow direction of a pipeline series is automatically determined by the direction of the first pipe segment in the series. Note: You can create a pipeline series by concatenating several independent segments that were created with the Extend, Follow, and Connect commands. Each of these commands can have opposing flow directions. When you connect the segments to form a pipeline series, the flow direction of the series is assigned based on the direction of the pipe segment that was created first. If you create the first segment in the correct flow direction, this ensures the correct flow direction for the entire series. Otherwise, you must reverse the resulting series.

•

Rule 2—The flow direction of a new series, which is split and created as a result of inserting a branch fitting or stub-in, is the same as the original series from which it is created.

•

Rule 3—The flow direction of a branch series is the same as the flow direction of the pipe segment in the branch line that was created first.

187


Example: Default Flow Direction for Pipeline with Branch Series

1 Numbered yellow boxes—Sequence in which pipe segments are created 2 Small arrows—Geometric direction of Extend features 3 Large arrows—Default flow direction 4 Green lines—Pipelines 188


To Create the Pipeline Model for a Pipeline with Loop Series 1. Create three pipe segments from the coordinate system ACSO in the directions, Positive Z, Positive Y, and Negative X. The default flow direction for the series is determined by Flow Direction Rule 1. 2. Create a branch segment in the Negative Z direction from point APNT1. This segment ends within point APNT2 along the Negative Z direction. The default flow direction for the downstream series created during branching at point APNT1 is determined by Flow Direction Rule 2. 3. Create a pipe segment from point APNT2 in the Positive Y direction. 4. Connect the segments created in steps 2 and 3 as shown in the example. The default flow direction for the branch series is determined by Flow Direction Rule 3.

Example: Default Flow Direction for Pipeline with Loop Series

189


To Display the Flow Direction of a Pipeline 1. Click PIPING > Modify Pipe. The Modify Pipeline dialog box opens. 2. Under Active Assembly select the active assembly. 3. Under Modify Options, click Flow Direction. 4. Under Flow Direction, select the flow unit you want to modify by selecting from the list. The options are: o

PipeLine

o

Extension

o

Series

Select the unit. In the graphics window the flow direction is indicated by arrows along the pipeline. 5. Under Flow Reversal, click 6. Click

to reverse the flow direction.

to close the dialog box.

Displaying or Hiding the Flow Direction of a Pipeline •

Click to switch between displaying and hiding the flow direction of the pipelines in the active assembly.

•

Click to display the Piping System Tree. Select a pipe segment in the graphics window or a node from the Piping System Tree and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. Click Flow > Show to display the flow direction of the selected pipe series or pipeline.

•

Use the Model Tree to display the flow direction of a pipeline.

Note: For piping assemblies from earlier releases of Pro/ENGINEER, appears only if you have converted the piping assembly to the Wildfire format using the piping_wildfire_convert configuration option.

190


Example: Displaying the Flow Direction of a Specified Pipeline Series

Flow Direction Violations You can view the flow direction violations in the Design Rules Check dialog box. The location of flow violation is marked on the screen with a dot. The system prompts you to confirm the violation. You can confirm the violation or override the warning. Any unresolved flow direction inconsistencies are captured by the reporting process within pipeline routing, fitting insertion, and pipeline reporting. You can encounter the following flow violations: •

Converging flow at a junction.

•

Diverging flow at a junction.

•

Converging pipelines (two different pipelines that share a physical connection point but are opposed in direction.)

•

Diverging pipelines (two different pipelines that share a physical connection point but are opposed in direction).

•

Pipelines with dead loops (loops that feed back into the pipeline and have no outlet).

191


Suppressing and Resuming Pipe Segments About Suppressing and Resuming Pipe Segments When you route pipelines, you can suppress or resume one or more pipe segments to modify the pipeline trajectory. Note: •

The pipe segments that you want to suppress must belong to the same pipeline that you are currently routing.

•

When you suppress pipe segments you can also suppress the associated pipe solids and insulation.

•

Fittings of type break, cut, or elbow, that are placed on the ends of a suppressed pipe segment are automatically changed to type "on end".

•

All the suppressed components are resumed during the resume operation.

•

You cannot resume a suppressed pipe segment if its end is used by a new segment due to routing.

•

You cannot suppress pipe segments that have insulation, branch points, pipeline labels, or spools.

To Suppress and Resume Pipe Segments 1. Click PIPING > Route > Suppress. 2. Select the pipe segment to suppress. Pro/PIPING suppresses the selected pipe segments and all the highlighted children. 3. Click PIPING > Route > Resume. 4. Select the suppressed pipe segments that you want to resume. Pro/PIPING resumes all the suppressed segments and their associated components. If the selected pipe segment cannot be resumed, it is highlighted.

192


Example: Suppressing and Resuming Pipe Segments The original pipeline trajectory is shown in the next figure.

1. If you suppress segments #1 and #3, Pro/PIPING suppresses the associated flanges and gaskets that are mated, as shown next.

2. If you click Resume, all the segments that were previously suppressed are highlighted.

193


3. If you select segment #3, Pro/PIPING resumes segment #3, the flange, and the gasket.

4. Pro/PIPING uses the free segment end for the new routing.

5. If you click Resume again, segment #1 is not resumed, because its end is occupied by an elbow of type "on end."

194


Specification-Driven Fitting Insertion About Specification-Driven Fitting Insertion The specification-driven fitting insertion feature allows you to insert standard assembly fittings into a pipeline. Use the fitting insertion feature to: •

Define and insert standard assembly fittings into a pipeline. A standard assembly fitting is a group of fittings that represent a standard vent or drain assembly. You do not need to create a large number of assemblies and their configurations in the fitting library before insertion.

•

Modify the orientation of a member fitting without changing other instances of the same assembly fitting.

•

Insert a fitting of a specification other than the pipe specification at the insertion location. For example, you can insert a B3A Gate Valve on a A3A pipeline.

About Specification Override during Fitting Insertion During fitting insertion, Pro/PIPING allows you to insert a fitting of a specification that is different from the selected pipe specification. This overrides the specification of the selected fitting. You can also override specifications when you insert group fittings. In this case, use the specification override feature individually for each fitting in the group. The specifications of the fitting that you insert by overriding specification are not affected by pipeline propagation during pipeline modification, reducer fitting insertion, or specification break. Pro/PIPING uses the SPECIFICATION string parameter to store the specification of a fitting. The specification of the fitting with the overridden specification remains unchanged when the pipeline or pipe segment specification changes during pipeline propagation. Note: The specification of a fitting is the same as specification of the pipe segment on which you have inserted it as long as you do not override the fitting specification.

To Insert Fittings 1. Click PIPING > Fitting > Insert. The Insert Fitting dialog box opens with the Selection tab selected. 2. Under Placement Type, do one of the following: o

Click Pipe Segment to select a pipe segment on which you want to insert the fitting. Under Pipeline Selection, select the pipe segment either from the active assembly or from another assembly that is not active. The selected assembly name appears in the Insertion Location box.

195


The Specification, Size, and Schedule boxes display values of the selected pipe segment. To override the current specification, click the Specification check box and select a different specification from the list. Pro/PIPING selects the fitting again based on the specification that you have selected. Note: The Specification check box is not selected by default. o

Click Free Location to insert fittings without referencing a pipe segment. You can then place the fitting anywhere in the piping model using the Component Placement dialog box. Under Assembly Selection, select an assembly. You can modify the specification, size, or schedule of the pipeline, if required.

Note: To insert a fitting without the schematic information, skip step 3. 3. If you have set the piping_schematic_driven configuration option to yes, the Schematic Driven option is available under Pipeline Selection. The XML file associated with selected pipeline is also displayed. To insert a fitting using the Schematic Driven option, perform the following step: Select an active Fitting Category icon and then select a value in the Selection Name list. The Designator box displays the refdes value of the selected fitting. You cannot edit this value. The Specification, Valve Number, New Size, and Branch Size boxes are automatically updated based on the schematic information of the selected fitting. Note: To insert a fitting in the nonschematic mode, clear the XML File check box and proceed to step 4. 4. Under Fitting Selection, select a fitting category. The options are: —Inserts a valve. —Inserts a flange. —Inserts an elbow fitting. —Inserts a branch fitting (includes special olet fittings). —Inserts a reducer fitting. —Inserts a general fitting or gasket. —Inserts an assembly fitting.

196


Note: All user-defined fitting categories also appear under Fitting Selection. 5. The Selection Name section displays a default fitting selection name. Select a different name from the list, if required. 6. The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to the fitting to be inserted based on the Auto-Selection file. Select a different bolt nut code from the list, if required. 7. Specify a string that contains one or more characters or numbers, or a combination of both, in the Valve Number box to assign a valve number to the selected fitting. Note: You can also use the Piping System Tree or Model Tree to assign a valve number to a selected fitting. To do so, specify the VALVENUMBER string parameter as one of the Feat Params columns to be displayed in the Model Tree Columns dialog box. 8. Select Automatic Flange & Gasket to automatically insert flanges and gaskets. For some fittings with flanged end types, you can automatically insert a set of flanges and gaskets. 9. To preview the fittings, click the arrow adjacent to Preview Fitting Graphics to display the graphics window. A single fitting or the first fitting in the assembly fitting appears in the Preview Fitting Graphics box. To preview the graphics in a separate window, select the relevant check box. 10. Select the Placement/Orientation tab. 11. Under Placement Options, select one of the following: Fitting Placement

—Inserts a fitting at a specified location.

—Inserts a fitting face to face with another fitting.

—Inserts a fitting at the end of a segment.

—Inserts a fitting at a junction (available when you insert a branch fitting).

—Inserts a fitting at a corner run to a branch (available when you insert a branch fitting).

—Inserts a fitting at a corner branch to a run (available when you insert a branch fitting).

197


Location Type (Location Type buttons are available when you click under Fitting Placement.)

—Locates the fitting at a specified location. Note: By default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference location from the start end of the pipe segment. Click

under Location Parameter to flip the location

with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes to indicate the change in the reference location.

to

—Locates the fitting at a specified distance ratio. Note: By default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference location from the start end of the pipe segment. Click

under Location Parameter to flip the location

with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes to indicate the change in the reference location.

to

—Offsets the fitting from an upstream corner.

—Offsets the fitting from a plane.

—Offsets the fitting from a fitting. Click flip the reference port. Pro/PIPING changes the reference port.

under Location Parameter to to

to indicate the change in

Note: You cannot flip the placement location of an elbow fitting. Location Parameter Specify a location parameter and use the thumb wheel to increase or decrease the offset. 12. Under Orientation Options, select the following: Alignment Point The alignment point positions the fitting on the fitting port that is near, far, or at the center.

—Near point.

—Center point.

198


—Far point. Flip

—Flips the fitting Alignment Offset Check this box to offset the near or far alignment of the fitting by the value set by the OFFSET parameter. The system applies the offset value in the positive Z direction of the entry port fitting. Rotation Angle Select from the standard options or use the thumb wheel to adjust the rotation angle. 13. Click

to insert the fitting and close the dialog box.

Note: You can also insert a missing fitting node using the standard Model Tree options.

Example: Overriding Specifications during Fitting Insertion A pipe segment with a specification A3A is shown in the following figure. If you do not override the specification, you can only insert a fitting of specification A3A.

1 A3A 2 B3A 3 A3A

199


If you click the Specification check box in the Insert Fitting dialog box, you can insert a fitting of a specification, B3A. The specifications of the upstream and the downstream pipes and fittings do not change when you insert the fitting of specification B3A as shown in the following figure.

1 A3A 2 B3A 3 A3A

About Branch Fittings A branch fitting is a fitting solid part that you insert at a branch point. It has three (tee) or four (cross) legs. The corresponding pipe solid parts trim to the location of the csys (coordinate system) ports on each leg of the branch fitting. The piping specification designates these branch fittings, and they are available for automatic selection and insertion according to the specification-driven fitting insertion rules.

Inserting Trimmed Elbows About Inserting Trimmed Elbows You can insert trimmed elbows after converting elbows to the required trimmed elbows. Using the Specification-driven Piping Fitting Insertion functionality, you can: •

Specify a selection name during fitting insertion and insert a trimmed elbow at the specified vertex location.

•

Insert a trimmed elbow based on the automatically determined selection name of the nearest standard elbow fitting (for example, an elbow fitting with an angle closest to the vertex angle).

•

Insert trimmed elbows at all vertices of a pipeline by automatically determining the appropriate elbow fitting selection names based on the vertex angle of the various vertices.

To Convert Elbows to Trimmed Elbows You must convert elbows to trimmed elbows before you can insert trimmed elbows. 1. Copy the original elbow part to _TRIM.PRT. 2. Change the angle dimension symbol from ANGLE to TRIMMED_ANGLE. 200


3. For each instance in the generic, that is, for each size, create instances of different angles. For example, you can create instances using an incremental value of 1. Note: Nested instances must not be used. 4. Ensure that the ports align properly with the inlet and outlet of the elbow in the trimmed instances so that the fittings can be inserted.

To Insert a Trimmed Elbow by Specifying a Selection Name 1. Convert elbows to trimmed elbows. 2. Click PIPING > Fitting > Insert. The Insert Fitting dialog box opens. Under Placement Type, Pipe Segment is selected by default. 3. Under Pipeline Selection, select a pipe segment. The selection location must be close to the vertex where you want to insert the elbow. The pipeline label of the selected pipe segment appears as read-only in the box adjacent to

.

4. Under Select Fitting Category, select a fitting category where the elbows are defined. 5. Click

to select the Elbow category if you have used the sample project files.

6. Select the Trim option. 7. Select a selection name from the Selection Name list. 8. Click

to insert the trimmed elbow and close the dialog box.

or Click open.

to insert the trimmed elbow and keep the Insert Fitting dialog box

To Insert a Trimmed Elbow by Selecting the Nearest Standard Elbow 1. Convert elbows to trimmed elbows. 2. Click PIPING > Fitting > Insert. The Insert Fitting dialog box opens. 3. Under Placement Type, Pipe Segment is selected by default. 4. Under Pipeline Selection, select a pipe segment. The selection location must be close to the vertex where you want to insert the elbow. The pipeline label of the selected pipe segment appears as read-only in the box adjacent to

.


to select the Elbow category, if you have used the sample project files. 201


7. Click Trim and Nearest Std. Elbow. The Selection Name list becomes inaccessible and the required elbow for trimming is determined automatically, based on the vertex angle. 8. Click


or Click open.


To Insert Elbows at all Corners with Trim To automatically insert trimmed elbows at all vertices of a specified pipeline without specifying a fitting selection name use the following procedure: 1. Convert elbows to trimmed elbows. 2. Click PIPING > Fitting > Insert. The Insert Fitting dialog box opens. 3. Under Placement Type, Pipe Segment is selected by default. 4. Under Pipeline Selection, select a pipeline by selecting one of its segments. The label of the selected pipeline appears as read-only in the box adjacent to

.


to select the Elbow category, if you have used the sample project files.

7. Click Trim and At All Corners. Note: Do not select the Selection Name option because you want the fitting selection names to be determined automatically. 8. Click Nearest Std. Elbow. If you do not select this option you are prompted with an option list of valid elbows for trimming at every vertex where a trimmed elbow will be inserted. 9. Click


or Click open.


To Insert Elbows at All Corners without Trim 1. Click PIPING > Fitting > Insert. The Insert Fitting dialog box opens. 2. Under Placement Type, Pipe Segment is selected by default.

202


3. Under Pipeline Selection, select a pipeline by selecting one of its segments. The label of the selected pipeline appears as read-only in the box adjacent to

.



6. Click At All Corners. 7. Click

to insert the elbow and close the dialog box.

or Click

to insert the elbow and keep the Insert Fitting dialog box open.

Note: Trim is not selected in this case and so trimmed elbows are not inserted.

To Insert Elbow Fittings at all Corners by Specifying a Selection Name 1. Click PIPING > Fitting > Insert. The Insert Fitting dialog box opens. 2. Under Placement Type, Pipe Segment is selected by default. 3. Under Pipeline Selection, select a pipeline by selecting one of its segments. The label of the selected pipeline appears as read-only in the box adjacent to

.



6. Click At All Corners and Selection Name. 7. Click

to insert the elbow and close the dialog box.

or Click

to insert the elbow and keep the Insert Fitting dialog box open.

Inserting Group Fittings About Inserting Group Fittings You can use the Insert Group Fitting functionality to: •

Specify a group of fittings for insertion.

•

Automatically perform end type compatibility checking between adjacent fittings in the group.

203


Automatically select and insert the appropriate gaskets between the adjacent flanged fittings in the group.

•

Automatically select and insert an appropriate pair of flange and gaskets between a flanged end of a fitting and a non-flanged end of another fitting.

•

Insert the specified group fittings on a pipe segment with their adjacent faces mated.

Note: You cannot flip the fittings of type eccentric reducers during group fitting insertion because of the offset in the centerline axis of such fittings. To avoid this, you can insert expansion fittings instead of reducer fittings or vice versa. To get the required size, modify the pipe size before you insert the fittings.

To Insert Group Fittings 1. Click PIPING > Fitting > Insert Group. The Insert Group Fitting dialog box opens. The Selection tab is selected by default. 2. Under Pipeline Selection, select the insertion location. 3. The Specification, Size, and the Schedule boxes display default values. Click the Specification check box, and select another specification from the specification list to override the current specification for the fitting that you want to insert. If you override specifications, all the subsequent fittings that you insert will use the same overridden specification until you clear the Specification box. Note: To insert a fitting without the schematic information, proceed to step 5. 4. If you have set the piping_schematic_driven configuration option to yes, the Schematic Driven option is available under Pipeline Selection. The XML file associated with the selected pipeline is also displayed. To insert a group fitting in the schematic mode, select an available fitting category icon and then select a values from the Selection Name list. The Designator box displays the refdes of the selected fitting. You cannot edit this value. The Specification, Valve Number, New Size, and Branch Size boxes are automatically updated as per the schematic information of the selected schematic fitting. 5. Under Fitting Selection, select a fitting that you want to insert. The options are: —Inserts a valve. —Inserts a flange. —Inserts an elbow fitting.

204


—Inserts a branch fitting (includes special olet fittings). —Inserts a reducer fitting. —Inserts a general fitting or gasket. —Inserts an assembly fitting. Note: All user-defined fitting categories also appear under Fitting Selection. 6. The Selection Name box displays a default fitting selection name. Change this name by selecting another name from the list. 7. The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to that fitting based on the Auto-Selection file. Change this code by selecting another bolt nut code from the list. 8. Specify a string that contains one or more characters or numbers, or both, in the Valve Number box to assign a valve number to the selected fitting. Note: You can also use the Piping System Tree or Model Tree to assign a valve number to a selected fitting. To do so, specify the VALVENUMBER string parameter as one of the Feat Params columns to be displayed in the Model Tree Columns dialog box. 9. Click Automatic Flange & Gasket if you want a set of flanges and gaskets to be inserted automatically. 10. Use the Group Manipulation buttons to add fittings or display information about selected fittings for your group of fittings. —Displays the previous fitting in the group and makes it the current fitting. —Displays the next fitting in the group and makes it the current fitting. —Inserts a new fitting into the group before the current fitting. —Inserts a new fitting into the group after the current fitting. —Specifies the current fitting as the key fitting. This is not activated if the current fitting is already the key fitting, or if the current key fitting of the group is an elbow, branch, eccentric reducer fitting, or angle valve. —Deletes the current fitting from the group. The next fitting in the group becomes the current fitting. If the key fitting is deleted, then the next fitting becomes the key fitting. —Clears all fittings from the group.

205


As you add or remove fittings from the groups, the Group Parent at the top of the dialog box displays the number of the current fitting and the number of total fittings in the group. If the current fitting is the key fitting, the counter reflects this information. 11. Click the Placement/Orientation tab. You can determine Placement and Orientation options, one fitting at a time. 12. Under Placement Options, make the following selections: Fitting Placement

—Inserts a fitting at a specified location.

—Inserts a fitting face to face with another fitting.

—Inserts a fitting at the end of a segment.

—Inserts a fitting at a junction (available when you insert a branch fitting).

—Inserts a fitting at a corner run to a branch (available when you insert a branch fitting).

—Inserts a fitting at a corner branch to a run (available when you insert a branch fitting).

Location Type (Location Type buttons are available when you click Fitting Placement.)

under

—Locates the fitting at a specified location. Note: By default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference location from the start end of the pipe segment. Click

available under Location Parameter to flip the

location with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes to

to indicate the change in the reference location.

—Locates the fitting at a specified distance ratio. Note: By default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference location from the start end of the pipe segment. Click

available under Location Parameter to flip the

location with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes to

206



—Offsets the fitting from an upstream corner.

—Offsets the fitting from a plane.

—Offsets the fitting from a fitting. Use

available under Location

Parameter to flip the reference port. Pro/PIPING changes indicate the change in the reference port.

to

to

Note: You cannot flip the placement location of an elbow fitting. Location Parameter Specify a location parameter and use the thumb wheel to increase or decrease the offset. 13. Under Orientation Options, make the following selections: Alignment Offset Check this box to offset the near or far alignment of the fitting by the value set by the OFFSET parameter. The system applies the offset value in the positive zdirection of the entry port fitting. Alignment Point The alignment point positions the fitting on the fitting port that is near, at the center, or far. —Near point. The system aligns the inlet (upstream) port of the fitting with the location point of the fitting. —Center point. The system aligns the outlet (downstream) port of the fitting with the location point. —Far point. The system places the fitting so that the alignment point is in the middle of the two ports. Flip

—Flips the fitting. Rotation Angle Select from the standard options or use the thumb wheel to adjust the rotation angle.

207


14. To preview the fittings, click the arrow adjacent to Preview Fitting Graphics to display the graphics window. To preview the graphics in a separate window, select the check box. 15. Click

to insert the group fitting and close the dialog box.

Example: Overriding Specifications during Group Fitting Insertion A check valve of specification A7K and a gate valve of specification A7N inserted on a pipeline of specification A3A is shown in the next figure.

1 A3A 2 A7K 3 A7N 4 A3A Pro/PIPING uses the specification of the upstream fitting, that is, of specification A7K, and selects the specification for the intermediate gasket between the check valve and the gate valve.

Key Fitting The key fitting is a fitting in the group, that is inserted first on the pipe segment. Before the key fitting is inserted, the selected pipe segment is divided into two segments at the specified location. The key fitting is placed at the specified location. The adjacent fittings are inserted with their faces mating with either side face of the key fitting. All the fittings in the group are inserted subsequently in this manner. The first selected fitting becomes the key fitting by default. If any one of the following fittings is added to the group, then that fitting automatically becomes the key fitting, and the original key fitting becomes the normal fitting: •

Elbows

•

Branch fittings

•

Eccentric fittings

•

Angle valves

A group cannot have more than one fitting from these categories.

208


A key fitting can be used to mate a group fitting to one or more existing fittings in the piping model. To do so, the key fitting must exist at the mating end of the group. Also, there must be no group fittings between the key fitting and the mating surface of the existing fittings.

Group Fitting Rules The following rules apply for specifying group fittings, for insertion. •

There can be only one key fitting in the group.

•

The placement options and alignment point options can be specified only for the key fitting. The placement options will be disabled for other fittings. But orientation options will be accessible individually for all the fittings.

•

When a non-key fitting is manually set as "key fitting", the Placement Options and alignment point options of the original key fitting will be transferred to the new key fitting. However, you can change these options as required for the new key fitting.

End Type Compatibility Checking End type compatibility checking within the group is performed for every fitting in the group after the second fitting is specified. If the end compatibility check fails, then: •

An error message is displayed.

•

You can correct the failure either by selecting another fitting or by flipping a fitting.

•

You can remove the failed fitting.

Modifying Fittings About Modifying Fittings (Spec-Driven) You can modify any fitting that you insert in your specification-driven piping system. Pro/PIPING allows you to modify fittings in the following ways: •

Delete—Delete unwanted fittings

•

Delete Group—Delete unwanted fittings in a group and automatically choose a new parent if the parent fitting of the group is deleted

•

Redefine—Redefine fitting parameters to customize certain fittings

•

Replace—Replace inserted fittings with different ones

You can also perform these operations using the Info, Redefine, Replace, and Delete options from the shortcut menu.

209


To Delete Fittings 1. Click PIPING > Fitting > Delete. 2. Select a fitting, and then Ok from the SELECT menu. The fitting is deleted. 3. When you are finished deleting fittings click Done/Return.

To Delete Group Fittings 1. Click PIPING > Fitting > Delete Group. The Delete Group Fittings dialog box opens. 2. Under Select Fitting, select the pipe fitting component that you want to delete. 3. Under Fitting Delete Options, select one of the following: o

All in Group—Deletes all the fittings in the group.

o

Selected & All Upstream—Deletes the selected fitting and all fittings that are mated to the selected fitting, upstream in the group. If the selected fitting is located below the parent fitting, all the fittings located upstream to it including the parent fitting are deleted. In this case, Pro/PIPING prompts you to select another fitting in the group as the new parent fitting. Note: If you select a fitting that is located downstream of the group parent fitting, and the parent fitting is a corner or a branch fitting, you cannot select fittings using Selected & All Upstream.

o

Selected & All Downstream—Deletes the selected fitting and all the fittings that are mated to the selected fitting, downstream in the group. If the selected fitting is located above the parent fitting, all the fittings located downstream to it including the parent fitting are deleted. In this case, Pro/PIPING prompts you to select another fitting in the group as the new parent fitting. Note: If you select a fitting that is located upstream of the group parent fitting, and the parent fitting is a corner or a branch fitting, you cannot select fittings using Selected & All Downstream.

o

Only Selected—Deletes only the specified fitting in the group. If the specified fitting is the parent of the group, Pro/PIPING prompts you to select a new parent for the group. If the specified fitting is an intermediate flange fitting, Pro/PIPING deletes all the redundant gaskets in the group. If the specified fitting is an intermediate gasket fitting, only the specified fitting is deleted.

4. Under Select New Group Parent, click to select a new parent for the group if you have deleted the parent fitting of the group and have not specified a new parent. 210


Note: You cannot select the following items as a new parent fitting: o

Gaskets

o

Fittings outside the currently specified group

Pro/PIPING selects a new parent fitting automatically in the following cases: o

If you select a parent fitting for deletion from a group of two fittings

o

If you select a parent fitting for deletion from a group fitting located at the end of a pipe, the fitting adjacent to the parent fitting is selected as the new parent fitting

5. Click

to delete the group fittings.

Example: Deleting Group Fittings Fittings of types neckflanges, nipples, and gaskets, mated together are shown in the next figure.

The network report for the fittings is shown in the next table. SIZE

SPEC

NAME

100A

ms

NIPPLE

100A

ms

NIPPLE

100A

ms

NIPPLE

100A

ms

NECKFLANGE

100A

ms

GASKET

100A

ms

NECKFLANGE

100A

ms

NIPPLE

211


If you select the NIPPLE 100A, which is the group parent fitting for deletion, Pro/PIPING highlights all selected fittings that will be deleted as shown in the following figure:

The highlighted fittings are deleted when you click appear as shown in the following figure:

212

. The remaining group fittings


Select the new parent fitting as NIPPLE of size 100A in the Select New Group Parent box. The size of the pipe segment is propagated along its downstream to match the downstream size of the group fittings. The network report for the group fittings with the new parent is as shown in the following table. SIZE

SPEC

NAME

100A

ms

NIPPLE

100A

ms

NIPPLE

To Redefine Specification-Driven Fittings 1. Click PIPING > Fitting > Redefine. The Redefine Fitting dialog box opens. 2. Select a fitting to redefine. 3. Under Orientation Options, you can redefine the following parameters: o

Alignment Point—Change the dimensional control point of the fitting.

o

Flip—Change the direction of the fitting. Note: You cannot flip the fittings of type eccentric reducers.

o

Alignment Offset—Select to offset the alignment.

o

Rotation Angle—Reposition the fitting.

4. Click to complete the redefinition of the fitting on the pipeline and close the dialog box.

About Specification Override during Fitting Replacement You can override the specification of a fitting that you want to replace. When replacing fittings, use the specification override feature to: •

Replace an existing fitting with a fitting that has the same specification as that of the pipe segment or has a different specification.

•

Replace a fitting that you inserted earlier by overriding specifications, with a fitting that has the same pipe specification or a different overriding fitting specification.

•

Replace a fitting that you inserted earlier by overriding specifications, with a fitting that has the same specification as that of the pipe segment.

To Replace Fittings 1. Click PIPING > Fittings > Replace. The Replace Fitting dialog box opens. 2. Under Select Fitting, select the fitting to be replaced. Information about the fitting appears as read-only text under Fitting Data.

213


3. The Specification, Size, and the Schedule boxes display a value by default. Click the Specification box and select a different specification from the specification list to override the current specification values for the fitting that you want to replace. Note: To replace a fitting without the schematic information, proceed to step 5. 4. If you have set the piping_schematic_driven configuration option to yes, the Schematic Driven option is available under Fitting Data. The XML file associated with the selected pipeline is also displayed. To replace a fitting in the schematic mode, select an available fitting category icon and then select a value from the Selection Name list. The Designator box displays the refdes of the selected fitting. This value is not editable. The Specification, Valve Number, New Size, and Branch Size boxes are automatically updated as per the schematic information of the selected schematic fitting. 5. Under Fitting Selection, select the new fitting you want. 6. The Selection Name section displays a default fitting selection name. Change this name by selecting from the list. 7. Specify a string that contains one or more characters or numbers, or both, in the Valve Number box to assign, modify, or delete a valve number to the fitting that you want to replace. Note: You can also use the Piping System Tree or Model Tree to modify the valve number of the selected fitting. To do so, specify the VALVENUMBER string parameter as one of the Feat Params column to be displayed in the Model Tree Columns dialog box. 8. Click

to replace the fitting and close the dialog box.

Tip: Modifying and Deleting Valve Numbers In addition to modifying and deleting valve numbers using the Replace Fitting dialog box, you can also modify and delete valve numbers of a selected fitting using one of the following methods: •

Use the Parameters dialog box that opens when you click Tools > Parameters.

•

Use the Piping System Tree by setting the VALVENUMBER string parameter as one of the display Feat Params columns in the Model Tree Columns dialog box. Select the box specific to a valve in the Piping System Tree and delete or modify the valve number.

•

Use the Model Tree by selecting the box specific to a valve in the model tree and deleting or modifying the valve number.

214


Note: You can use the Model Tree to create, modify, or delete valve numbers even if you set the value of the VALVE_NUMBER parameter in the Fitting Category Map file to no. As good practice, avoid using the Model Tree to create, modify, or delete valve numbers.

Fitting Overlap Checking Pro/PIPING automatically checks for the overlap of fittings when you insert fittings, automatic flanges and gaskets, redefine fittings, or replace fittings. For all such instances, Pro/PIPING: •

Compares the length of the pipe segment between two adjacent fittings with the values specified for one of the following configuration options: o

The pipeline_min_bolt_clearance configuration option if the pipe segment is between two flanged fittings or between a flanged and a nonflanged fitting

o

The pipeline_min_segment_length configuration option if the pipe segment is between two nonflanged fittings

If the length of the pipe segment is less than any of the values specified for these configuration options, a message appears and the pipe segment that does not satisfy the above conditions is highlighted. •

Checks for a fitting that overlaps another fitting at the given insertion location and tries to move the fitting to avoid the overlap. If the fitting cannot be moved, a message appears and the existing fitting that is being overlapped is highlighted. In such instances, no fittings are inserted.

Note: For slip-on flanges and socket-welded fittings, Pro/PIPING does not automatically perform the overlap check for the fitting parts that lie outside the port. This is because the ports do not lie on the external surface of the fitting. To enable Pro/PIPING to perform fitting overlap checking for slip-on flanges and socket welded fittings, use the OFFSET parameter to specify the additional distance between the port and the external surface and attach the parameter to the required port. Pro/PIPING performs the overlap checking for the additional distance from the fitting port location.

Specification-Driven Pipeline Modification About Pipeline Modification Using the Modify Pipeline functionality, you can modify pipes in an active assembly in the following ways: •

Change the bend parameters.

•

Change the corner type.

•

Change the line shape of flexible pipes.

•

Display the flow direction or reverse the flow direction. 215


Edit the pipeline specifications and parameters.

You can also make dimensional changes to pipelines outside of the active assembly; however, changes are not observed until either the assembly in question or the top level assembly is made active and regenerated. During the modification or automatic propagation of pipelines, Pro/PIPING checks for the fittings that can overlap at different locations on a pipeline. The fittings that are being overlapped are highlighted and the modification of the pipeline is terminated.

To Modify Pipe Segments 1. Click PIPING > Modify Pipe. The Modify Pipeline dialog box opens. 2. Under Active Assembly select the active assembly. 3. Under Modify Options, select Segment. 4. Under Segment, select the pipe segment you want to modify. 5. In the Segment Parameters section, modify the parameters by selecting from the list. The options are: o

Specification

o

Size

o

Schedule

6. Click


Note: •

If the selected pipe segment contains a reducer then the fitting modification dialog box opens.

•

If a fitting overlaps because of a change in the size of the pipe segment, Pro/PIPING reports all the fitting overlap violations in the INFORMATION WINDOW. You cannot modify the pipeline, unless you redefine the insertion location of the fittings that are overlapping.

To Modify a Corner Type 1. Click PIPING > Modify Pipe. The Modify Pipeline dialog box opens. 2. Under Active Assembly select the active assembly. 3. Under Modify Options, select Corner Type. 4. Under Corner, select the corners you want to modify. 5. In the New Type box, select a new corner type from the list. Note: The New Type box displays only those corner types that are specified in the Piping Specification File.

216


If you select a corner of type Bend, the Bend Radius box displays a default value for the bend radius. If more than one value is specified for the radius in the Piping Specification file, select the required bend radius value from the Bend Radius list. Note: The Bend Radius box is available only when you select the New Type as Bend.

o

If you select a corner of type Miter Cut, the Cut Radius box displays a default value for the cut radius. If more than one value for the radius is specified in the Piping Specification file, you can select the required radius from the Cut Radius list. After you select a cut radius, the Cut Number box displays the default value for the cut number. If more than one value is specified for the cut number in the Piping Specification file, select the required cut number value from the Cut Number list.

o

The Cut Radius and the Cut Number boxes are available only when you select the New Type as Miter Cut.

6. Click


Tip: Modifying Corner Types •

You can select multiple corners for modification only if they satisfy the following criteria: o

The corners belong to the active assembly.

o

The corners have the same line stock, that is, they have the same specification, material code, nominal size, and schedule.

o

If you select multiple miters for modification, the Cut Radius box displays the value of the radius, if the selected miters have the same radius. If you select multiple miters of variable radius, the Cut Radius box displays the value Multiple.

o

If you select multiple miters for modification, the Cut Number box displays the value of the cut number if the selected miters have the same cut number. If you select multiple miters of variable cut number, the Cut Number box displays the value Multiple.

o

If you select multiple corners of different corner types like bends, fittings, and miter cuts, the Select Corner box in the Modify Pipeline dialog box displays the value Current Type Multiple.

217


Tip: Changing the Bend Radius of a Pipeline You can have multiple entries for the same pipe size in the bend file, that is, a single pipe size can have multiple bend radius values associated with it, as shown in the following example of a bend file. SIZE

RADIUS

RATIO

MIN RADIUS

MAX RADI US

MIN ANGLE

MAX ANGLE

80A

265

265

265

0

360

100A

360

360

360

0

360

100A

375

375

375

0

360

100A

345

345

345

0

360

125A

420

420

420

0

360

After you create a pipeline using a pipe size that has multiple bend radius values associated with it, you can set the bend radius value for that routing session by doing the following. 1. Click Route Pipe > Pipe Envrmnt > Corner Vals. The SEL VALUE menu appears and displays the multiple bend radius values in the order that they are specified in the bend file. 2. Select the required bend radius value from the list as the current one for that routing session. If you do not select a bend radius value, then the first value displayed in the SEL VALUE menu is set as the default bend radius value. The bend radius value you set as current is valid only for the routing session. For a new routing session, the first value in the SEL VALUE menu is set as the default value if you do not set a different value. You can change the bend radius value of a selected corner in a pipeline using the Modify Pipeline dialog box. Under Modify Options, select Corner Type. The default value displayed in the Bend Radii list is the current bend radius value for the selected bend. You can select a new value from the list. Note: A routing session starts when you click Pipeline > Create/Route and ends when you click Route Pipe > Done/ Return.

To Modify the Bend Parameters 1. Click PIPING > Modify Pipe. The Modify Pipeline dialog box opens. 2. Under Active Assembly select the active assembly. 3. Under Modify Options, select Bend Parameters. The Bend Parameters dialog box opens.

218


4. From the menu click Edit > Columns > Add/Remove. The Bend Parameters Columns dialog box opens. 5. Under Not Displayed, Bend Params must be selected. If it is not, select it from the list. 6. In the Name input box, type in a name for the parameter. to add the name to the Displayed area. You can manipulate this list 7. Click using the following: —Removes a name from the list. —Moves a parameter up in the list. —Moves a parameter down in the list. Type a value in the Width box to change the column width. Optionally, use the spin wheel to change the value. 8. When you have created the bend parameters, do one of the following: o

Click Apply to add the changes and keep the dialog box open.

o

Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

9. In the Bend Parameters dialog box, a column is displayed for each added parameter. To modify the parameters, click in the parameter column next to the feature you want to modify and fill in or change the information. 10. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

To Reverse Flow Direction 1. Click PIPING > Modify Pipe. The Modify Pipeline dialog box opens. 2. Under Active Assembly, select the active assembly. 3. Under Modify Options, select Flow Direction. 4. Under Flow Direction, select the flow unit you want to modify by selecting from the list. The options are: o

PipeLine—A collection of many connected series and junctions that represent a single pipeline.

o

Extension—A set of series that are connected together and having the same flow direction.

o

Series—A pipeline portion consisting of pipeline elements between a Pipeline Start and Junction, or Junction and Junction, or Junction and End, of a pipeline. Flow direction applies to entire pipeline series and accordingly, an entire pipeline series will be associated with only one flow direction.

219


Select the unit. In the graphics window the flow direction is indicated by arrows along the pipeline. 5. Under Flow Reversal, click Reverse. 6. Click


Flow Direction Violations You can view the flow direction violations in the Design Rules Check dialog box. The location of flow violation is marked on the screen with a dot. The system prompts you to confirm the violation. You can confirm the violation or override the warning. Any unresolved flow direction inconsistencies are captured by the reporting process within pipeline routing, fitting insertion, and pipeline reporting. You can encounter the following flow violations: •

Converging flow at a junction.

•

Diverging flow at a junction.

•

Converging pipelines (two different pipelines that share a physical connection point but are opposed in direction.)

•

Diverging pipelines (two different pipelines that share a physical connection point but are opposed in direction).

•

Pipelines with dead loops (loops that feed back into the pipeline and have no outlet).

To Modify the Line Shape of a Flexible Hose 1. Using the Modify Pipeline dialog box, select an active assembly with the arrow. 2. Under Modify Options, click Flex Shape. 3. Under Flex Shape, select a pipeline segment with the arrow. 4. Under Modify Shape, click Fixed Length or Free Length and type a value in the Length option. 5. Click Apply, OK, and Close.

To Edit a Pipeline 1. Click PIPING > Modify Pipe. The Modify Pipeline dialog box opens. 2. Under Active Assembly, select the active assembly. 3. Under Modify Options, select Edit Pipeline. The Edit Pipeline dialog box opens. Note: To edit a pipeline without the schematic information, proceed to step 5.

220


4. If you have set the piping_schematic_driven configuration option to yes the Schematic Driven option will be available under Pipeline. To associate a pipeline with the XML file name, perform the following steps: a. Check the XML File option under Schematic Driven to make

active.

b. The Schematic Label option under Schematic Driven lists all the eligible pipelines for editing, based on the information in the specified XML file. Select a pipeline from the eligible list. c. Click and select an XML file from the directory path specified by the piping_schematic_xml_dir configuration option or your current working directory or from any other directory. The selected XML file is displayed in the XML File box. Note: The specified XML file must contain the schematic information of the pipeline. d. Edit the required pipeline parameters under the Label, Parameters, and Defined tabs. If the XML file does not have the associated pipeline information, then the edited pipeline parameter values are not applied to the pipeline. Note: To edit a pipeline without the schematic information, clear the XML File check box and perform the following steps. 5. The Edit Pipeline dialog box opens with the Label tab displayed. You can change the following: o

Label—Modify the Pipeline Label by changing the Specification, Size, Schedule, Mnemonic, and Number. You can assign insulation to the pipeline by selecting the Insulation checkbox and selecting an insulation code from the list.

o

Parameters—Enter or modify the pipeline parameters: Oper. Pressure, Oper. Temperature, Design Pressure, and Design Temperature. Click to retrieve existing pipeline parameters from a file. After the Open dialog box opens, select the file to retrieve and double-click. The parameters are displayed in the boxes. Note that pipeline parameters options are set by a configuration option and may not be available.

o

Defined—Define or redefine parameters in the Name and Value boxes. Click to retrieve existing pipeline parameters from a file. After the Open dialog box opens, select the file to retrieve and double-click. The parameters are displayed in the boxes. Use

6. Click

to add or delete parameters to the pipeline. to save the new parameters.

221


7. Click


To Replace a Bend with an Elbow When a pipe piece fails the check of the bend clamp length, you can replace the selected bend with an elbow. 1. Click PIPING > Modify Pipe. The Modify Pipeline dialog box opens. 2. Under Active Assembly select the active assembly. 3. Under Modify Options, select Bend to Elbow. The Replace Bend dialog box opens. 4. Under Assembly, select the active assembly. 5. Under Pipelines select the pipelines 6. A list of invalid pipe pieces display under Select Invalid Pipe Piece. All the segments and bends of the selected invalid pipe piece display under Select Bend to Replace, the invalid ones are highlighted with a symbol next to them. Those are the ones that violated the minimum clamp length defined in the bend machine file inside the Master Catalog. 7. Under Select Bend to Replace, select the bend adjacent to the invalid segment to be replaced by a fitting corner type. 8. Click to apply the changes and close the dialog box. The elbow fittings are inserted automatically when you apply the changes.

Specification-Driven Pipe Fabrication About Fabricating Pipes The Specification-Driven method of modeling includes the following Pipe Fabrication functionality: •

Pipe piece cutting functionality that allows you to insert or delete a cut.

•

Pipe spool piece generation that allows you to generate pipe spool pieces automatically.

•

Create a solid representation for piping insulation and store the information in the model.

Create a pipe solid for a pipe segment or the entire pipeline in the current active assembly.

222


Cutting Pipe Pieces About Cutting Pipe Pieces Use Cut Pipe to split a pipeline into pieces that can be fabricated. Cut Pipe allows you to alter the length of pipelines by splitting a straight segment into shorter raw pipe blanks, or cutting the pipe at a specific location to generate the desired spool. The piece cutting functionality allows you to perform the following tasks: •

Cut a pipeline at a specified location.

•

Cut a straight pipe run at multiple locations by specifying the stock length or using a user-specified length of pipe.

•

Specify a cut location by referencing other objects such as an adjacent pipe segment, a hull structure, or a data reference plane.

•

Specify a cut location by an offset distance.

•

Cut all parallel pipe runs at locations identical to the reference pipe run.

•

Cut all pipe segments at locations where pipelines intersect with the block boundary.

•

Automatically insert joint fittings at the cut location during piece cutting.

•

Assign shop or field weld attributes.

•

Generate pipe spool pieces based on cuts.

To Cut a Pipe at a Specified Location Using Placement Use Cut Pipe to cut a pipeline at a specified location using distance or ratio placement. 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Cut Pipe. The Cut Pipe dialog box opens.

2. Under Piece Cutting Options select

.

3. Select the pipe segment to insert a cut. By default, the selected location is the placement location of the cut. The pipeline label is displayed under Select Pipe Segment as read-only information. 4. The distance of the selected location on the pipe segment displays in the thumb wheel input panel. Select the following Cut Placement Options:

o

—Use the thumb wheel to reposition the cut location along the pipe segment or enter an explicit distance directly in the input panel.

223


Note: By default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference location from the start end of the pipe segment. Click under Location Parameter to flip the location with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes

o

to


—Specify a distance ratio from the upstream end of the specified pipe segment. Note: By default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference location from the start end of the pipe segment. Click under Location Parameter to flip the location with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes

to


5. To insert a joint fitting at the cut, under Miscellaneous Options, select Joint Fitting and specify the joint fitting name. The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to that fitting. You can change this code by selecting from the list. 6. If you want to assign a weld attribute to this cut, under Weld Type, select from the following weld type options: Shop-Field, Shop-Shop, and Field-Shop. 7. Do one of the following: o

Click to insert a cut at the defined location, generate the specified weld attribute, and close the Cut Pipe dialog box.

o

Click to insert a cut at the defined location, generate the specified weld attribute, and then continue inserting cuts with the Cut Pipe dialog box.

o

Click

if you want to exit the dialog box.

Note: You can control the display format of the linear dimension and the incremental step value for the thumb wheel movement using the piping_thumb_wheel_increment configuration option.

To Cut a Pipe at a Specified Location Using a Plane Reference Use the following procedure to insert a cut at a defined distance from a specified plane and generate a weld attribute. 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Cut Pipe. The Cut Pipe dialog box opens.

2. Under Piece Cutting Options, single cut select it.

is selected by default. If it is not,

3. Select an approximate location on the pipe segment in which you want to insert a cut. The pipeline label is displayed under Select Pipe Segment as read-only information.

224


4. Under Cut Placement Options, select the plane reference option

.

5. Select a planar hull structural surface or datum plane that is perpendicular to the pipe segment. The name of the reference is displayed under Location Parameter. Note: Pro/PIPING does not allow you to select referenced planar hull structural surface or datum planes that are not perpendicular to the pipe segment in which you are inserting the cut. 6. Use the thumb wheel to position the cut location along the pipe segment or enter an explicit distance directly in the input panel. 7. To insert a joint fitting at the cut, under Miscellaneous Options, select Joint Fitting and specify the joint fitting name. The default is no joint fitting. The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to that fitting. You can change this code by selecting from the list. 8. Under Weld Type, the Field option is selected by default. If it is not, select it to assign a field weld attribute to this cut. 9. To insert the cut, do one of the following: Click to insert a cut at the defined location, generate the specified weld attribute, and close the Cut Pipe dialog box. or Click to insert a cut at the defined location, generate the specified weld attribute, and then continue inserting cuts with the Cut Pipe dialog box.

To Cut Pipe at a Specified Location Using a Pipe Reference In the following procedure, you place a cut at the specified location on a segment and then create a reference from an adjacent upstream pipe segment that is perpendicular to the segment where the cut is defined. 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Cut Pipe. The Cut Pipe dialog box opens.

2. Under Piece Cutting Options single cut select it.


3. Select an approximate location on the pipe segment where you want to insert a cut. The pipeline label is displayed under Select Pipe Segment as read-only information.

4. Under Cut Placement Options select the pipe reference option

.

225


5. Select an upstream adjacent pipe segment that is perpendicular to the pipe segment in which you are inserting the cut. The name of the reference will display under Location Parameter. 6. Use the thumb wheel to position the cut location along the pipe segment or enter an explicit distance directly in the input panel. 7. To insert a joint fitting at the cut, under Miscellaneous Options, select Joint Fitting and specify the joint fitting name. The default is no joint fitting. The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to that fitting. You can change this code by selecting from the list. 8. Under Weld Type, the Field option is selected by default. If it is not, select it to assign a field weld attribute to this cut. 9. To insert the cut, do one of the following: Click to insert a cut at the defined location, generate the specified weld attribute, and close the Cut Pipe dialog box. or Click to insert a cut at the defined location, generate the specified weld attribute, and then continue inserting cuts with the Cut Pipe dialog box. Note: The referenced pipe segment must be perpendicular to the pipe segment in which you are inserting the cut. If it is not, this functionality will be disabled.

To Cut Pipe at a Single Location Using a Fitting Port Reference In the following procedure, you place a cut at the specified location on a segment and then create a reference from a nearest fitting that is located on the upstream side, downstream side, or on the branch port of the cut. 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Cut Pipe. The Cut Pipe dialog box opens.

2. Under Piece Cutting Options, single cut select it.


3. Select an approximate location on the pipe segment in which you want to insert a cut. The pipeline label is displayed under Select Pipe Segment as read-only information.

4. Under Cut Placement Options, select the fitting reference option

. Use

available under Location Parameter to flip the reference port. Pro/PIPING changes

226

to

to indicate the change in the reference port.


Note: o

If the selected pipe segment does not have any existing fitting, Pro/PIPING disables the fitting reference option.

o

You cannot flip the placement location of an elbow fitting or a branch port.

5. Under Location Parameter, the name of the nearest fitting is automatically displayed as a reference. Click to select any other nearest fitting that is located on the upstream side, downstream side, on the branch port, or on the center point between the upstream and downstream ports of the cut. The selected fitting must exist in the same pipeline and in the same pipe run. The name of the selected fitting is displayed in the selection field as read-only information. 6. Use the thumb wheel to position the cut location along the pipe segment or enter an explicit distance directly in the input panel. 7. To insert a joint fitting at the cut, under Miscellaneous Options, select Joint Fitting and specify the joint fitting selection name. The default is no joint fitting. The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to the fitting to be inserted. You can change this code by selecting from the list. or Under Weld Type, the weld type options are displayed based on the selected type of fitting. The Field option is selected by default. 8. To insert the cut, do one of the following: Click to insert a cut at the defined location, generate the specified weld attribute, and close the Cut Pipe dialog box. or Click to insert a cut at the defined location, generate the specified weld attribute, and then continue inserting cuts with the Cut Pipe dialog box.

Selecting the Reference Fitting Port When cutting a pipeline at a single location using a fitting port reference, Pro/PIPING automatically selects a default fitting port as a reference based on the location selected on the pipe segment. A default fitting port is selected as a reference based on the following selection criteria: •

If a fitting exists in the immediate upstream of the selected location, before a corner or free end, then the nearest port of that fitting is selected as the default reference. The default reference port origin is highlighted in the graphics window.

227


For example, in the following figure, fittings A and B are upstream of the selected location. As fitting B is the nearest upstream fitting, Pro/PIPING automatically identifies it as the reference fitting and its downstream port as the default reference port.

1 Selected location •

If no fitting exists in the upstream side before the corner or free end and if a fitting exists in the immediate downstream of the selected location, then the nearest port of that fitting is selected as the default reference and its origin is highlighted. For example, in the preceding figure, if the selected location is in the upstream side of fitting A, then Pro/PIPING selects the upstream port of the fitting A as the default reference.

•

In the above cases, if the nearest fitting to the selected location is part of a group of fittings, then the closest fitting in the group is selected as the default reference fitting, and the nearest port of that fitting is selected as the default reference port.

•

If the reference fitting is a flange fitting, Pro/PIPING automatically selects the port at the flange face as the reference port.

Note: You can either change the reference to any other port of the same fitting or select a port of a different fitting. The selected fitting must exist in the same pipeline and in the same pipe run. •

If the selected port has the OFFSET parameter to identify the location of the fitting's end face and if you have used the end face to insert the fitting, then the location of the end face is used as the reference location. The location of the end face is located at a distance specified by the OFFSET parameter along the port's zaxis.

228


Changing the Selected Reference Fitting Port The label of the selected port is automatically displayed in the Location Parameter box as shown:

o

The label indicates that PORT1 is the name of CSYS, whose feature number is 113, inside the fitting model VL_CHK_FLRF-100.

o

The port switch option

is used to change the reference fitting port.

Click the port switch option to change the reference to the upstream port of the same fitting. Pro/PIPING selects the upstream port PORT0 as shown:

If a selected segment is in the branch side of a junction and if the default reference port is a branch port of a branch fitting, the port switch option appears as shown:

If you click the port switch option again, the same port remains selected because the object in the branch pipe segment cannot refer to the ports in the main pipe segment. However, you can select a port from another fitting using SELECT menu.

and the

Relocating the Selected Reference Fitting Port Modifying the existing reference fitting results in the following: •

If a reference fitting is relocated, the corresponding piping objects referring to that relocated fitting are also relocated maintaining the same offset value.

•

If the referenced fitting is replaced, the existing reference for the piping objects is re-routed to the corresponding port of the new fitting model. That is, if the original fitting's upstream port was referenced, then the reference is rerouted to the new fitting's upstream port.

•

If you delete the referenced fitting, the reference for the piping objects to the fitting port is also deleted. Pro/PIPING creates a new reference for the pipe segment on which the piping objects are located. During this rerouting, the actual location of the fitting is not affected. The Length location option is used for creating a reference for the new pipe segment.

229


To Cut Pipe at Multiple Locations Based on Pipe Stock or UserSpecified Length You can cut a straight pipe run automatically at multiple locations by specifying the stock length or by using a user-specified length of pipe. When you cut at multiple locations, the specified length is applied at intervals along the straight pipe run. After you create multiple cuts in this manner, they are treated as individual cuts. You can manipulate them and delete them individually. 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Cut Pipe. The Cut Pipe dialog box opens.

2. Under Piece Cutting Options, click

.

3. Select a straight pipe run in which you want to insert multiple cuts. The pipeline label is displayed under Select Pipe Segment as read-only information. 4. Under Interval Length, specify the desired stock length or a desired interval length to cut the pipe runs at multiple locations. 5. To insert a joint fitting at the cut, under Miscellaneous Options, select Joint Fitting and specify the joint fitting name. The default is no joint fitting. The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to that fitting. You can change this code by selecting from the list. 6. Under Weld Type, the Field option is selected by default. If it is not, select it to assign a field weld attribute to this cut. Field welds with unique identification numbers will be created at each cut location. 7. To insert the cut, do one of the following: Click to insert cuts at the defined location, generate the specified weld attribute, and close the Cut Pipe dialog box. or Click to insert cuts at the defined location, generate the specified weld attribute, and then continue inserting cuts with the Cut Pipe dialog box.

To Cut Pipe at Multiple Locations with Automatic Joint Fitting Insertion You can cut a straight pipe run automatically at multiple locations by specifying the pipe stock length and automatically inserting the required joint fittings. When you cut at multiple locations, the specified length is applied as intervals along the straight pipe run. 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Cut Pipe. The Cut Pipe dialog box opens.

2. Under Piece Cutting Options, click

230

.


3. Select a straight pipe run in which you want to insert multiple cuts. The pipeline label is displayed under Select Pipe Segment as read-only information. 4. Under Interval Length, specify the desired stock length or a desired interval length to cut the pipe run at multiple locations. 5. Under Miscellaneous Options, click Joint Fitting and select the type of fitting from the list. If the selected joint fitting is a flange, the Weld Type options are not accessible. The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to that fitting. You can change this code by selecting from the list. If the joint fitting specified is a sleeve or coupling with welding end types, under Weld Type, select one of the following options. The weld attribute is automatically associated to the inlet port of the joint fitting. o

Shop-Field—The joint fitting is inserted with its far point aligned to the cut location and cut location has a Field Weld (FW) attribute.

o

Shop-Shop—The joint fitting is inserted with its far point aligned to the cut location and cut location has a Shop Weld (SW) attribute.

o

Field-Shop—The joint fitting is inserted with its near point aligned to the cut location and cut location has a Field Weld (FW) attribute.

Note: In all of these Weld Type options, the welding at the other side of the fitting is a Shop Weld. 6. To insert the cut, do one of the following: Click to insert cuts at the defined location, generate the specified weld attribute, and close the Cut Pipe dialog box. or Click to insert cuts at the defined location, generate the specified weld attribute, and then continue inserting cuts with the Cut Pipe dialog box.

To Cut Parallel Pipes at Locations Identical to the Reference Pipe Run You can cut a group of parallel pipe runs in a single operation. All cuts on the selected parallel pipe runs are created at locations that are identical to the locations of cuts on the reference pipe run. Pro/PIPING allows you to automatically stagger the parallel pipe cuts if the joint fittings on a cut are interfering with the joint fittings on another parallel pipe cut. The cuts on the target runs use a weld and joint fitting that is similar to the corresponding cut on the reference pipe run. 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Cut Pipe. The Cut Pipe dialog box opens.

to cut parallel pipe runs at locations identical to locations on the 2. Click reference pipe run. 231


3. Select a pipe segment that is part of a pipe run that has one or many pipe cuts. The pipeline label is displayed under Select Reference Pipe Run as read-only information. Note: Pro/PIPING does not allow selection of pipe segments of a pipe run that has no pipe cuts on it. 4. Select the pipe runs parallel to the reference pipe run. The pipeline label of the selected pipe segments is displayed under Select Target Pipe Run(s) as readonly information. Note: Pro/PIPING does not allow selection of pipe runs that are not parallel to the reference pipe run. 5. Under Parallel Pipe Cutting, specify the following options: o

Min. Clearance—Specify a value for the minimum clearance checking between joint fittings. Type a new value to override the default value specified by the piping_joint_fitting_clearance configuration option. This value is used for the automatic clearance checking.

o

Offset Distance—Specify a value for staggering pipe cuts that are associated with joint fittings. If joint fittings associated to cuts on parallel pipelines interfere with each other, the cuts are staggered by the specified distance to avoid the interference.

6. To insert cuts on parallel pipe runs at locations identical to locations on the reference pipe run, do one of the following: Click box.

to insert cuts on the parallel pipe runs and close the Cut Pipe dialog

or Click to insert cuts on the parallel pipe runs and then continue inserting cuts with the Cut Pipe dialog box.

To Cut Parallel Pipes at Specified Interval Length Use the following procedure to cut a group of parallel pipe runs in a single operation. All cuts on the selected parallel pipe runs are created at locations that are at the specified interval length. Pro/PIPING allows you to automatically stagger the parallel pipe cuts if the joint fittings on a cut that is interfering with the joint fittings on another parallel pipe cut. The cuts on the target runs use a weld and joint fitting that is similar to the corresponding cut on the reference pipe run. 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Cut Pipe. The Cut Pipe dialog box opens.

2. Click the Parallel Interval Length Cutting option the specified interval length.

to cut parallel pipe runs at

3. Under Select Pipe Segments, select the parallel pipe segments to cut.

232


4. Under Cut Placement Option, type a value in the Interval Length box to cut the parallel pipe runs at the specified intervals. The first selected pipe run is cut at the specified interval, and then all other selected pipe runs are cut at similar locations as that of the first run. The cuts on parallel pipe runs are aligned to the cuts on the first pipe run. 5. To insert a joint fitting at the cut, under Miscellaneous Options, select Joint Fitting and specify the joint fitting name. The default is no joint fitting. o

The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to that fitting. You can change this code by selecting from the list.

o

Under Weld Type, the Field option is selected by default. If it is not, select it to assign a field weld attribute to this cut. Field Welds with unique identification numbers will be created at each cut location.

6. Under Parallel Pipe Cutting, specify the following options: o

Min. Clearance—Specify a value for clearance checking between flange joint fittings. Type a new value to override the default value specified by the piping_joint_fitting_clearance configuration option. This value is used for the automatic clearance checking.

o

Offset Distance—Specify a value for staggering pipe cuts that are associated with joint fittings. If joint fittings associated to cuts on parallel pipelines interfere with each other, the cuts are staggered by the specified distance to avoid the interference.

Tip: Selecting a Reference Pipe Run for Cutting Parallel Pipes Cuts on the target pipe runs are created using the placement type information associated with the corresponding cut on the reference pipe run. To create cuts on the target runs at locations identical to locations on the reference run: •

Select only those pipe runs that are parallel to the reference run as the target runs.

•

Select the pipe run with multiple cuts as the reference run. All these cuts on the reference run must be created using the length, ratio, offset from corner, offset from plane, or offset from fitting port icons available in the Cut Pipe dialog box. If the cuts on the reference run are created using any other placement type option, Pro/PIPING creates cuts on the target runs using the default Length placement type option.

233


Example: Parallel Pipe Piece Cutting The following figure shows four parallel runs. The 100A-MS-STEAM-0001 pipe run has five pipe piece cuts: FW1, SW1, SW2, FW2, and FW3.

•

To create cuts on the other three parallel pipe runs, select Fabrication > Cut Pipe from the PIPING menu.

•

Click

•

Select the 100A-MS-STEAM-0001 pipe run as the reference pipe run because it contains the pipe piece cuts.

•

Select the pipe runs that are parallel to the reference pipe run as target pipe runs for creating new cuts.

•

Click

from the Cut Pipe dialog box.

to create the cuts.

Pro/PIPING creates cuts on the selected parallel target pipe runs at locations identical to locations on the reference pipe run as shown in the following figure.

234


Checking the Clearance between the Pipe Cuts with Flanged Fittings You can cut a set of pipe runs parallel to the reference pipe run in a single operation. All cuts are created at locations identical to locations on the reference pipe run. If a target run is very close to the reference run or another target run, and the cut is created at an identical location, the flange fittings attached to the parallel cuts may interfere with each other and result in clash depending on the available clearance. To avoid such clashes, Pro/PIPING automatically checks the clearance based on the minimum clearance value for the joint fitting. Use the piping_joint_fitting_clearance configuration option to specify the default value for the minimum clearance. Specify the value in the current assembly units. The identical cut locations on the parallel pipe runs can be staggered based on the status of clearance checking. The following figure shows the alignment of the pipe cut locations between pipe runs A and B, where the spacing between the joint fittings on pipe run is greater than the minimum clearance value.

1 Pipe run A 2 Actual clearance 3 Pipe run B In the preceding example, the actual clearance is greater than the minimum clearance value. Therefore, the cuts and joint fittings are aligned one below the other. If the actual clearance is less than the specified minimum clearance, the cuts on the target pipe runs are staggered by the value specified for the offset distance.

235


Staggering of Cuts With Joint Fitting To avoid a clash due to inadequate clearance between joint fittings, cuts can be staggered during the cutting of parallel pipes. The value specified for Offset Distance on the Cut Pipe dialog box for the parallel pipes is used to stagger the cuts. When a joint fitting interference is detected, the fitting that is causing the violation is highlighted. You are prompted to stagger the cut location. Select Yes to insert the staggered cut or select No to abort the cut insertion. Further, if you have chosen to insert the staggered cut and the resultant staggered location also violates the clearance check, you are prompted whether to continue or abort the cut insertion. If you select Yes, the cut is inserted at the staggered location and if you select No the cut insertion is aborted. Use the piping_joint_fitting_offset configuration option to specify the default offset value. Specify the offset value in the current assembly units. The following figure shows a pipe cut stagger between pipe runs A, B, and C as the spacing between the joint fitting on these pipe runs is less than the minimum clearance value.

1 Offset 2 Pipe run A 3 Actual clearance 4 Pipe run B 5 Pipe run C

236


In the preceding figure, the cut locations on adjacent pipe runs, that is, pipe run A and pipe run B are staggered. The cut locations on alternate pipe runs, that is, pipe run A and pipe run C are aligned.

Assigning FLANGE_OD as a Dimension or Part Parameter To check the minimum clearance between adjacent flanges when creating a fitting library for flange fittings, assign FLANGE_OD as the dimension name or as a fitting part parameter for the outer diameter of the flange. You must assign this dimension name or part parameter even when you use the fitting of type coupling as a joint fitting, even though it is not a flange. If the FLANGE_OD dimension is not found in a joint fitting, the FLANGE_OD fitting part parameter is checked. In case you have not assigned both the FLANGE_OD dimension as well as the FLANGE_OD fitting part parameter, the outer diameter of the pipe is used for minimum clearance checking.

To Cut Pipes Associated With a Block Use the following procedure to cut all pipe segments associated with a block. The cuts are created on pipe segments at locations where the pipe segments intersect the block boundary. Pro/PIPING automatically determines the pipe piece adjustment length at a block boundary based on the type of the joint fitting and associates it with the pipe segment upstream to the cut location. 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Cut Pipe. The Cut Pipe dialog box opens.

2. Click boundary.

to cut the pipe segments intersecting with the associated block

3. Under Select Block, select the name of a block or zone from the list. The labels of all the pipelines that intersect with the selected block are displayed under Pipelines To Be Cut. All the listed pipelines under Pipelines To Be Cut are verified for intersection with the selected block and intersecting locations are highlighted. Information about the intersections is also displayed in the message window. When a pipeline is selected from the list, it is highlighted in the model. 4. To insert a joint fitting at the cut, under Miscellaneous Options, select Joint Fitting and specify the joint fitting name. The default is no joint fitting. The Bolt Nut Code box displays a default bolt nut code assigned to that fitting. You can change this code by selecting another code from the list. 5. To assign a field weld attribute to this cut, under Weld Type, select the Field or Shop option. The default is Field.

237


6. To insert cuts on the selected pipe segments at locations intersecting with the block boundary, do one of the following: Click to insert cuts at the highlighted locations, generate the specified weld attribute, and close the Cut Pipe dialog box. or Click to insert cuts at the highlighted locations, generate the specified weld attribute, and then continue inserting cuts with the Cut Pipe dialog box.

Example: Block Boundary Based Pipe Piece Cutting The following figure shows a set of pipelines (magenta) within the block BLOCK1002A. The boundaries of the block are highlighted. The model tree also shows some other blocks such as BLOCK1001, BLOCK1002B, and BLOCK1003.

Use the following procedure to create pipe piece cuttings based on the block boundary: •

Select PIPING > Fabrication > Cut Pipe.

•

Click

•

Select BlOCK1002A from the Select Block selection list.

to cut pipe pieces based on the block boundary.

Pro/PIPING selects all pipelines in the specified block for creation of the pipe piece cuts. The labels of all the pipelines that intersect with the selected block are displayed under Pipelines To Be Cut.

238


All locations where the pipelines intersect with the block boundary are highlighted as shown in the following figure.

Information such as the total number of intersections and details of the intersections is displayed in the message window as shown:

•

o

2 intersections found for the pipeline 100A-MS-STEAM-0001.

o


o


o


o


o

No intersections found for the pipeline 50A-MS-STEAM-2003.

o

Total intersections found : 10

Select to create a pipe piece cuttings as shown in the following figure. The pipe pieces are created at locations where pipeline intersect block boundary.

239


These cut point locations depend on the block boundaries. The dimension for the cut points is not displayed in the figure because the driving dimensions of the block boundary geometry control the locations of these cut points.

For example, the preceding figure shows the dimension of the block boundaries ADTM1 and ADTM2, The dimension of both the boundaries is 75.00.

240


If you modify the dimension of ADTM1 and ADTM2 as 40.00 and 100.00 respectively, the cut points on those boundaries also move along with the bounding geometry as shown in the following figure.

Using Joint Fittings By default, a joint fitting is not inserted at pipe cut piece location unless you specify it. Use the Joint Fitting option in the Cut Pipe dialog box to automatically insert a joint fitting at the piece cut location. If more than one joint fitting is appropriate for a particular cut location, you can select a joint fitting from the list of Joint Fittings. If you choose flange as a joint fitting, the Weld Type options are not enabled. For Parallel Pipe Cuts When cutting a set of parallel pipe runs, if the cut on the reference pipe run has a joint fitting, Pro/PIPING creates identical cuts on the target pipe runs with a similar joint fitting. To select an appropriate joint fitting for the target pipe run, the reference joint fitting suitable for the size and specification of the target pipe run is used. If a joint fitting with the specified selection name does not exist in the target pipeline's specification, the cut is created without the joint fitting. For Pipe Cuts at Block Boundary Intersection When cutting pipelines intersecting with the block boundary a list of all valid fitting selection names for all the selected pipe segments is displayed in the Joint Fitting selection list. You can select any fitting from the list for all the cuts. 241


However, if the specified fitting selection name is not valid for the pipe specification and size at any of the pipe cut locations, Pro/PIPING does not create the cut and displays a warning message. To process such pipe segments, you can again specify a valid fitting selection name.

Assigning a Weld Type You can assign a shop weld attribute or field weld attribute at pipe piece cut locations. If a welded sleeve or coupling is automatically inserted during the pipe piece cutting process, then a shop-field weld is automatically assigned to the cut location based on the weld option currently specified. When a flange is specified for automatic joint fitting insertion, the weld assignment option is disabled. The field weld information is used by the Pipe Spool Generation functionality to generate pipe spools and number them. The Piping Isometric Drawing functionality uses both the shop weld and field weld information to mark the shop or field welds on isometric drawings. The shop or field welds are graphically represented and have a unique identification number, which is automatically generated. For example, shop weld numbers are SW1, SW2, and so on. At any time during modeling, click hide the shop or field welds.

on the Pro/ENGINEER toolbar to display or

When cutting a set of parallel pipes at a location identical to the location on the reference pipe, the cut on the target segment is created with the same weld type as that of the corresponding cut on the reference segment.

To Delete a Pipe Piece Cut Use this procedure to delete a single pipe cut piece or to delete all cuts on a single segment, overall pipe run, entire pipeline, or in a block. 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Delete Cut. The Delete Cut dialog box opens. 2. Based on the location of the cuts to be deleted, do one of the following:

242

o

Select Selected Cut to delete only the selected cut. The name of the selected cut location is displayed under Select Pipe Cut.

o

Select All Cuts in Pipe Segment to delete the cuts on a pipe segment. Select a pipe segment on the model. The pipeline label of the selected pipe segment and the ID of the pipe segment are displayed under Select Pipe Segment.

o

Select All Cuts in Pipe Run to delete all the cuts existing on a pipe run. Select a pipe run on the model. The pipeline label of the selected pipe segment and the ID of the pipe segment are displayed under Select Pipe Segment.


The pipe run includes all pipe segments between two consecutive free ends along a straight line, or a free end and a corner, or a corner and a free end, or a corner and another corner of a pipeline.

o

Select All Cuts at Block Boundary to delete all cuts associated with a block. Under Select Block Name, select a block name from the list.

o

Select All Cuts on Pipeline to delete the cuts in an entire pipeline. Select any pipe segment on the pipeline whose cuts are to be deleted. The pipeline label of the selected pipe segment is displayed under Select Pipeline.

3. To delete the selected cuts, do one of the following: o

Click box.

o

Click to delete the selected cuts. The pipeline automatically repaints with the cut deleted and the Delete Cut dialog box remains open to enable you to delete any more cuts.

to delete all the selected cuts and close the Delete Cut dialog

Generating Pipe Spools About Spool Generation You can use the spool functionality to: •

Create spool labels for one or more selected pipelines or spools.

•

Modify spool labels for a selected pipeline or spool.

•

Delete spool labels for one or more selected pipelines or spools.

Each pipe spool label that is created has a unique spool number. The spool label and its number are stored in the model and are used during the pipe spool piece drawing generation, the installation drawing generation, and reporting.

To Create a Spool Label for a Pipeline or a Spool Segment 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Spool. Select Create from the Spool menu that appears. The Create Spool dialog box opens. 2. To create spool labels for a pipeline, under Select pipeline(s), select one or more pipelines for which you want to create spool labels. To create spool labels for spool segments, select one or more spool segments under Select spool(s). You can select the required pipelines or spool segments from the graphics window or from the Piping System Tree. Under Options, Pipeline is selected by default that enables you to select pipelines. Click Spool to select individual spool segments instead of pipelines.

243


3. Under Parameters, specify the following: o

If required, specify a prefix for the spool label in the Prefix box to substitute the value specified for the pipeline_spool_label_format configuration option. The default value is 0.

o

If required, specify a suffix for the spool label in the Suffix box to substitute the value specified for the pipeline_spool_label_format configuration option.

o

Specify a start number in the Number box for the spool labels that you want to create. The default value is 01. Note: The value 01 means that a two-digit spool label number is created with a leading zero. If you want to assign a three-digit spool label number, specify 001.

o

Specify an increment value for the generated spool label number in the Increment box. The default value is 1. If you have selected a spool segment instead of a pipeline to create spool which is available adjacent to the Prefix, Suffix, labels, you can click and the Number boxes, to lock the boxes. If you lock these boxes, you cannot edit the corresponding values unless you use the Modify Spool dialog box to unlock the boxes.

4. Click to create spool labels for the selected pipelines or spool segments and close the Create Spool dialog box. or Click

to create the spools and continue using the Create Spool dialog box.

To Modify a Spool Label for a Pipeline or a Spool Segment 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Spool. Select Modify from the Spool menu that appears. The Modify Spool dialog box opens. 2. To modify spool labels for a pipeline, under Select pipeline, select the required pipeline. To modify spool labels for a spool segment, select the required spool segment under Select spool. You can select the pipeline or spool segment from the graphics window or from the Piping System Tree. By default, Pipeline is selected under Options. Click Spool to select a spool segment instead of a pipeline under Options. 3. Under Parameters specify the following:

244

o

Specify a new prefix in the Prefix box to substitute the existing value.

o

Specify a new suffix in the Suffix box to substitute the existing value.

o

Specify a new start number in the Number box for the spool label that you want to modify.


Specify a new increment value for the spool label number in the Increment box.

o

If you have selected a spool segment instead of a pipeline to modify spool labels, you can click adjacent to the Prefix, Suffix, and the Number boxes to unlock the boxes, if they are locked.

4. Click to modify spool labels for the selected pipelines or spool segments and close the Modify Spool dialog box. or Click

to create the spools and continue using the Modify Spool dialog box.

To Delete a Spool Label for a Pipeline or a Spool Segment 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Spool. Select Delete from the Spool menu that appears. The Delete Spool dialog box opens. 2. To delete spool labels for a pipeline, under Select pipeline(s), select one or more pipelines for which you want to delete spool labels. To delete spool labels for a spool segment, select one or more spool segments under Select spool(s). Select the pipelines or spool segments from the graphics window or from the Piping System Tree. Under Options, Pipeline is selected by default. Click Spool to delete spool labels for individual spool segments instead of pipelines. 3. Under Parameters, click the Delete the locked spools check box to delete spools that are locked previously using the Create Spool or Modify Spool dialog box. 4. Click

to delete the selected pipeline or spool segment.

or Click

to delete the spool and continue using the Delete Spool dialog box.

About Simplified Spool Representation The simplified representation of a spool is generated automatically when you create spool labels. This simplified spool version is updated when you modify spool labels and is deleted when you delete spool labels. The name of the simplified spool corresponds to the name of the generated spool label.

245


To Display a Simplified Spool 1. Click opens.

, or click View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box

Under Names, all the pipeline spool components are displayed and Master Rep is selected by default. 2. Double-click a spool component to display the simplified representation of the selected spool component in the graphics window.

Pipe Insulation About Pipeline Insulation (Spec-Driven) With Pro/PIPING you can assign insulation to a pipeline, part of a pipeline, and fittings. After you assign the insulation, Pro/PIPING creates insulation features that can be accessed in the Pro/ENGINEER Model Tree. You can perform the following insulation tasks at any time in the piping design process: •

Assign insulation to an entire pipeline during pipeline creation or during piping design.

•

Assign insulation to any part of a selected pipeline. Target and insulate specific pipeline areas.

•

Modify any insulation assignment in your piping system.

•

Delete any insulation assignment in your piping system.

•

Create quilt representations of insulation for immediate graphical identification and confirmation.

•

Generate detailed insulation reports for further insulation analysis.

To Assign Insulation during Pipeline Creation (Spec-Driven) Note: You can only assign insulation to an entire pipeline using this method. 1. Click PIPING > Pipeline > Create/Route. The Create Pipeline dialog box opens. 2. Under Pipeline Label, select the applicable pipeline label information. 3. If an insulation code was assigned to the selected specification in the Specification Directory (database) file, the Insulation box displays the code. You can select another insulation code but you must select an insulation code. If an insulation code was not assigned to the selected specification in the Specification Directory (database) file, click the Insulation check box and select an insulation code from the list.

246


to save the selections. Pro/PIPING saves the insulation data in an 4. Click insulation feature in the active assembly. 5. Retrieve insulation information (PIPING > Info) to view the assigned insulation data. Note: •

•

The following Specification Database files must be populated with insulation data in order to assign insulation to specification-driven pipelines: o

Insulation Directory file (Project Data file) must contain records for the insulation codes.

o

Insulation MCAT file (Master Catalog file) that is assigned to an insulation code must contain insulation data.

Optionally, Pro/PIPING can create insulation quilts after you create pipe solids.

To Modify Insulation Assigned to a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) Pro/PIPING allows you to modify the insulation assigned to an entire specificationdriven pipeline or assign insulation to an entire uninsulated pipeline. You can add or modify insulation at any time. However, you cannot use this procedure to delete insulation or modify insulation assigned to part of a pipeline. 1. Click PIPING > Modify Pipe. The Modify Pipeline dialog box opens. 2. Under Active Assembly, Pro/PIPING displays the current active assembly. If the pipeline to insulate is in a different assembly, click and select the assembly that contains the pipeline. You can select the assembly from either the Model Tree or the Piping System Tree, or by selecting the pipeline in the graphics window. 3. Under Modify Options, click Edit Pipeline. The Edit Pipeline dialog box opens. 4. If active assembly contains multiple pipelines, select the pipeline to insulate from the Select Pipeline box. 5. Click the Label tab. 6. Under Pipeline Label, modify the insulation code for the selected pipeline. Two conditions apply for insulation modification: o

If an insulation code was assigned to the pipeline, the Insulation box displays the code. You can select another insulation code from the list to change the insulation.

o

If an insulation code was not assigned to the pipeline, select the Insulation check box and select an insulation code from the list to insulate the pipeline.

7. Click to save the selections. Pro/PIPING modifies the insulation data in the insulation feature in the active assembly.

247


8. Retrieve insulation information (PIPING > Info) to view the assigned insulation data. 9. Click PIPING > Regenerate to regenerate the assembly and update the model display. Note: •

•


Insulation Directory file (Project Data file) must contain records for the insulation codes.

o

Insulation MCAT file (Master Catalog file) that is assigned to an insulation code must contain insulation data.


To Delete Insulation (Spec-Driven) Use the following methods to delete insulation assigned to pipelines: •

To delete the insulation assigned to a part of a pipeline, click PIPING > Fabrication > Delete Insul and select the insulation to be deleted from the graphics window.

•

To delete the insulation assigned to the entire pipeline: a. Click PIPING > Modify Pipe. The Modify Pipeline dialog box opens. b. Under Active Assembly select the active assembly. c. Under Modify Options, select Edit Pipeline. The Edit Pipeline dialog box opens. d. Clear the Insulation option to delete the insulation.

Using the Model Tree to Delete Insulation 1. Open the assembly containing the pipeline and the insulation to be deleted. 2. Click

. The Model Tree opens.

3. In the Model Tree, locate the assembly containing the insulated pipeline and corresponding the insulation feature. You can delete the following types of insulation features:

248

o

Insulation Features—Stores the insulation data (codes, names, thickness, sizes, and so on) for a pipeline. Pro/PIPING identifies the insulation features by insulation code.

o

Insulation Segment Features—Stores the start and end points for insulation on part of a pipe segment. Note that the insulation segment feature is a child of the related insulation feature. If you delete an insulation feature, Pro/PIPING deletes all related children, including the


insulation segment feature, if applicable. If you delete the insulation feature from an insulated pipeline that also contains a partially insulated segment, all insulation data will be deleted. Note: If you have assigned insulation to a pipeline, the entire pipeline is the child of the corresponding insulation feature. In such a case, if you delete an insulation feature, the entire pipeline is deleted.

To Report Insulation Information (Spec-Driven) 1. Assign insulation to a pipeline or part of a pipeline. 2. Click PIPING > Info. The Report Pipeline dialog box opens. 3. Click

, or click Type and select Insulation.

4. Under Select pipeline(s), select an insulated pipeline or insulated pipe segment from which to retrieve information. You can select from either the Model Tree, the Piping System Tree, or the graphics window. Pro/PIPING displays the insulation information under Preview Info. You can either scroll to view the entire report or click separate INFORMATION WINDOW.

and view the report in the

About Assigning Insulation to Part of a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) Pro/PIPING allows you to assign insulation to part of a pipeline (insulation segment) using the Create Insulation dialog box (PIPING > Fabrication > Insulation). During piping design, the following special cases can arise and necessitate an insulation segment: •

Pipelines and fittings not normally insulated require insulation inside special areas such as purifier rooms.

•

Pipelines near equipments can condense when exposed to extreme temperatures. Hence they must be insulated to prevent damage.

To Assign Insulation to Part of a Pipeline (Spec-Driven) 1. Click PIPING > Active Asm and select the active assembly that contains the pipeline that you want to partially insulate. 2. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Insulation. The Create Insulation dialog box opens. The Start option under Insulation Segment Points is selected by default. 3. Follow these steps to select insulation start and end points. Start and end points must be on the same pipeline: a. Under Select Start Point, click and select a pipe segment to specify the insulation start point. Crosshairs indicate the start point on the pipe

249


segment, and the pipe segment ID is displayed in the Select Start Point box. b. Click End under Insulation Segment Points. c. Under Select End Point, click and select the insulation end point. Crosshairs indicate the end point on the pipe segment, and the pipe segment ID is displayed in the Select End Point box. 4. Under Location Type, select one of the following to specify both start and end point placement. Note: You must select Start and End under Insulation Segment Points to place the appropriate points.

—Specifies the distance of the start or end point from the pipe segment's upstream end.

—Specifies the distance ratio of the start or end point from the pipe segment's upstream end. Note: In the above two cases, by default, Pro/PIPING considers the reference available under Location location from the start end of the pipe segment. Click Parameter to flip the location with reference to the end of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING changes

to


—Places a start or end point on the pipe segment perpendicular to that pipe segment. Note: The pipe segment's start point must be perpendicular to the pipe segment's end point to make this option available.

—Places a start or end point from a specified datum plane. The datum plane must be perpendicular to the start or end point pipe segment. Pro/PIPING creates a reference to the datum plane.

—Places a start or end point from a specified fitting. The selected fitting must exist in the same pipeline and in the same straight pipe piece. Click Location Parameter to flip the reference port.

under

5. Under Location Parameter, specify the point location parameters based on the selected placement option. Use the thumb wheel to move the point placement or enter a value in the thumb wheel box for exact placement.

250


If you clicked, , select a datum plane from the graphics window. Pro/PIPING displays the datum plane name in the Location Parameter box. 6. Under Insulation Parameters, select an insulation code to assign insulation between the specified placement points. 7. Click

to assign the insulation to the pipe segment.

Note: •

•


The Insulation Directory file (Project Data file) must contain records for the insulation codes.

o

The Insulation MCAT file (Master Catalog file) that is assigned to an insulation code must contain insulation data.


To Redefine Insulation Assigned to a Part of a Pipeline (SpecDriven) Pro/PIPING creates insulation segment features after you assign insulation to a part of a pipeline. You can redefine insulation segment features at any time during the piping design process. 1. Open the assembly associated with the pipeline containing the insulation segment feature to be redefined. 2. Click

. The Model Tree opens.

3. In the Model Tree, locate the insulation segment feature to redefine. The Model Tree lists the following insulation features: o

Insulation Features—Stores the insulation data such as codes, names, thickness, sizes, and so on for a pipeline. Pro/PIPING identifies the insulation features by the insulation code. You cannot redefine insulation features from the Model Tree. You must modify the specification database insulation files.

o

Insulation Segment Features—Stores the start and end points for insulation on a part of a pipe segment.

Using the Model Tree to Redefine Insulation 1. Select the Insulation Segment feature to redefine from the Model Tree. The feature is highlighted on the pipeline in the graphics window. Right-click and a shortcut menu appears.

251


2. Click Edit Definition. The Redefine Insulation dialog box opens with the insulation segment selected. 3. Select Start under Insulation Segment Points and perform any of the following tasks: o

Change the insulation start point. Under Select Start Point, click and select a pipe segment to specify the insulation start point. Crosshairs indicate the start point on the pipe segment and the pipe segment ID is displayed in the Select Start Point box.

o

Change the insulation end point. Select End under Insulation Segment Points. Under Select End Point, click and select the insulation end point. Crosshairs indicate the end point on the pipe segment and the pipe segment ID is displayed in the Select End Point box.

o

Change the start and end point placement. Under Location Type, select one of the following to specify both start and end point placement. You must select Start and End under Insulation Segment Points to place the appropriate points:

—Specifies the distance of the start or end point distance from the pipe segment's upstream end.

—Specifies the distance ratio of the start or end point from the pipe segment's upstream end.

—Places a start or end point on the pipe segment perpendicular to that pipe segment. The pipe segment's start point must be perpendicular to the pipe segment's end point to make this option available.

—Places a start or end point from a specified datum plane. The datum plane must be perpendicular to the pipe segment's start or end point. Pro/PIPING creates a reference to the datum plane.

—Places a start or end point from a specified fitting. The selected fitting must exist in the same pipeline and in the same straight pipe piece. Under Location Parameter, specify the point location parameters based on the selected placement option. Use the thumb wheel to move the point placement or enter a value in the thumb wheel box for exact placement.

252


If you clicked , select a datum plane from the graphics window. Pro/PIPING displays the datum plane name in the Location Parameter box. o

Change the insulation. Under Insulation Parameters, select a new insulation code to assign new insulation between the specified placement points.

4. Click to assign new insulation to the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING creates a new insulation feature and reassigns the insulation segment feature to it. Note: •


The Insulation Directory file (Project Data file) must contain records for the insulation codes.

o

The Insulation MCAT file (Master Catalog file) that is assigned to an insulation code must contain insulation data.

•

The Model Tree must display features to redefine insulation segment features from the Model Tree. Click Settings > Tree Filters. The Model Tree Items dialog box opens. Under Display, click the Features check box and click OK.

•


Creating Pipe Solids About Pipe Solids A pipe solid is the solid geometry that you create inside a solid part using the Pipe Solid generation functionality. Pro/PIPING automatically creates a new solid part if you use any of the following modeling functions to update a pipeline that has associated pipe solid geometry: •

Pipeline routing

•

Fitting insertion, deletion, redefinition, replacement

•

Group fitting insertion

•

Pipeline modification

•

Pipeline corner modification

•

Pipe cutting and cut deletion

253


To Create or Erase a Pipe Solid 1. Click PIPING > Fabrication > Pipe Solid. The Pipe Solid dialog box opens. 2. Under Select Pipelines/Segments, select one of the following: o

Pipelines—Selects one or more pipelines in an assembly that is active or not active.

o

Segments—Selects one or more segments in an assembly that is active or not active. Note: If you select segments to create pipe solids, you cannot select fitting components.

If you select a piping system node, all pipelines in this piping system are selected. 3. Under Select Insulation Option below the Selected Pipelines/Segments table, select one or both of the following: o

Pipe Solid—Only pipe solids are generated or erased for the selected pipelines or pipe segments.

o

Insulation Quilt—Only insulation quilts are generated or erased for the selected pipelines or pipe segments. You can generate insulation quilts only if you have assigned appropriate insulation parameters to the selected pipelines or pipe segments.

Note: If you select Pipe Solid and Insulation Quilt, Pro/PIPING generates or erases both pipe solids and insulation quilts. The Selected Pipelines/Segments table displays the following information: o

Status—Displays the status of the pipe solid generation. —All pipe segments associated with the selected pipeline or pipe segment have no associated pipe solids. —All pipe segments associated with the selected pipeline or pipe segment have associated pipe solids. —Only a few pipe segments associated with the selected pipeline or pipe segment have associated pipe solids.

o

Pipelines/Segments—Displays the pipeline label for the selected pipelines or pipe segments.

o

Solid Name—Displays the actual part name if the pipe solid has been generated for the selected pipeline or pipe segment. Otherwise, displays a system-generated name based on the pipeline label and the increment number. Note: You can edit the part name of the pipe solid.

254


4. Click

Solid Start Part Name—Displays the name of the solid start part specified by the configuration option, pipeline_solid_start_part_name. You can edit this name. to generate the pipe solid or the insulation quilt.

or Click to generate the pipe solid and the insulation quilt and repeat the Pipe Solid generation operation for a different set of pipelines or pipe segments. or Click

to erase the selected pipe solid or the insulation quilt.

Note: If the selected pipe segments have insulation assigned to them, Pro/PIPING automatically creates insulation quilts during the Pipe Solid generation operation.

Example: Creating Pipe Solids and Insulation Quilts A piping model with three pipelines that have been modeled with appropriate insulation parameters is shown in the next figure.

To generate the required pipe solids and insulation quilts, perform the following steps: 1. Open the Pipe Solid dialog box and select the pipeline 100A-RW-WATER-111-EK using the Pipelines option. 2. Use the Pipelines option again to select Pipe Extend id 46 from the Model Tree. Pro/PIPING selects the entire pipeline 50A-HA-STEAM-1111-ES. 3. Under Select Insulation Option, select both Pipe Solid as well as Insulation Quilt.

255


to generate the required pipe solids and insulation quilts as shown in 4. Click the following figure:

Using the Piping System Tree to Create and Erase Pipe Solids The following figure shows three pipelines that are located under different assemblies. The Piping System Tree is also shown in the figure.

256


Use the previous piping model to perform the following steps: 1. Select the assemblies AIR and STEAM from the piping system tree. 2. Right-click and select Solid > Create from the shortcut menu. The pipe solids and the insulation quilts are generated for all the pipelines located under the AIR and STEAM assemblies as shown in the following figure:

3. Use the same selection as discussed in step 1. Right-click and select Solid > Delete from the shortcut menu. The pipe solids and the insulation quilts are deleted as shown in the following figure:

Schematic-Driven Pipeline Modeling About Schematic-Driven Pipeline Modeling Schematic-driven pipeline modeling is 3D pipeline modeling based on 2D Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) data created in the Routed Systems Designer. This P&ID data or schematic information is stored in an XML file. During pipeline creation, pipeline routing, and fitting insertion, schematic-driven pipeline modeling uses the information of a pipeline from the XML file to avoid inconsistencies between the 2D and the 3D model.

257


You can use the schematic information in the XML file only if: •

The piping_schematic_driven configuration option is set to yes.

•

The piping design mode is specification-driven.

To specify an absolute path to be used as the start location for XML file selection and look-up, set the piping_schematic_xml_dir configuration option to the required path. The default path for the XML file is the Pro/ENGINEER working directory.

About Associating an XML File with a Pipeline You can associate a pipeline with an XML file using the Edit Pipeline dialog box if the piping_schematic_driven configuration option is set to yes. You can associate a pipeline with a schematic pipeline in XML if: •

The pipeline is created in the nonschematic mode.

•

The XML file is changed.

About Routed Systems Designer Component Properties in Schematic-Driven Pipeline Modeling The Routed Systems Designer component properties that are used during schematicdriven modeling are listed below.

Pipelines The SPEC, SIZE, SCHEDULE, MNEMONIC and NUMBER properties associated with a pipeline label are displayed when you click Label in the Create Pipeline dialog box. The OPER_PRESSURE, OPER_TEMPERATURE, DESIGN_PRESSURE, and DESIGN_TEMPERATURE properties are available when you click the Parameters tab in the Create Pipeline dialog box. Any other property defined in XML is read in the Defined tab. NAME_FORMAT—Format used for naming a pipeline. Functions similarly as the pipeline_label_format configuration option. A typical value can be -.

Equipment and Nozzles •

CATEGORY—To classify an Routed Systems Designer component as equipment, specify CATEGORY = EQUIPMENT. To classify a Routed Systems Designer component as a nozzle, specify CATEGORY = NOZZLE.

•

MODEL_NAME—Must be same as the Pro/ENGINEER part name. The part name is displayed in the Component box in the Pipeline Designation dialog box.

•

REF_DES—If a value is assigned to this parameter in Routed Systems Designer, the same value is exported in XML. If the value is not defined in Routed Systems Designer, the value of the FULL_NAME property is assigned to REF_DES. This value is displayed in the Designator box in the Pipeline Designation dialog box.

258


Note: If a pipeline connects two equipment that have the same REF_DES value, only one of the equipment is listed during designation. Hence, you must always assign a unique value to the REF_DES parameter. •

ENTRY_PORT—This Routed Systems Designer property is applied to a coordinate csys of a nozzle or an equipment. If the value of this parameter matches the Pro/ENGINEER csys name, then that csys in Pro/ENGINEER is highlighted during the routing of that pipeline.

Fittings •

CATEGORY—Must be same as the CATEGORY value stored in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd file. The CATEGORY value controls the activation of the fitting category icons under Select Fitting Category in the Insert Fitting dialog box.

•

SNAME—Must be same as the SNAME value stored in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd file for that fitting. The SNAME value is displayed in the Selection Name list for a category in the Insert Fitting dialog box.

•

SIZE—Fittings are filtered according to the size of the selected segment if you have specified the Routed Systems Designer component property, SIZE, for that fitting in the XML file. If a fitting does not have the Routed Systems Designer component property, SIZE, then that fitting is always available for insertion irrespective of the selected segment size.

•

NSIZE—Required while inserting reducers. The NSIZE value in the XML file is the default value while inserting the reducer. You can change the value of the NSIZE parameter during insertion. Note: You can also use the NEW_SIZE parameter instead of the NSIZE parameter.

•

BSIZE—The BSIZE value is useful during branch fitting or drain valve insertion. This is the default branch size value when you insert a particular branch fitting or drain valve. Note: You can also use the BRANCH_SIZE parameter instead of the BSIZE parameter.

•

SPEC—If you have specified SPEC in the XML file and if it is different from the selected pipe segment, the Specification check box is selected by default and the list becomes available.

•

VALVE_NUMBER—If you have specified the VALVENUMBER parameter in the XML file, a value is displayed as editable text in the Valve Number box in the Insert Fitting dialog box.

•

ENTRY_PORT—Same as for equipment and nozzles.

•

REF_DES—Same as for equipment and nozzles.

•

MODEL_NAME—Same as for equipment and nozzles.

259


Branches CATEGORY—Specify CATEGORY = BRANCH to classify a Routed Systems Designer component as a branch. Select a branch point or fitting to designate the branch component.

To Designate Schematic Information 1. Click PIPING > Designation. The Pipeline Designation dialog box opens. 2. Under Select Pipeline, click

and select an existing pipeline.

3. Under Select Schematic Pipeline, click to select the appropriate XML file from the directory specified by the piping_schematic_xml_dir configuration option. You can also select an XML file from any other directory. 4. Under Select Constrict Assembly, the top level assembly is selected by default to search for the components. Click search of the components.

to select another assembly to restrict the

5. Select the appropriate schematic label to associate the Pro/ENGINEER pipeline with the schematic pipeline. The XML File and Schematic Label boxes are automatically updated. If you change the XML file and the schematic label assigned to the pipeline, the pipeline parameters are not updated. To update these parameters use the Edit Pipeline dialog box. 6. Click the Equipment tab and select the equipment component. The Designate Equipment table has a list of reference designators under Designator. 7. Click to select the equipment component or click component with designated status. Note:

to undesignate the

is enabled only if

o

The Status column shows the status as Missing. In this case, click Options > Allow Mismatch and select the components. The Status column then changes to Manual Match.

o

The Status column shows the status as Multiple. Multiple components are highlighted.

8. If the equipment has nozzles, click and select an equipment list entry. The nozzles specified in the XML file are listed under Designate Nozzles. 9. If the pipeline has fittings, the Fittings tab is enabled. Click under Designate Fittings to designate an inserted fitting from the selected pipeline. A schematically inserted fitting is directly given the designated status. 10. Under Designate Branches, click available TEE fitting. 260

to designate a branch point or an


to store the designations for the pipeline or click to store the 11. Click designated information for the pipeline and start with another pipeline.

Designating Equipment, Nozzles, Fittings, and Branches Designate Equipment, Designate Nozzles, Designate Fittings, and Designate Branches in the Pipeline Designation dialog box have a list of reference designators and equipment components. •

Designator is the value of the refdes property specified in the XML file.

•

Model is the value of the modelname property specified in the XML file. The Model column is not displayed by default. Click Columns > Model to display the Model column.

•

Component is the Pro/PIPING component name. The component name is automatically displayed if the Status column displays the value Auto Match. If the value of the modelname property displayed under the Model column does not match any of the Pro/PIPING component names in a selected assembly, the Status column displays the value Missing. To designate the component manually, click Options > Allow Mismatch and select the required component. The Status column now displays the value Manual Match.

•

The Pro/PIPING assembly is searched for a component having a name as that of the value displayed under the Model column for a row. Based on the search results, one of the following values will be displayed under the Status column: o

Designated—The component is designated and this information is stored in the pipeline.

o

Auto Match—A single instance of the component is found in the Pro/PIPING assembly and is automatically matched.

o

Manual Match—The component has been selected manually.

o

Multiple—Several components with the same name have been found.

o

Missing—A component with the name as that displayed under the Model column is not found.

o

Undesignated—A component that has been undesignated manually.

About Routing a Pipeline Using Schematic Information You can route a pipeline based on the schematic information if the piping_schematic_driven configuration option is set to yes. The schematic information assists the routing operation in the following ways: •

All available start and end terminal locations (Pro/ENGINEER coordinate systems) along with the corresponding equipment or nozzle, are highlighted during routing. The Pro/ENGINEER coordinate systems are highlighted only if the ENTRY_PORT parameter in XML has the same value as the Pro/ENGINEER coordinate system name of the corresponding equipment or nozzle.

261


Terminal locations and models that are already connected are not highlighted.

•

If you select a coordinate system of an equipment other than the designated equipment for a pipeline, a message appears that prompts you to continue or abort the selection. You can ignore the warning message and continue the routing operation from the selected port. Note: If you ignore this warning message for a particular pipeline, perform a schematic check later against the updated schematic information.

About Inserting a Fitting Using Schematic Information You can insert a fitting using schematic information if a pipeline in Pro/PIPING is associated with an appropriate schematic pipeline in XML. The prerequisites to insert a schematic fitting are: •

The XML information for a fitting must contain a CATEGORY parameter that has a value specified in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd file. This value controls the activation of the fitting category icons in the Insert Fitting dialog box after you select a pipe segment.

•

The SNAME parameter must have a value in the piping_mcat_dir.ptd file corresponding to a category. For example, if you specify CATEGORY = VALVE and SNAME = GATE, the fitting category icon for the valve is activated and the Selection Name list displays GATE in the Insert Fitting dialog box.

•

If the XML information for a fitting contains the SIZE parameter, the fitting is available only if the selected pipe segment in Pro/PIPING has a matching size. You can insert an XML fitting that does not have a SIZE parameter irrespective of the selected pipe segment in Pro/PIPING.

These prerequisites are also valid when you insert a group fitting. During the schematic fitting insertion, •

The fitting category icons and the Selection Name list in the Insert Fitting dialog box are updated each time you insert a schematic fitting.

•

Context-sensitive information such as the valve number, new size, and branch size for the selected fitting are displayed based on the information in the schematic information file. Note:

•

o

If the context-sensitive information is not available in the schematic information file, specify appropriate values.

o

You can insert a group fitting using schematic information, using the same method as for inserting a fitting.

When you insert all the available schematic fittings, further fitting insertion is possible only in the nonschematic mode.

262


About Replacing a Fitting Using Schematic Information •

You can replace a schematic fitting with another schematic fitting only if schematic fittings are available for the selected pipe segment.

•

You can replace a schematic fitting with a nonschematic fitting by clearing the XML File check box in the Replace Fitting dialog box. This is possible even if schematic fittings are available for insertion.

•

If no schematic fittings are available when replacing schematic fittings, you can replace fittings in the default nonschematic replacement mode.

Specification-Driven Pipe Drawing About Pipe Drawings (Spec-Driven) Pro/PIPING allows you to create drawings of your piping systems. Drawings enable you to effectively communicate piping system layout and details to piping professionals who fabricate piping materials and assemble piping systems. Pro/PIPING provides an interface to Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN). Using the Generate Isometric dialog box (PIPING > Drawing), you can export material and geometrical information from a Pro/PIPING model to .pcf ISOGEN files. These files enable you to generate Isometric pipe drawings using an Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN) application.

Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN) About Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN) (Spec-Driven) Pro/PIPING provides an ISOGEN interface that allows you to create isometric drawings of pipelines. The Isometric Drawing Generation (ISOGEN) interface exports material and geometrical data from a Pro/PIPING model to a readable ISOGEN .pcf (Piping Component File) format. This format serves as an input to ISOGEN for creating pipeline, spool, and system isometric drawings. Using the Generate Isometric dialog box (PIPING > Drawing) you can create isometric drawings from Pro/PIPING models. You can select pipelines, set up filenames and directories, and export the data to an intermediate .pcf file(s). ISOGEN reads this .pcf file data and generates the isometric drawings in various standard data formats. Note: You must first set the ISOGEN configuration options to use the ISOGEN interface generation tool.

263


To Generate an Isometric Drawing (Spec-Driven) Note: You must first set the ISOGEN configuration options to use the ISOGEN interface generation tool. 1. Click PIPING > Drawing. The Generate Isometric dialog box opens and prompts you to select a pipeline. The Selection tab is selected by default. 2. Under Select Isometric Drawing Type, specify the isometric drawing type. The options are: o

Pipeline—Generates a pipeline isometric for each selected pipeline. Pro/PIPING writes data related to each selected pipeline in a separate PCF file and generates as many PCF files as the number of selected pipelines.

o

Spool—Generates a spool isometric for each selected pipeline. Pro/PIPING writes data of spools belonging to one pipeline into a separate PCF file and generates as many PCF files as the number of selected pipelines.

o

System—Generates a system isometric for each selected pipeline system. For each selected pipeline, the data for connected pipelines is exported to a PCF. If two or more of the selected pipelines belong to one network, Pro/PIPING ignores any pipeline data that has already been exported.

and select a pipeline to generate the 3. Under Select pipeline(s), click isometric. You can select pipeline features or segment features from either the Model Tree, the Piping System Tree, or the graphics window. Pro/PIPING displays all selected pipelines under Select pipeline(s). 4. Under Options, use the following boxes to override any of the ISOGEN configuration options. Note that any changes to these four options will remain in effect throughout the Pro/ENGINEER session unless you change them during the session. o

Output Directory—The value of the config.pro option isogen_output_files_dir appears in the input panel. If you want to store the PCF file in another directory, click . The Select Directory to place output PCFs dialog box opens. Browse for the directory and click Ok. If there is no value for isogen_output_files_dir, this input panel will be blank and all files generated by the interface will be written to the current working directory.

o

ISOGEN File—The value of the config.pro option isogen_mandatory_attr_file appears in the input panel. Click to select a different ISOGEN file. The Select ISOGEN File dialog box opens. Browse for the file and double-click.

264


Symbol Map File—The value of the config.pro option isogen_symbol_map_file appears in the input panel. Click to change to a different symbol map file. The Select Symbol Map File dialog box opens. Browse for the file and double-click.

o

Endtype Map File—The value of the config.pro option isogen_endtype_map_file appears in the input panel. Click to change the endtype map file. The Select Endtype Map File dialog box opens. Browse for the file and double-click.

o

Click Generate One PCF File Per Spool to generate one PCF file for each spool. The default is OFF, that is, Pro/PIPING writes the PCF data of all spools of a pipeline in one PCF file and generates separate PCF files for each selected pipeline.

5. Click the General Attr tab. These attributes are supported by ISOGEN and can be used to determine various isometric drawing options. 6. Under Specify General Attributes, click the System Attr tab. The following fields are optional ISOGEN system attributes: o

Date—Specify the date. Pro/PIPING displays the current system date by default. You can change the value using the format --/--/--. The value entered here is written to the PCF file for the DATE-DMY ISOGEN attribute.

o

Project Identifier—Specify the project number or name.

o

Revision Number—Specify the revision number.

o

Area or Batch—Specify the sections of a project.

o

Replot—Specify the number of isometric drawings to be replotted.

o

Spool Prefix—Specify the spool identifier prefix.

o

Weld Prefix Erection—Specify the erection weld prefix.

o

Weld Prefix Fabrication—Specify the fabrication weld prefix.

o

Weld Prefix General—Specify the weld prefix.

o

Weld Prefix Offshore—Specify the offshore weld prefix.

7. Click the User Attr tab. These are user attributes provided by ISOGEN. Select from the option list to specify the user attributes. The list contains all the available user attributes supported by ISOGEN. They are MISC-SPEC1 to MISCSPEC5 and ATTRIBUTE1 to ATTRIBUTE99. Select an attribute, specify a corresponding value, and ENTER. Pro/PIPING displays the attributes. 8. Click the Pipeline Attr tab. The attributes under Specify Pipeline Attributes are usually applicable to one pipeline but you can also use them for multiple pipelines. ISOGEN supports all of the following attributes, however, not every attribute is available from the Pro/PIPING model.

265


Pipeline Type—Select the pipeline construction type. All the valid types are listed. Note that you should be informed about the other ISOGEN pipeline construction types before changing this value to anything other than General.

o

Bend Radius—Specify the standard pulled bend radius.

o

Painting Spec—Specify the painting specification.

o

Tracing Spec—Specify the tracing specification.

o

Start Coords—Specify the pipeline replot start coordinates.

o

Specific Gravity—Specify the gravity of the pipeline contents.

o

Output File Name—Specify the name of the drawing output file. The value entered is used only when a single pipeline is selected. If pipeline isometric or multiple pipelines are selected, the value is ignored.

o

Highest Part Number—Specify the highest material list part number generated on the previous run of the pipeline.

o

Highest Weld Number—Specify the highest weld number generated on the previous run of the pipeline.

Note: If you select multiple pipelines and data exists on this tabbed page (other than the default General in the Pipeline Type option), a message dialog box opens with following message: Multiple Pipelines Selected. Use data in Pipeline Attr tab for all pipelines? 9. Click Yes to export the data or No (the default) to ignore the data. If you click Yes, the Output File Name attribute is not exported. Click to apply the specified options on the selected pipelines, create the necessary PCF files, and close the dialog box. or Click to apply the specified options on the selected pipelines, create the necessary PCF files, and keep the dialog box open for further selections. or Click

to cancel the action and close the dialog box.

Component Material Description (Spec-Driven) The material description of each extracted Pro/PIPING component appears in the bill of materials section of the isometric drawing. The material description in the PCF file format requires an ITEM CODE and DESCRIPTION as shown below: •

MATERIALS

266


ITEM-CODE data

•

DESCRIPTION data (Single line Description)

•

ITEM-CODE data

•

DESCRIPTION data (Multiple line Description)

•

DESCRIPTION data

Note: •

Pro/PIPING uses the STOCKNO (stock number) as the ITEM-CODE. The STOCKNO uniquely identifies each Pro/PIPING component.

•

The material description is retrieved from the Pipe Material Master Catalog (MCAT) file.

Creating Pipe Component Information (Spec-Driven) The coordinate information of pipe segments and other components is converted to millimeters if the corresponding assembly uses metric units. If the corresponding assembly uses imperial units, the coordinate information of pipe segments and other components is converted to inches. Use the ISOGEN switches to display the units on the isometric drawing during the isometric drawing generation. The nominal size information is extracted from the Pro/PIPING component. The ISOGEN component identifier and the information extracted is shown in the next table. PCF Identifier

Description

BRANCH1-POINT BRANCH2-POINT

Identifies branch points on various components. For example, a typical record using millimeter (mm) coordinates and an inch bore is as follows: BRANCH1-POINT 125.0 25.0 0.0 6 BW Note: The data string after the identifier BRANCH1POINT includes coordinates, a nominal size, and an end type as expected by the PCF file format.

CENTRE-POINT

Identifies the center point on various components. For example, a typical record using millimeter (mm) coordinates and an inch bore is as follows: CENTRE-POINT 125.0 0.0 0.0 Note: The data string after the identifier CENTREPOINT includes coordinates.

267


PCF Identifier

Description

END-POINT

Identifies end points on various components. For example, a record using millimeter (mm) coordinates and an inch bore is as follows: END-POINT 150.0 25.0 0.0 6BW Note: The data string after the identifier ENDPOINT includes coordinates, a nominal size, and an endtype as expected by PCF file format.

SKEY

Valid ISOGEN SKEY (Symbol Key). For example, a record identifying SKEY is as follows: SKEY VGBW

ITEM-CODE

Unique identifier for each component. Pro/PIPING component STOCKNO (stock number) is used as ITEM-CODE. The ITEM-CODE and the description are used to populate the bill of materials. For example, a record identifying ITEM-CODE is as follows: ITEM-CODE GATVAA050

ANGLE

Angle value if the angle is other than 90 or 180 degrees for ELBOW, BEND, OLET, TEE, CROSS, and ELBOW-TEED type components. Angle values are in hundredths of degrees. For example, a record identifying an ANGLE of 60 degrees is as follows: ANGLE 6000

SPINDLEDIRECTION

Direction of Spindle (Operator) on VALVE. Defines primary direction only. Valid directions values are NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST, UP and DOWN. For example, a record identifying SPINDLE-DIRECTION is as follows: SPINDLE-DIRECTION NORTH

FLAT-DIRECTION

Direction of Flat side of Eccentric Reducers (ERED). Defines primary direction only. Valid directions values are NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST, UP and DOWN. For example, a record identifying FLATDIRECTION is as follows: FLAT-DIRECTION NORTH

DIRECTION

268

Used to indicate VALVE Spindle direction and Eccentric Reducer Flat direction that is in primary plane. Value in a form Up 45 deg. North will be


PCF Identifier

Description shown as a graphical output in primary direction. For example, a record identifying DIRECTION is as follows: Up 45 deg. North

Note: PCF identifiers BRANCH1-POINT, BRANCH2-POINT, CENTRE-POINT are specific to components and are not applicable for pipe segments.

Example: ISOGEN Identifiers on a Component (Spec-Driven) ISOGEN identifiers on a cross component are displayed in the next figure.

1 CENTRE-POINT 2 BRANCH1-POINT 3 END-POINT 4 BRANCH2-POINT 5 END-POINT

ISOGEN Attribute Map File (Spec-Driven) The ISOGEN Attribute Map file maps a Pro/PIPING attribute or parameter to the ISOGEN user-definable attributes. The configuration option isogen_attribute_map_file sets the ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute file name. The ISOGEN Attribute Map file format is displayed in the next table. Field Name

Description

PROE_ATTRIBUTE

Name of the attribute or parameter in Pro/PIPING

ISOGEN_ATTRIBUTE

The name of the ISOGEN user definable attribute. It should be one from ATTRIBUTEO ~ ATTRIBUTE99

269


Note: In ISOGEN, the position of the attribute ATTRIBUTE0~ATTRIBUTE99 is specified in a TextPos file. You can use the TextPos file to turn a particular attribute on or off on a pipe piece drawing, even if that attribute is available in a PCF file. During pipe piece drawing generation, the bending data attributes are added into the Pro/ENGINEER drawing as parameters with the same names automatically. The attributes used in Pro/PIPING for bending data are displayed in the next table. Attribute Name

Description

START_FLANGE_TWIST_ANGLE

Start flange twist angle

START_NODE_NUMBER

Start node number of the pipe

START_FLANGE_ANGLE

Flange angle, when bending starts from the start node

START_BENDING_POINT_1

The first bending point, when bending starts from the start node

START_BENDING_ANGLE_1

The first bending angle, when bending starts from the start node

START_BENDING_ROTATE_ANGLE_1

The first bending rotation angle, when bending starts from the start node

START_BENDING_RADIUS_1

The first bending radius, when bending starts from the start node


The second bending point, when bending starts from the start node


The second bending angle, when bending starts from the start node


The second bending radius, when bending starts from the start node


The third bending point, when bending starts from the start node


The third bending angle, when bending starts from the start node


The third bending rotation angle, when bending starts from the start node


The third bending radius, when bending starts from the start node

END_FLANGE_TWIST_ANGLE

End flange twist angle

270


Attribute Name

Description

END_NODE_NUMBER

The end node number of the pipe

END_FLANGE_ANGLE

Flange angle, when bending starts from the end node

END_BENDING_POINT_1

The first bending point, when bending starts from the end node

END_BENDING_ANGLE_1

The first bending angle, when bending starts from the end node

END_BENDING_ROTATE_ANGLE_1

The first bending rotation angle, when bending starts from the end node

END_BENDING_RADIUS_1

The first bending radius, when bending starts from the end node

END_BENDING_POINT_2

The second bending point, when bending starts from the end node

END_BENDING_ANGLE_2

The second bending angle, when bending starts from the end node


The second bending rotation angle, when bending starts from the end node


The second bending radius, when bending starts from the end node

END_BENDING_POINT_3

The third bending point, when bending starts from the end node

END_BENDING_ANGLE_3

The third bending angle, when bending starts from the end node


The third bending rotation angle, when bending starts from the end node


The third bending radius, when bending starts from the end node

PIPE_CUT_LENGTH

The pipe cutting length

271


Example: ISOGEN Attribute Map File (Spec-Driven) Default Path /text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_attribute_map.ptd If you want more than one set of bending data to be shown on a piece drawing, you can add multiple entries for the same bending data attributes, which point to different ISOGEN attributes. Note: The number of bending data sets that can be shown on a piece drawing depends on the number of ISOGEN user definable attributes supported by ISOGEN. ISOGEN allows a maximum of 100 such attributes. The modified ISOGEN Attribute Map file is as shown in the next table. PROE_ATTRIBUTE

ISOGEN_ATTRIBUTE

Values for spool


ATTRIBUTE10

0

START_NODE_NUMBER

ATTRIBUTE11

1

START_FLANGE_ANGLE

ATTRIBUTE12

0


ATTRIBUTE13

1325


ATTRIBUTE14

90


ATTRIBUTE15

180


ATTRIBUTE16

560


ATTRIBUTE17

1943.646


ATTRIBUTE18

90


ATTRIBUTE19

0


ATTRIBUTE20

560

START_PIPE_CUT_LENGTH

ATTRIBUTE21

4697.292


ATTRIBUTE22

0

END_NODE_NUMBER

ATTRIBUTE23

2

END_FLANGE_ANGLE

ATTRIBUTE24

0

END_BENDING_POINT_1

ATTRIBUTE25

535

END_BENDING_ANGLE_1

ATTRIBUTE26

90


ATTRIBUTE27

180

272


PROE_ATTRIBUTE

ISOGEN_ATTRIBUTE

Values for spool


ATTRIBUTE28

560

END_BENDING_POINT_2

ATTRIBUTE29

1943.646

END_BENDING_ANGLE_2

ATTRIBUTE30

90


ATTRIBUTE31

0


ATTRIBUTE32

560

END_PIPE_CUT_LENGTH

ATTRIBUTE33

4697.292


ATTRIBUTE34

0

START_NODE_NUMBER

ATTRIBUTE35

3

START_FLANGE_ANGLE

ATTRIBUTE36

0


ATTRIBUTE37

577.3


ATTRIBUTE38

90


ATTRIBUTE39

0


ATTRIBUTE40

265


ATTRIBUTE41

2227.161


ATTRIBUTE42

0

END_NODE_NUMBER

ATTRIBUTE43

4

END_FLANGE_ANGLE

ATTRIBUTE44

0

END_BENDING_POINT_1

ATTRIBUTE45

1226.6

END_BENDING_ANGLE_1

ATTRIBUTE46

90


ATTRIBUTE47

0


ATTRIBUTE48

265

END_PIPE_CUT_LENGTH

ATTRIBUTE49

2227.161


ATTRIBUTE50

0

START_NODE_NUMBER

ATTRIBUTE51

5

START_FLANGE_ANGLE

ATTRIBUTE52

0


ATTRIBUTE53

1339.2

273


PROE_ATTRIBUTE

ISOGEN_ATTRIBUTE

Values for spool


ATTRIBUTE54

90


ATTRIBUTE55

0


ATTRIBUTE56

345


ATTRIBUTE57

3335.125


ATTRIBUTE58

0

END_NODE_NUMBER

ATTRIBUTE59

6

END_FLANGE_ANGLE

ATTRIBUTE60

0

END_BENDING_POINT_1

ATTRIBUTE61

1446

END_BENDING_ANGLE_1

ATTRIBUTE62

90


ATTRIBUTE63

0


ATTRIBUTE64

345

END_PIPE_CUT_LENGTH

ATTRIBUTE65

3335.125


ATTRIBUTE66

0

START_NODE_NUMBER

ATTRIBUTE67

7

START_FLANGE_ANGLE

ATTRIBUTE68

0


ATTRIBUTE69

1139.2


ATTRIBUTE70

90


ATTRIBUTE71

-90


ATTRIBUTE72

345


ATTRIBUTE73

1441.925


ATTRIBUTE74

90


ATTRIBUTE75

0


ATTRIBUTE76

345


ATTRIBUTE77

4577.049


ATTRIBUTE78

0

END_NODE_NUMBER

ATTRIBUTE79

8

274


PROE_ATTRIBUTE

ISOGEN_ATTRIBUTE

Values for spool

END_FLANGE_ANGLE

ATTRIBUTE80

0

END_BENDING_POINT_1

ATTRIBUTE81

1446

END_BENDING_ANGLE_1

ATTRIBUTE82

90


ATTRIBUTE83

90


ATTRIBUTE84

345

END_BENDING_POINT_2

ATTRIBUTE85

1441.925

END_BENDING_ANGLE_2

ATTRIBUTE86

90


ATTRIBUTE87

0


ATTRIBUTE88

345

END_PIPE_CUT_LENGTH

ATTRIBUTE89

4577.049

The first two columns in this table are a part of the isogen_attribute map.ptd file. The last column shows typical values for a spool and is not a part of the isogen_attribute map.ptd file, but is included for better clarity. In the previous table isogen_attribute_map.ptd file, bending data of the spool can be viewed in the following four parts: •

Attributes between 10 and 33 represent bending data for pipe bends that appear between node number 1 ( a pipe start represented by Attribute 11) and node number 2 (an entry point of reducer represented by Attribute 23)

•

Attributes between 34 and 49 represent bending data for pipe bends that appear between node number 3 (exit point of reducer represented by Attribute 35) and node number 4 (an entry point of TEE fitting represented by Attribute 43)

•

Attributes between 50 and 65 represent bending data for pipe bends that appear between node number 5 (right exit of reducer represented by Attribute 51) and node number 6 (right end of the pipe represented by Attribute 59)

•

Attributes between 66 and 89 represent bending data for pipe bends that appear between node number 7 (left exit of reducer represented by Attribute 67) and node number 8 (left end of the pipe represented by Attribute 79)

Note: Use the isogen_attribute_map_file configuration option to access the modified isogen_attribute map.ptd file present in your local directory.

275


ISOGEN Symbol Map File (Spec-Driven) The ISOGEN Symbol Map file is a Pro/TABLE file that maps a Pro/PIPING fitting generic name against a corresponding symbol key (SKEY) and the ISOGEN component name. Pro/PIPING uses symbol keys for all fitting generic part sizes. You can modify the ISOGEN Symbol Map file by using a text editor. The ISOGEN Symbol Map file format is displayed in the next table. Field Name

Field Type

Description

FITTING_GENERIC_NAME

Character

Pro/PIPING fitting generic name

ISOGEN_COMPONENT_NAME

Character

ISOGEN component name

ISOGEN_SKEY

Character

ISOGEN component symbol key (SKEY)

ISOGEN_ITEM

Character

ISOGEN component material item type. It must be one of the following or empty: •

ERECTION-ITEM

•

FABRICATION-ITEM

•

OFFSHORE-ITEM

Note: If no material item type is found for a fitting, Pro/PIPING checks all the end types of the fitting ports. If any of the end type is welded (an end type that contains 'W' or 'w' character) or slip on (an end type that contains the 'SO' or 'so' string), the FABRICATION-ITEM type is assigned to that fitting. Otherwise the ERECTION-ITEM type is assigned. Default Symbol Mapping If you do not provide an ISOGEN Symbol Map file or if you do not list the entries for the components used in the Pro/PIPING model in the Symbol Map file, Pro/PIPING uses the following default mapping scheme. This scheme is internal to the interface and based on the fitting code. FITTING CODE

ISOGEN COMPONENT NAME

ISOGEN SKEY

INLINE

MISC-COMPONENT

NC**

INLINE_REDUCING

REDUCER-CONCENTRIC

RC**

REDUCER-ECCENTRIC (if eccentric flag is set)

RE**

276


FITTING CODE

ISOGEN COMPONENT NAME

ISOGEN SKEY

INLINE_JOINT

COUPLING

CO**

FLANGE

FLANGE

FL**

GASKET

GASKET

Not required

CORNER

MISC-COMPONENT-ANGLE

BA**

CORNER_REDUCING

ELBOW-REDUCING

ER**

CORNER_LET

ELBOLET

CE**

ELBOW

ELBOW

EL**

BRANCH

TEE

TE**

BRANCH_REDUCING

TEE

TE**

BRANCH_LET

OLET

NIPL

Note: The double asterisks (**) indicate ISOGEN endtypes. You can use these characters or replace them with suitable endtypes allowed by ISOGEN. If you use the asterisks, Pro/PIPING matches the fitting endtype in the model against the corresponding ISOGEN endtypes and the ISOGEN endtypes replace the asterisks for each fitting. The disadvantage of using the double asterisks is that if the ISOGEN Endtype Map file does not contain a mapped ISOGEN endtype, Pro/PIPING ignores the setting in the ISOGEN Symbol Map and selects the default symbol key (SKEY). Symbol Key Selection Pro/PIPING extracts the symbol key (SKEY) from the ISOGEN Symbol Map file by matching the generic name of the fitting with the name in the FITTING_GENERIC_NAME column. Pro/PIPING extracts the symbol key name in the ISOGEN_SKEY column and then the endtype string from the ISOGEN Endtype Map file. Symbol key selection occurs according to the following conditions: •

If the symbol key is only two characters long, Pro/PIPING appends the endtype string to the symbol key to form the final SKEY used in the PCF file.

•

If the symbol key has the double asterisks (**) as a substring and an endtype string is found, the endtype string replaces the double asterisks in the symbol key to form the final SKEY.

•

If either of these cases fail, the default symbol key is used.

277


Example: ISOGEN Symbol Map File (Spec-Driven) Default Path /text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_symbol_map.ptd FITTING_GENERIC_ ISOGEN_COMPONENT_ ISOGEN_SKEY ISOGEN_ITEM NAME NAME vl_gate_flrf

VALVE

VGFL

ERECTIONITEM

vl_swing_check_fl rf

VALVE

VSFL

ERECTIONITEM

vl_angle_flff

VALVE-ANGLE

AVFL

ERECTIONITEM

flange_neck_rf

FLANGE

FLFL

FABRICATIONITEM

elbow_90long_bw_s teel

ELBOW

ELBW

FABRICATIONITEM

elbow_45long_bw_s teel

ELBOW

ELBW

FABRICATIONITEM

tee_reducing_bw_s teel

TEE

TEBW

FABRICATIONITEM

tee_straight_bw_s teel

TEE

TEBW

FABRICATIONITEM

red_concentric_bw _steel

REDUCER-CONCENTRIC

RCBW

FABRICATIONITEM

red_eccentric_bw

REDUCER-ECCENTRIC

REBW

FABRICATIONITEM

ISOGEN Endtype Map File (Spec-Driven) The ISOGEN Endtype Map file is a Pro/TABLE file that maps Pro/PIPING end types to corresponding ISOGEN end types. You can modify the ISOGEN Endtype Map file by using a text editor.

278


The ISOGEN Endtype Map file format is displayed in the next table. Field Name

Field Type

Description

ENDTYPE

Character

Pro/PIPING end type

ISOGEN_ENDTYPE

Character

ISOGEN end type

Default End Type Mapping If you do not provide an ISOGEN Endtype Map file or if you do not list the entries for the end types used by the Pro/PIPING fitting components in the Endtype Map file, Pro/PIPING maps the end types by default. The string matching rules for default end type mapping is listed in the next table. ENDTYPE

ISOGEN ENDTYPE

endtype string starting with B

BW

endtype string starting with C

CP

endtype string starting with F

FL

endtype string starting with P

PL

endtype string starting with SC

SC

endtype string starting with SW

SW

No match found

BW

Note: The default mapping is internal to the interface.

Example: ISOGEN Endtype Map File (Spec-Driven) Default Path /text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_endtype_map.ptd ENDTYPE

ISOGEN_ENDTYPE

PE

PL

FLFF

FL

GKFF

FL

FLRF

FL

SWLD

SW

279


ENDTYPE

ISOGEN_ENDTYPE

BWLD

BW

ISOGEN Nominal Size Map File (Spec-Driven) The ISOGEN Nominal Size Map file is a Pro/TABLE file that maps the Pro/PIPING sizes used for modeling to the industry standard nominal size or nominal bore (NB). Nominal bore can be measured in millimeters (mm) or inches. Pro/PIPING extracts the component size and its units from the model using the following conditions: •

If the units are metric, UNITS-BORE is selected as MM.

•

If the units are in inches, UNITS-BORE is selected as INCH.

Pro/PIPING matches the extracted size against the nominal size in either the NB_MM or NB_INCH column. The nominal size must correspond to the model size in the SIZE column. You can modify the ISOGEN Nominal Size Map file by using a text editor. The ISOGEN Nominal Size Map file format is displayed in the next table. Field Name

Field Type

Description

SIZE

Character

Pro/PIPING Size String

NB_MM

Character

Nominal Bore (NB) Value

NB_INCH

Character

Nominal Bore (NB) Value

Note: •

Pro/PIPING allows you to specify any character as a nominal size. However, the ISOGEN PCF file format expects a number as the pipe nominal size.

•

For Nominal Bore (NB) values, use only the numbers 0-9, the period (.), or the slash (/).

•

For NB values in millimeters, only integers can be entered.

•

For NB values in inches, you can use fractions (For example, 1-1/2 for a one and one half inch bore).

•

NB values cannot include white spaces.

•

For NB values, the symbol (") used normally for inches cannot be used.

280


Default Nominal Size Mapping If you do not list a size in the SIZE column or if you do not define the nominal size in the selected NB column, Pro/PIPING outputs the model size to the PCF file by default where NB is needed. If a nominal size map file does not exist, the same result occurs. Note: An invalid nominal size may result from a wrong isometric size annotation or from an ISOGEN PCF file export malfunction.

Example: ISOGEN Nominal Size Map File (Spec-Driven) Default Path /text/piping_data/isodata/isogen_nominal_size_map.ptd SIZE

NB_INCH

NB_MM

10A

¼

10

15A

½

15

20A

¾

20

25A

1

25

32A

1-1/4

32

40A

1-1/2

40

50A

2

50

65A

2-1/2

65

80A

3

80

100A

4

100

125A

5

125

150A

6

150

200A

8

200

250A

10

250

300A

12

300

350A

14

350

400A

16

400

281


SIZE

NB_INCH

NB_MM

450A

18

450

500A

20

500

550A

22

550

600A

24

600

650A

26

650

700A

28

700

750A

30

750

800A

32

800

850A

34

850

900A

36

900

1000A

40

1000

1050A

42

1050

1100A

44

1100

1150A

46

1150

1200A

48

1200

1250A

50

1250

1300A

52

1300

1350A

54

1350

1400A

56

1400

1450A

58

1450

1500A

60

1500

1600A

64

1600

1700A

68

1700

1800A

72

1800

1900A

76

1900

2000A

80

2000

282


SIZE

NB_INCH

NB_MM

2100A

84

2100

2200A

88

2200

2300A

92

2300

2400A

96

2400

2500A

100

2500

2600A

104

2600

¼"

¼

10

½"

½

15

¾"

¾

20

1"

1

25

1-1/4"

1-1/4

32

1-1/2"

1-1/2

40

2"

2

50

2-1/2"

2-1/2

65

3"

3

80

4"

4

100

5"

5

125

6"

6

150

8"

8

200

10"

10

250

12"

12

300

14"

14

350

16"

16

400

18"

18

450

20"

20

500

22"

22

550

283


SIZE

NB_INCH

NB_MM

24"

24

600

26"

26

650

28"

28

700

30"

30

750

32"

32

800

34"

34

850

36"

36

900

40"

40

1000

42"

42

1050

44"

44

1100

46"

46

1150

48"

48

1200

50"

50

1250

52"

52

1300

54"

54

1350

56"

56

1400

58"

58

1450

60"

60

1500

64"

64

1600

68"

68

1700

72"

72

1800

76"

76

1900

80"

80

2000

84"

84

2100

88"

88

2200

92"

92

2300

284


SIZE

NB_INCH

NB_MM

96"

96

2400

100"

100

2500

104"

104

2600

ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute File (Spec-Driven) The ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute file contains attributes that correspond to the ISOGEN mandatory attributes listed in ISOGEN-FILES. The configuration option isogen_mandatory_attr_file sets the ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute File name. The default is isogen.fls. You can use the default file provided by the ISOGEN package or create a file.

Example: ISOGEN Mandatory Attribute File (Spec-Driven) Default Path /text/piping_data/isodata/isogen.fls Attributes

Directory Path

PLOT FILE-PREFIX

C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\OUTPUT\PLOT

OPTIONSWITCHES-LONG

C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.OPL

MESSAGE

C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\OUTPUT\SPOOLS.MES

DRAWING-FRAME

C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.DXF

DRAWINGDEFINITION

C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.DDF

ALTERNATIVETEXT

C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.ALT

POSITIONED-TEXT

C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.POS

WELDINGDEFINITION

C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.WDF

MATERIAL-LISTDEFINITION

C:\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\abc\SPOOLS\SPOOLS.MLD

285


ISOGEN Error Log File (Spec-Driven) If Pro/PIPING encounters errors while processing pipelines during isometric drawing generation, Pro/PIPING creates a log file named isointf.err. The error log file contains a collection of error logs from multiple sessions. The isogen_output_files_dir configuration option sets the directory in which Pro/PIPING stores this log file. Pro/PIPING creates the following two types of error log entries: •

Errors—Identifies problem pipeline segments, components, and fittings that caused the errors. Pro/PIPING highlights these items and displays them in the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window. To restore these components to their original color, use the Repaint command in Pro/ENGINEER (View > Repaint).

•

Warnings—Identifies issues that occur due to processing errors.

Example: ISOGEN Error Log File (Spec-Driven)

Date : 25-4-2000 ERROR LOG file for **ISOMETRIC DRAWING GENERATION INTERFACE** ERROR : Processing Fitting TEE_RED_BW-STEEL-65X50 in Pipeline 65A-SPECSTEAM-1. WARNING : Material Description not found for 3 item(s) in Pipeline 65ASPEC-STEAM-1. ERRORS : ISOGEN may fail to process intermediate output PCF files. REPAINT to restore Highlighted components in case of error. WARNINGS : ISOGEN may not fail to process but some of the desirable data may be missing. This file may be appended with errors occurring in future sessions.

Installation Drawing Generation About Installation Drawing Generation A piping installation drawing shows different views of a piping model with dimensions and various annotations. All the hidden lines are removed in the installation drawing. Installation drawing is used to guide the piping installation work. Pro/PIPING allows you to automatically display all pipe segments in the installation drawing using a single line or double-line representation. You can insert a pipe slope symbol on the pipe segments to display the slope of pipe segments in the installation drawing.

286


Example: Piping Installation Drawing

To Specify Display Style for Pipe Segments 1. Click File > Open and select the drawing to be activated. 2. Click Applications > Piping. 287


3. Click View > Pipeline Display > Style from the top menu bar. The Display Style dialog box opens. 4. Under Select View, click one of the following options to select views from the drawing: o

View—Selects a view or multiple views from the drawing.

o

Sheet—Selects all views from the current drawing sheet.

o

All Sheets—Selects all views from all drawing sheets.

The names of the selected views are displayed in the selection list. 5. Under Select Style, click one of the following options to specify the style for displaying pipe segments in the drawing: o

Single Line—Displays pipe segments in single-line representation.

o

Double Line—Displays pipe segments in double-line representation. Note: To display a pipe in double-line representation, its solid representation must be present in the pipeline assembly.

o

Double Line Above—Displays pipelines of different sizes in different display styles. Type a value for the pipe size in the adjacent field.

Note: Pro/PIPING displays all pipelines with a size greater than the specified size in double line representation and all pipelines with a size smaller than or equal to the specified size in single line representation. 6. Click to display the pipelines in the selected views in the specified style and close the dialog box. or Click to display the pipelines in the selected views in the specified style and keep the dialog box open for further selections. or Click


Pipe Display Style You can display pipelines in the selected views in single-line representation or double-line representation. You can also display all pipelines with a size greater than the specified size in double-line representation and all pipelines with a size smaller than or equal to the specified size in single-line representation.

288


All the pipe segments of a pipeline, irrespective of their sizes, displayed in single-line representation are shown in the next figure.

All the pipe segments of a pipeline, irrespective of their sizes, displayed in doubleline representation are shown in the next figure.

289


Pipe segments of a size larger than the specified size in double-line representation and all the other pipe segments in single-line representation are shown in the next figure.

To Select a Slope Symbol for Pipe Segments 1. Click File > Open and select a drawing. 2. Click Applications > Piping. 3. Click Insert > Piping Symbol > Slope from the top menu bar. The Slope Mark dialog box opens. 4. Under Select View, click one of the following to select views from the drawing: o

View—Selects a view or multiple views from the drawing. Click and select a view or multiple views from the drawing using the SELECT menu.

o

Sheet—Selects all views from the current sheet.

o

All Sheets—Selects all views from all sheets.

The names of the selected views are displayed in the selection list. 5. Under Select Symbol, use one of the following methods to select a symbol for displaying the slope of pipe segments in the drawing: o

Select a symbol from the adjacent selection list. All symbols in the current drawing are displayed in the list.

You can also type a symbol name in the adjacent field. Before loading the specified symbol, Pro/PIPING searches the directories in the following order: o

290

The current working directory


The path specified using the search_path configuration option

o

The symbols directory under the project data directory specified using the piping_project_data_dir configuration option

o

Click to browse the directory specified by the pro_symbol_dir configuration option, and select a symbol. Note: The default symbol for pipe slope, slope.sym, is located in the $PTCSRC/text/piping_data/sample_project/symbols directory.

6. Under Select Symbol Parameter, specify the parameters for the selected symbol. o

Click Symbol Height to specify the height of the pipe slope symbol on the drawing. Enter a value in the adjacent field. The unit for this value is the active drawing unit. Note: If you do not specify the height for the slope symbol, Pro/PIPING considers the height to be equal to the outer diameter of the pipe.

o

Click Interval between Symbols to specify the distance between two consecutive pipe slope symbols. Enter a value in the adjacent field. The unit for this value is the active drawing unit. Note: The default value is 5 mm or its equivalent in the active drawing units.

7. Click to display the pipelines in the selected views in the specified style and close the dialog box. or Click to display the pipelines in the selected views in the specified style and keep the dialog box open for further selections. or Click


Pipe Slope Symbol Pro/PIPING allows you to display the slope of pipelines in each view of the piping installation drawing using a slope symbol mark. If a pipe segment is not parallel to the selected view, the slope of the pipeline cannot be shown in the selected view of the drawing. To display the slope of a pipeline, a set of slope symbols are placed along the pipe segment. The direction of the symbols indicates the slope direction.

291


Front View of the Pipeline

Top View of the Pipeline

1 Slope direction 2 Slope symbol 3 Pipe slope symbol interval The pipe slope symbol is created as a Pro/DETAIL drawing symbol. When the location of the pipe segment on the drawing changes, the pipe slope symbol also changes its location. If you change the outer diameter of the pipe segment in the model, use Regenerate > Draft to update the diameter of the pipe slope symbol.

To Annotate Installation Drawing 1. Click File > Open to open the drawing to be annotated. 2. Click Applications > Piping. 3. Click Insert > Annotations. The Annotate Attr/Params dialog box opens.

292


4. Click one of the following options: Select Spec File—Select an Attribute and Parameter Specification file to access the list of valid object types that can be selected for annotation. The system selects the ship_dwg_anno_attrparam_spec.ptd file by default. Note: To use a customized Attribute and Parameters Specification file, the following entry must exist in your config.pro file: ship_dwg_anno_attrparam_spec_file spec.ptd where spec.ptd is the customized Attribute and Parameters Specification file. Or, use to browse the directory for selecting the Attribute and Parameter Specification file. This new file is used instead of the file specified by the configuration option. The new file is valid till you exit the Annotate Attr/Params dialog box. Select Object Type—Select the type of objects to be selected from the drawing from the adjacent list. This list comprises objects specified in the USER_OBJECT_TYPE column of the Attribute and Parameter Specification file. The list also includes object types Part and Feature. Use these object types to select any standard part or feature from the drawing. Select Objects—Select an object, feature, feature geometry, or part from the drawing. You can select only the type of object specified in the Select Object Type. You can select single or multiple objects but only of the specified type. To select objects: o

Click

o

to select one or more views in the drawing. All objects of the Click specified type are selected and annotated in the selected views.

o

Click to automatically select all views in the current sheet. All objects of the specified object type are selected and annotated in all views.

to select the objects to be annotated directly from the drawing.

Select Attributes—All the attributes and parameters specific to the selected object type are displayed in the list. This list comprises the ATTRPARAM_NAME entries for the selected object type specified in the Attribute and Parameters Specification file. All attributes specific to the selected object are displayed, as listed in the specification file. All parameters are sorted in alphabetical order and are displayed below the attributes in the Select Attributes list. The following options are used to filter, select, or deselect items in the list: o

—Displays only those attributes and parameters that are listed in the ATTRPARAM_NAME column for the selected object type in the Attribute and Parameter Specification file.

293


o

—Displays all attributes and parameters of the selected object. The list displays all the attributes and parameters, even if they are not specified in the Attribute and Parameter Specification file.

o

—Displays only attributes that are listed in the ATTRPARAM_NAME column for the selected object type in the Attribute and Parameter Specification file. The list does not display the parameters of the object, even if they are specified in the Attribute and Parameter Specification file.

o

—Selects all the items. All the items in the list are highlighted for the insertion of a note in the drawing.

o

—Deselects all the items. The items that were highlighted earlier are no longer highlighted.

If multiple objects in a drawing are selected, Pro/PIPING lists only the attributes and parameters that are specific to the object that you first selected. Note: The values of these selected attributes and parameters are inserted at the specified location in the drawing. Select Note Option—Use the following options to control the format and location of the note in the drawing:

294

o

Derive note location—Allows the system to determine the location of the note based on the position of the object in the drawing.

o

Create multiple notes—Inserts separate notes for each of the attributes and parameters selected in the list. Each attribute and parameter is displayed as a separate note in a row. If required, you can relocate all these notes separately. If you do not select this option, a single note with multiple rows is created. You can move these rows together.

o

Create leader line—Creates the notes with a leader line. For multiple notes, separate leader lines are created for each note. The end of the leader line is displayed with an arrow. Place this arrow on the selected object that is to be annotated.

o

Note angle—Specifies the text angle for the note to be inserted. All the used angles are listed in the adjacent option list. This option overrides any angle specified for style in the Attribute and Parameter Specification file. If you do not select this option, notes are created aligned to the selected object.

o

Note style—Specifies the style for the notes to be inserted in the drawing. All the styles available in the current drawing are listed in the adjacent list. The style that you specify using this option overrides the style defined in the Attribute and Parameters specification file. The first item in the list is User Specified style and displays the style specified in the Attribute and Parameters Specification file for inserting the note.


5. Click

to insert the notes.

or Click to insert notes with current selections without closing the Annotate Attr/Params dialog box. You can select a different object or different items from the Select Attributes list for the currently selected object. When you select a different object of the same type, the items selected in the Select Attributes list remain highlighted if the attributes and parameters are valid for the new object. Note: If the value of any attribute or parameter changes after insertion into the drawing, the drawing does not automatically update with the new value. Edit the existing note or insert it again.

Attribute and Parameter Specification File The Attribute and Parameter Specification file lists the attributes and parameters valid for the user-definable objects. It also defines the format, style, and layer for inserting the values of these attributes and parameters as notes in the drawing. The default Attribute and Parameter Specification file name is ship_dwg_anno_attrparam_spec.ptd. The default file is available at /text/ship_data. Pro/ENGINEER applications read this file while launching the Annotate Attr/Params dialog box. Use the Pro/TABLE tool to view and edit this file outside Pro/ENGINEER. Set the following option in your config.pro file to use a customized Attribute and Parameter Specification file: ship_dwg_anno_attrpar_spec_file spec.ptd where spec.ptd is the customized Attribute and Parameter Specification file. Any change in the Attribute and Parameter Specification file does not trigger an automatic regeneration of the drawing. This file has a tabular format and consists of the following columns: •

USER_OBJECT_TYPE

•

ATTRPARAM_NAME

•

FACTOR

•

FORMAT

•

STYLE

•

LAYER

User Object Type The first column specifies the types of user-definable objects to be annotated in the drawing. All the types of objects specified in this column are displayed in the options list for the Select Object Type option in the Annotate Attr/Params dialog box.

295


Attribute and Parameter Names The second column specifies the attribute and parameters valid for the corresponding object type specified in the first column. You can specify a number of attributes and parameters for a single object type. Specify each attribute and parameter in a separate row in Pro/TABLE. You can repeat the parameters or attributes for a set of valid object types. All the attributes and parameters valid for the selected type of object are displayed in the options list for the Select Attributes option in the Annotate Attr/Params dialog box. The attributes and parameters valid for the corresponding object types are specified in the next table. Object Name

Attribute Name

Description

PIPELINE

LABEL

SPOOL

LABEL

Fillet_Weld, Butt_Weld

WELD_CODE

String—Weld code

Fillet_Weld, Butt_Weld

WELD_CONNECT_TYPE

String—Weld connect type

Factor The third column specifies the multiplication factor. This is valid only for the attributes or parameters with double or integer types. The attribute and parameter value is multiplied by the given factor before being displayed in the specified format on the drawing. By default, the multiplication factor is 1. It is useful for the conversion of units, that is, to display units in millimeters when the model unit is in meters. Format The fourth column specifies the format for the notes for displaying the attribute and the parameter values in the drawing. The format string consists of two parts, ordinary characters and the conversion specification. •

Ordinary characters are displayed in the drawing notes as specified.

•

The conversion specification is replaced with the actual value of the attribute and the parameter before being displayed in the drawing notes.

296


Each conversion specification begins with a % and ends with a conversion character. Include the following characters in the given sequence between the % and the conversion character: Use the following flags to modify the formatting of the notes: o

A minus sign (-) to specify the left alignment of the value in its field.

o

A plus sign (+) to specify that the value is displayed with a sign.

o

A space ( ) to prefix the value with a space in the absence of any sign.

o

Zero (0) for numeric conversion. It assigns leading zeroes as padding for the field width.

o

A hash mark (#) to specify an alternative output form. Alternative form changes the behavior of conversion characters. For example, the following table gives different meanings of %G and %#G for the same value.

Value

Conversion Factor = %G

Conversion Factor = %#G

0.00000000123

1.23E-09

1.23000E-09

1.0

1

1.00000

•

A number to specify the minimum field width. The converted value is displayed in the field with the specified minimum width, or if required, in a field wider than the specified minimum width. If the converted value has fewer characters than the specified minimum field width, trailing or leading spaces are added to the field. If you have specified the zero flag, trailing or leading zeros are used.

•

A period to separate the field width from the precision number.

•

A number to specify the precision. For example: o

The number of characters to be displayed from a string.

o

The number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point of a double value.

o

The minimum number of digits to be displayed for an integer.

The conversion characters for strings, integers, and double values are shown in the next table. Character Value Type

Display Format

d, i

Integer

Decimal number.

s

String

Displays characters from the string till the end or the number of characters given by precision.

f

Double

[-]m.dddddd, where the number of ds depends on the specified precision. By default, six digits are

297


Character Value Type

Display Format specified after the decimal point.

e

Double

[-]m.dddddde+xx or [-]m. dddddde-xx, where the number of ds depends on the specified precision. By default, six digits are specified after the decimal point.

E

Double

[-]m.ddddddE+xx or [-]m.ddddddE-xx, where the number of ds depends on the specified precision. By default, six digits are specified after the decimal point.

g, G

Double

Use %e or %E if the exponent is less than -4 or greater than or equal to precision. Otherwise, the system uses %f. Trailing decimal point and trailing zeros are not displayed.

%

No value

Displays %.

Style The fifth column specifies the default style of the note to be used for the corresponding parameter or attribute. The specified style must be available in the current drawing. Layer The sixth column specifies the default layer to be used for displaying the note created for the corresponding parameter or attribute. If the specified layer is not available, a new layer is created.

Example: Attribute and Parameter Specification File USER_OBJECT_TYPE ATTRPARAM_NAME FACTOR FORMAT STYLE LAYER Pipeline

LABEL

Spool

LABEL

Fitting

VALVENUMBER

AEC Object Type File The Architecture, Engineering and Construction (AEC) Object Type file lists the userdefinable object types and their correspondent AEC object types. These userdefinable object types are displayed in the options lists of Select Object Type in the Annotate Attr/Params dialog box. 298


The default AEC Object Type file name is aec_object_type.ptd, and it is available at /text/ship_data. Use the Pro/TABLE tool to view and edit this file outside Pro/ENGINEER. Set the following option in your config.pro file to use a customized AEC Object Type file: aec_object_type_file .ptd This file has a tabular format and consists of the following two columns: •

USER_OBJECT_TYPE

•

AEC_OBJECT_TYPE

User Object Type The first column specifies the type of object specified by the user. AEC Object Type The second column specifies the AEC object type for the corresponding object specified in the first column. The list also includes object types Part and Feature. Use these object types to select any standard part or feature from the drawing.

Example: AEC Object Type File USER_OBJECT_TYPE

AEC_OBJECT_TYPE

Pipeline

PIPELINE

Spool

SPOOL

Fitting

FITTING

Pipe

PIPE

The attributes and parameters valid for the corresponding object types are specified in the next table. AEC Object Type

Attribute Name

PIPELINE

Label

SPOOL

Label

FITTING

Label

PIPE

Label

Description

299


Pipe Spool Drawing Generation About Pipe Spool Drawing Generation The pipe spool drawings are generated using the ISOGEN interface. The ISOGEN interface uses an intermediate .pcf (Piping Component file) file and Data Control files to generate the pipe spool drawings in various standard data formats. Note: •

You must first set the ISOGEN configuration options to use the ISOGEN interface generation tool.

•

The isogen_pcf_filename_format configuration option when set to SPOOLNUM controls the name format of the .pcf files that are generated after you create spool drawings. If a filename has more than one spool and you select a pipeline for generating the spool drawing, SPOOLNUM allots the spool numbers in the ascending order.

A pipeline is split into several small pieces called pipe pieces or spools. The pipe spool (or piece) drawing provides detailed information for fabrication. The pipe spool drawings are divided into three major areas: graphics area, bill of material area, and title block area. The pipe piece drawings generated are: •

Not to scale

•

Automatically dimensioned (associative)

•

With item numbering

•

With material description

•

With pipe bending data

•

With a list of pipe pieces

300


Process Flow of Pipe Spool drawing Generation

You can use the following process for pipe spool drawing generation with Pro/ENGINEER and ISOGEN. Using Pro/ENGINEER Use Pro/ENGINEER for generating the .pcf (Piping Component File) format using the following process. The .pcf files are provided as an input for ISOGEN for generating the spool drawing files in .dxf format. Data Mapping Files Prepare the necessary data mapping files. These are .ptd files that you can view or edit using the Pro/TABLE tool. These files are used to map the definition used in Pro/PIPING to their equivalent in ISOGEN, for example, ISOGEN Symbol Map file, ISOGEN Nominal Size Map file. Pro/PIPING Model Activate the assembly that has a pipe piece. Generate spools for the pipelines that have not been spooled.

301


Spool Information Extraction Program Extract the spool information of the selected pipeline and write it into the .pcf file. PCF files contain material and geometrical data from a Pro/PIPING model in a readable ISOGEN .pcf (Piping Component File) format. This format serves as an input to ISOGEN for creating pipeline isometric drawings. Using ISOGEN Data Control Files Prepare the necessary data control files. These are text files with an ISOGENspecified extension that are used to control generation of pipe spool drawing using ISOGEN. You can control what is displayed in the pipe spool drawing and how that should be displayed using these files. Refer to the ISOGEN documentation for their details. Spool Drawing Generation Program Load the .pcf files generated by Pro/PIPING into ISOGEN and run ISOGEN to generate pipe piece drawings in .dxf format. Multiple .pcf files can be processed by ISOGEN in a single execution. You can open the .dxf format in Pro/DETAIL or use any other CAD package that supports .dxf files for further editing and plotting. Pro/DETAIL Drawing Activate a Pro/DETAIL drawing and import a .dxf file generated by ISOGEN into Pro/DETAIL. If required, additional annotation or modification on the drawing can be done using the functionality provided in Pro/DETAIL. Subsequently, you can send the drawing to plot. Pro/BATCH provides functionality to plot these drawings in batch mode.

ISOGEN Data Control Files About ISOGEN Data Control Files ISOGEN uses a set of data control files to control pipe spool drawing generation. These files are text files with predefined extensions. •

Option Switches file

•

Alternative Text file

•

Position Text file

•

Drawing Definition file

•

Drawing Frame file

302


ISOGEN file

Option Switches File The Option Switches file contains all the option switches definitions required for pipe spool drawing generation. Option Switches files have a .OPL extension. Some option switches are listed in the following table. Option Switch

Note

O.S. 2 CUT PIECE NUMBERING/LIST TYPE

Controls the cut piece list generation and the corresponding cut piece Identifiers.

O.S. 5 CO-ORDINATES – CONNECTION/CONNECTIVITY

Selectively suppresses the spool end coordinate information.

O.S. 12 DRAWING MARGIN - TOP

Controls the top margin of the graphics area.

O.S. 13 DRAWING MARGIN BOTTOM

Controls the bottom margin of the graphics area.

O.S. 15 DRAWING SIZE – HEIGHT

Controls the drawing height.

O.S. 16 DRAWING SIZE - WIDTH

Controls the drawing width.

303


Option Switch

Note

O.S. 24 MATERIAL LIST – PIPELINE/DRAWING/PIPE LENGTH UNITS

Controls the length units used in the BOM.

O.S. 38 PIPELINE SPLITTING – AUTOMATIC

Controls the automatic pipeline splitting.

O.S. 41 BORE/DIMENSION/WEIGHT CONTROL

Controls the dimension format.

O.S. 66 CO-ORDINATES SUPPLEMENTARY

Controls the elevation annotation.

O.S. 71 PLOTFILE FORMAT

Controls the output drawing format.

Alternative Text File The Alternative Text file is used to control the replacement of the selected ISOGEN standard text string. You can also turn on or off, the selected ISOGEN standard text string from the drawing. Alternative Text files have a .ALT extension. Some standard text strings related to pipe spool drawing are listed in the following table. Identification Number

Note

-207

Turns nominal diameter on or off

304


Identification Number

Note

-208

Turns CONN. TO on or off

Position Text File This Position Text file is used to control the ISOGEN parameters. Position Text files have a .POS extension. Some parameters related to pipe spool drawing are listed in the following table. Parameter ID Number

Note

-700

Sets location to x0y0 to turn off the north arrow

Drawing Definition File This Drawing Definition file is used to control the appearance of isometric drawings. Drawing Definition files have a .DDF extension. Some features related to pipe spool drawing are listed in the following table. Feature

Note

BEND/ELBOW-REPRESENTATION

Sets the representation of bend and elbow to sharp corner or round corner.

BEND ROUND/SQUARE ELBOW SQUARE/ROUND

Drawing Frame File A Drawing Frame file has a .DXF extension. You can define your own Drawing Frame file. To create a Drawing Frame file, export a Pro/ENGINEER drawing or template drawing into DXF format. ISOGEN File An ISOGEN file specifies the part name of each ISOGEN Data Control file used. All ISOGEN files have the .FLS extension. You can customize the layout of a pipe piece drawing and the contents displayed on it using the ISOGEN Data Control files.

305


Displaying Bending Data About Bending Data In Pro/PIPING, you can use bending data to indicate how a pipe must bend. Bending data is exported to a .pcf file when a spool drawing is generated. The number of digits in the bend information can be controlled using the default_dec_places configuration option. The default value is 2. The types of bending data used are: •

Node number

•

Bending angle

•

Bending radius

•

Bending rotation angle

•

Flange angle

•

Flange twist angle

•

Pipe cutting length

About the Node Number Node numbers are displayed temporarily in the graphics window after you generate a spool drawing. The node numbers as displayed in the graphics window are shown in the next figure.

306


In the above figure the numbers 1 to 8 represent node numbers. Node numbers 2 and 3 are assigned to the either sides of a reducer. Node numbers 4, 7, and 5 are assigned to each end of a TEE fitting. Node numbers 1, 6, and 8 are assigned to pipe ends. Refer to the example on the ISOGEN Attribute Map file for details on how you can modify the isogen_attribute map_file.ptd file to generate the bending data for the figure above. About the Bending Point Bending point is the point where the bending starts. The distance between two bending points or the distance between a bending point and a pipe end represents the bending point. Theoretical bending point—The bending point that is derived directly from a pipe 3D model as shown in the following figure.

307


1 First bending point 2 Second bending point a(n) Bending angle b(n) Bending length l(n) Bending point location r(n) Bending radius

308


When flanges are welded to the pipe before bending, the flange faces are the bending start and end points as shown in the following figure:

1 Bending end 2 Second bending point 3 First bending point 4 Bending start Real bending point—If the bending point moves away from the theoretical location, you must mark the real bending point on the pipe before the actual bending. The bending points move away from their theoretical locations during the bending process due to the following: •

Bending spring back

•

Bending elongation

309


About Bending Spring Back After the bending operation, the elasticity of the pipe material causes the bending to spring back. To compensate for the spring back, you must increase the bending angle and move the bending point forward. When the pipe is released from the bending machine, the bending angle and the bending point spring back to the theoretical value as shown in the following figure:

1 Bending direction 2 Bending point 3 Real bending point a(n) Bending Angle l(n) Bending point location A(n) Real bending angle L(n) Real bending point location S(n) Spring back

310


Note: Only the theoretical bending angle is shown on a pipe piece drawing. About Bending Elongation The real straight pipe length is generally shorter than its theoretical length. The theoretical length of the pipe is the same as the bend arc length in the 3D model. The difference between the real straight pipe length and the theoretical straight pipe length is the bending elongation as shown in the following figure.

1 Bending direction 2 Elongation b(n) Bending length l(n) Bending point location B(n) Real bending length E(n) Bending elongation You can calculate the real bending point for the bend of a pipe using the following formula: L(n) = S(n-1) + l(n) - E(n-1) - S(n) Where, o

L(n)—The real bending point for the (n) bend

o

S(n-1)—The bending spring back for the (n-1) bend

311


l(n)—The theoretical bending point for the (n) bend

o

E(n-1)—The bending elongation for the (n-1) bend

o

S(n)—The bending spring back for the (n) bend

About Pipe Cutting Length The real bending points for the example shown in the following figure are: L1 = 0.0 + l1 - 0.0 - S1 L2 = S1 + l2 - E1 - S2 L3 = S2 + l3 - E2 -0.0

b(n) Bending length l(n) Bending point location B(n) Real bending length L(n) Real Bending Point Location S(n) Spring back E(n) Bending elongation l Pipe length L Pipe cutting length

312


Where, l is the theoretical pipe length derived directly from the 3D model and L is the real pipe length after considering the elongation caused by the bending process. Pipe cutting length or real pipe length is the straight pipe length before the actual bending. You can calculate the pipe cutting length using the following formula: L = L1 + L2 + L3 + ... + L(n-1) + L(n) Where, L—The pipe cutting length L1 ~ L(n)—The real bending points About the Bending Angle Bending angle is the rotation angle required to obtain the correct bend shape. A bending angle is as shown in the following figure:

1 Bending angle 2 Bending direction l(n) Bending point location About the Bend Radius Bend radius is the radius of the bend centerline. An example of a bend radius is shown in the following figure.

313


1 Bend radius 2 Bend direction l(n) Bending point location About Bending Rotation Angle If the bending direction of a bend is different from the previous bend, the pipe piece must be rotated at a certain angle before bending to obtain the right bending direction. This angle at which you rotate the pipe piece is called the bending rotation angle. The bending rotation angle is shown in the following figure.

1 Pipe piece rotation by 180 degrees before the second bending 2 Bending direction l(n) Bending point location

314


About the Flange Angle Flanges are welded onto a pipe before bending. The pipe must be rotated through an angle before bending so that after bending, the flange bolt holes are at the correct position. The installation position of a pipe with a flange welded at one of its ends is shown in the following figure. The z-axis and the black segment form the flange base plane. The black and blue segments of the pipe form the bending plane. The remainder of the angle between the flange base plane and the bending plane divided by the angle between the flange holes is the flange angle.

1 Flange angle 2 Flange base plane 3 Bending plane If the black segment is along the z-axis, then the flange base plane is formed by the y-axis and the black segment. The next figure shows a flange welded onto the straight pipe.

1 Flange baseline After welding the flange onto the pipe, you must load the pipe on the bending machine. When you load the pipe on the bending machine, first align the flange base plane with the bending plane, then rotate the flange with the given flange angle. Standing in front of the bending machine, looking into the pipe when the rotation is in the clockwise direction, the value of the flange angle is negative. When the rotation is in the counterclockwise direction, the value of the flange angle is positive.

315


1 Bending plane 2 Looking into the bending machine 3 Flange base plane 4 Flange angle 5 Before flange angle rotation 6 After flange angle rotation 7 Bending plane 8 Flange angle Note: The flange base plane aligns with the z-axis when you put the pipe at its installation position.

316


The pipe is ready for the first bending after the flange angle rotation. The first bending is shown in the next figure.

1 Bending plane 2 Flange angle 3 Flange angle About the Flange Twist Angle If a pipe has flanges at both ends, weld the end flange to the straight pipe while rotating at an angle relative to the start flange before bending. This angle is the flange twist angle. Rotate the pipe at the flange twist angle so that after bending, the end flange bolt holes are at the correct position. The following figure shows a pipe with two flanges welded at both ends. The start flange is yellow and the end flange is blue. The start flange baseline is along the zaxis. The end flange baseline has an angle with the z-axis.

317


1 Start flange baseline 2 End flange baseline When you unbend a pipe, the remainder of the angle between the start flange baseline and the end flange baseline divided by the angle between the flange holes is the flange twist angle. Looking from the end flange to the start flange, when the rotation is in the clockwise direction, the value of flange twist angle is negative. When the rotation is in the counterclockwise direction, the value of flange twist angle is positive. The details are shown in the following figure.

318


1 Looking from the end flange to the start flange 2 End flange baseline 3 Flange twist angle 4 Start flange baseline The end flange is welded on to the pipe with the specified flange twist angle against the start flange.

Specification-Driven Pipe Reporting About Specification-Driven Pipe Reporting Pro/PIPING allows you to create reports about the entire pipeline network and fitting information. You can select a pipeline, fitting, or pipe segment from an active assembly or subassembly for creating reports. You can create the following types of reports using the Report Pipeline dialog box: •

Segment

•

Pipeline Network

•

Fitting

•

Insulation

•

Bills of Materials

319


Bend Machine

•

Bend Location

•

File Interchange Format (FIF)

•

Schematic Consistency Check

The report is displayed in the Report Pipeline dialog box or in a separate Information Window. It is also saved in your working directory as a .dat text file by default. Note: If a fitting specification is the same as that of the pipeline specification, the spec info for the fitting is not reported.

To Create Pipeline Reports Use the following procedure to create a report about a pipe segment, fitting, or insulation, or to generate a Bill of materials. 1. Click PIPING > Info. The Report Pipeline dialog box opens. 2. Click Type and select the type of report that you want to create. o

—Segment report

o

—Pipeline Network report

o

—Fitting report

o

—Insulation report

o

—Bill of Materials report

o

—Bend Machine report

o

—Bend Location report

o

—Output FIF report

o

—Schematic Consistency Check report

Each report type is provided in a standard format. Pro/PIPING allows you to change only the format of the Pipeline Network report. Note: You can indicate the number of decimal places in the Bend Location report, the Bend Machine report and the Output FIF report by specifying a value for the default_dec_places configuration option. The default value of this configuration option is 2.

320


3. Under Select Report Format, select a different report format, if required. Click to create or edit a report format. Note: Select Report Format is available only if you select the report type as Pipeline. 4. Click to select the segment, pipeline, or fitting from which you want to retrieve information. You can select the segment, pipeline, or fitting from the Model Tree, the Piping System Tree, or the graphics window. 5. Click Preview Info to display the results in a box in the same dialog box. Click to view the results in a separate Information Window. You can save, edit, or close the report displayed in the Information Window. 6. Click


To Generate a Bend Location Table 1. Click Piping > Info. The Report Pipeline and the Select dialog boxes open. 2. Under Type, click

.

3. Under Select pipe segment or pipe feature, click and select a pipe segment or pipe feature from which you want to retrieve information. 4. Click OK in the Select dialog box. The bend location information table is displayed in the Information Window. The table displays the bend number, the XYZ coordinates, bend angle, and bend radius. Pro/PIPING also displays the bend location information under Preview Info in the Report Pipeline dialog box. You can either scroll to view the entire report or click

and view the report in a separate Information Window.

Note: You can regulate the number of decimal places displayed in the bend location table by specifying the value for the default_dec_places configuration option. The default value of this configuration option is 2.

To Generate a Bend Machine Table 1. Click Piping > Info. The Report Pipeline and the Select dialog boxes open. 2. Under Type, click

.

3. Under Select pipe segment or pipe feature, click and select a pipe segment or pipe feature from which you want to retrieve information. 4. Click OK in the Select dialog box. The bend machine information table is displayed in the Information Window. The table displays the bend number, offset, twist angle, bend angle, and bend radius.

321


Pro/PIPING also displays the bend location information under Preview Info in the Report Pipeline dialog box. You can either scroll to view the entire report or click

and view the report in a separate Information Window.

Example: Bend Location Report The pipe bend machine report is stored in your working directory as a text file named bend_locs.dat. Bend Location Information ========================= Bend # Radius

X

Y

Z

Bend Angle

Bend

-------- ------------ ------------ ------------ -------------- ---------1

0.00

0.00

0.00

2

0.00

0.00

1495.39

90.00

560.00

3

0.00

10100.00

1495.39

90.00

560.00

4

0.00

10100.00

3989.39

90.00

560.00

5

5718.30

10136.89

3989.39

Example: Bend Machine Report The pipe bend machine report is stored in your working directory as a text file named bend_machine.dat. Bend Machine Information ======================== Bend #

Offset

Twist Angle

Bend Angle

Bend Radius

-------- -------------- -------------- -------------- -------------1

935.39

2

8980.00

3

1374.00

4

5158.41

322

90.00

560.00

180.00

90.00

560.00

90.37

90.00

560.00


Reporting the Weight and COG Information for Pipe Segments Pro/PIPING calculates the weight of a pipe segment based on the following: •

Density information specified in the piping specification database

•

Outer diameter of the pipe segment

•

Thickness of the pipe segment

•

Length of the pipe segment

Pro/PIPING uses the value of the density that you specify in the MATL_DENSITY column of the Piping Material file to calculate the weight of the pipe segment. Pro/PIPING determines the center of gravity (COG) of the pipe segment based on the geometric details of the segment. The x-, y-, and the z-coordinates for the center of gravity are reported based on the start location of the pipeline. The pipeline report, which is stored in your working directory as a text file named pline_info.dat, reports the weight and COG information for the selected pipe segment.

Example: Pipe Segment Report The pipe segment report is stored in your working directory as a text file named pline_info.dat. Pipeline Information ====================== Assembly Name

: PIPING_P1_CT1

Pipeline Label

: 150A-MS-WATER-

Main Size

: 150A

Main Size

: ms

Pipe Segment Information =========================== Pipe Size

: 150A

Pipe Spec

: ms

Stock Number

: PIPEAB40PE-150

Material Code

: AB

Model Unit

: MM

Schedule

: 40

Outer Diameter

: 165.2000

Wall Thickness

: 7.1000

Pipe Length

: 317.4000

323


Weight

: 0.0087 TONNE

COG

: X = -2450.0000 Y = 1925.5401 Z = 326.4595

Pipe Layer

: ha_layer

Pipe

: yellow

Color

Example: Fitting Report The pipe fitting report is stored in your working directory as a text file named pfitt_info.dat. ==================== Pipeline Information ==================== Pipeline Label

: 500A-HA-AIR-CT-TNK

Pipe Size

: 500A

Pipe Spec

: ha

Model Unit

: MM

==================== Fitting Information ==================== Assembly Name

: AIR-CT-TNK-250A

Component Name

: VL_GATE_FLFF-IRON-5K-250

Stock Number

: GATEAA20FLRF-250

Material Desc

: GATE VALVE, FLANGED RAISED FACE STEEL ASTM A105

MCCS

: 322AA20250

Size

: 250A

Weight

: UNDEFINED

COG

: UNDEFINED

Layer

: ha_layer

Color

: yellow

324


Example: Insulation Report The Insulation report is stored in your working directory as a text file named insulation_info.dat. PIPELINE SPEC : ha INSULATION CODE : EK Pipe Insulation Information ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MATL.

SIZE

PIPE OD

LENGTH

THICKNESS

STOCKNO

DESCRIPTION

CODE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MWCOVER

250A

267.40

20083.73

30.00

Mineral wool pipe cover: Bare 110KG/M3 * 30.00 T * 250A

SWIRE

Steel Wire A6

BOND

Bond: D-9800HD (Non-Flammable Type)

GCLOTH

Glass Cloth With AL-FOIL 0.12T Flange Insulation

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MATL.

SIZE

QUANTITY

THICKNESS

STOCKNO

DESCRIPTION

CODE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MWCOVER

GCLOTH

250A

10

30.00

FLANGE_SLIP_FF-STEEL-5K-250 Mineral wool pipe cover Bare 110KG/M3 * MATL_THKT * SIZE Glass Cloth With AL-FOIL 0.12T

GYARN

Glass Yarn D8

SHOOK

SS400 Steel Hook 1.0T

325


Example: Bill of Materials The bill of materials is stored in your working directory as a text file named pline_bom_info.dat. ASM NAME

QTY LINE NAME

/SEGMENT

LINE STOCK

LENGTH PART NAME

---------- --- ------------ --------------- ---------- ----------- --------ASSY_PLANT 1

STEAM-3

STEAM-4

STEAM-5

1

1

1

STEAM-1-150A/STEAM-1-150A001 MS_150A_40

3524.746

---


6823.458

---


4516.233

---


3304.746

---


2600.000

---


7765.344

---


3128.313

---


2356.491

---


3437.021

---


7454.663

---


6563.020

---


44722.919

---


8577.138

---


22154.132

---


1985.125

---


1139.600

---


18643.767

---


1868.614

---


9580.089 100A-MSSTEAM-5001

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Assembly ASSY_PLANT contains:

326

1

Part

CARGO_TABLE

1

Part

PURGE_TABLE

1

Part

EVAPORATOR_TABLE

1

Part

CARGO_CONDENSER


1

Part

PURGE_CONDENSER

1 Sub-Assembly

ASSY_EVAPORATOR

1 Sub-Assembly

STEAM-3

1 Sub-Assembly

STEAM-4

1 Sub-Assembly

STEAM-5

3

Part

TEE_RED_BW-STEEL-150X100

1

Part

NIPPLE_BW-100A

1

Part

RED_CON_BW-STEEL-100X65

1

Part

VL_GATE_FLRF-STEEL-20K-65

2

Part

GASKET_SLIP-STEEL-20K-65

2

Part

FLANGE_SLIP_RF-STEEL-20K-65

1

Part

RED_ECC_BW-STEEL-65X50

1

Part

VL_S_CHK_FLRF-STEEL-20K-50

2

Part


2

Part


4

Bulk item

33AA30065

0

Bulk item

357AA40065

24

Bulk item

33AA20050

0

Bulk item

357AA40050

Sub-Assembly ASSY_EVAPORATOR contains: 1

Part

EVAPORATOR

2

Part

NOZZLE

Sub-Assembly STEAM-3 contains: 1

Part

TEE_STR_BW-STEEL-100X100


Part


1

Part


1

Part


2

Part


2

Part


4

Bulk item

33AA20100 327


0

Bulk item

357AA40100


Part

100A-MS-STEAM-5001

Summary of parts for assembly ASSY_PLANT:

328

1

Part

CARGO_TABLE

1

Part

PURGE_TABLE

1

Part

EVAPORATOR_TABLE

1

Part

CARGO_CONDENSER

1

Part

PURGE_CONDENSER

1

Part

EVAPORATOR

2

Part

NOZZLE

2

Part


1

Part


1

Part


2

Part


2

Part


4

Bulk item

33AA20100

0

Bulk item

357AA40100

1

Part

100A-MS-STEAM-5001

3

Part


1

Part

NIPPLE_BW-100A

1

Part

RED_CON_BW-STEEL-100X65

1

Part

VL_GATE_FLRF-STEEL-20K-65

2

Part


2

Part


1

Part

RED_ECC_BW-STEEL-65X50

1

Part


2

Part


2

Part


4

Bulk item

33AA30065

0

Bulk item

357AA40065


24

Bulk item

33AA20050

0

Bulk item

357AA40050

Pipeline Network Report About the Pipeline Network Report The Pipeline Network report provides the following information: •

The labels of the pipeline or equipment connected to the selected pipeline as FROM and TO

•

All branch pipelines routed from the main pipeline

•

All pipe segments and fittings included in the entire pipeline

Additionally, the Pipeline Network report provides information about design rule violations and missing corner fittings and flanges. Pro/PIPING provides a predefined format for the Pipeline Network report. You can change the format of a Pipeline Network report using the Report Pipeline dialog box. You can then use these customized formats to create subsequent Pipeline Network reports. The report provides information in the following sequence: •

•

Information about the pipeline network. The information includes: o

The label of the pipeline

o

The labels of the equipment between which the pipeline is connected to as FROM and TO

o

The size of the pipeline and its specification

Information about the main pipeline and all branch extensions is provided in a tabular format. The standard report consists of six columns for size, specification, name, length or angle, material code, and description. The number of rows is based on the number of elements fabricated on a pipeline. Note: In the report, the information related to each pipeline is separated by a continuous dotted line.

•

Name of the co-ordinate system is reported under FROM and TO. If this coordinate system is a part of an equipment, you can report the coordinate system name in the Equipment-Csys format by assigning an appropriate name to the component in the Feat Name column of the Model Tree or by designating the equipment if you have created the pipeline using an XML file.

329


Example: Pipeline Network Report -1 =================== Network Information =================== LABEL

FROM

100A-MS-STEAM-007

100A-MS-STEAM-008 PURGE_CONDESER-P3 100A

SIZE

SPEC

MAIN 1

TO

NAME

SIZE

LENGTH

MATL. STOCKNO

ANGLE

CODE

SPEC ms

100A-MS-STEAM-008 PURGE_CONDESER-P3

================================================================================ 100A

ms

100AX100A APNT0

PIPE

145.2

AB

DRAIN_A

PIPEAB40PE-100 DRAIN_A-100

100AX100A ms

BRAN

AA

BRANAA40BW-100

100A

NIPPLE

AA

NIPPLEAA5BW-100

ms

===>> Ends Incompatible : Type BW Rate 5 and Type SO Rate 20 ... 100A

ms

SLIPFLANGE

AA

SLIPFLANGEAA20FLRF-100

100A

ms

GASKET

AG

GASKETAG20GKFF-100

100A

ms

GATE

AA

GATEAA20FLRF-100

100A

ms

GASKET

AG

GASKETAG20GKFF-100

100A

ms

SLIPFLANGE

AA

SLIPFLANGEAA20FLRF-100

===>> Ends Incompatible : Type SO Rate 20 and Type BW Rate 5 ... 100A

ms

100A

ms

NIPPLE PIPE

145.2

AA

NIPPLEAA5BW-100

AB

PIPEAB40PE-100

==================== Material Information ==================== QTY

SIZE

STOCKNO

MCCS

DESCRIPTION

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------290.4

100A

PIPEAB40PE-100

WT=6mm PIPE, PE SEAMLESS TO API 5L GRADE B

330


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

100AX100A BRANAA40BW-100

TEE, BUTT-WELD STRAIGHT STEEL ASTM A234 GRADE WP B MATCH PIPE

2

100A

NIPPLEAA5BW-100

NIPPLE, BUTT-WELD STEEL ASTM A105

2

2

1

100A

100A

100A

SLIPFLANGEAA20FLR

FLANGE, SLIP-ON STEEL AS

F-100

TM A105

GASKETAG20GKFF-10

GASKET, 1.5MM FLAT RING

0

CAF GRAPHITED BOTH SIDES

GATEAA20FLRF-100

GATE VALVE, FLANGED RAIS ED FACE STEEL ASTM A105

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------4

CFD

33AA30100


Errors in the Pipeline Network Report In addition to information about the pipeline connections and the existing pipe objects, the Pipeline Network report also displays the following types of warning messages: •

Missing gaskets and flanges for fittings in the upstream or downstream direction

•

Missing corner fittings in the case of a pipe vertex modeled as a corner fitting

•

Mismatch in end types for a fitting in the upstream or downstream direction

•

Violations in the design rule about the minimum clamp length at the start or end of a pipe piece

•

Violations in the design rule about the minimum or maximum pipe segment length

•

Mismatch in any of the pipeline label formats

331


A piping model with two pipelines is shown in the next figure:

•

The 50A-MS-STEAM-1111-ES (magenta) pipeline is modeled under assembly ASM0001.ASM.

•

The 40A-RW-WATER-2222-EN (green) pipeline is modeled under the WATER2222.ASM assembly, that is, a sub-assembly of ASM0001.ASM. The corner fitting for the 40A-RW-WATER-2222-EN (green) pipeline is missing at the first branch. The valve does not have gaskets and flanges for fittings in the upstream and downstream direction.

These errors are reported as shown: =================== Network Information =================== LABEL

FROM

TO

50A-RW-WATER-2222-EN 50A-MS-STEAM-11111-ES UNDEFINED SIZE

MAIN 1

SPEC

NAME

LENGTH

MATL.

ANGLE

CODE

SIZE

SPEC

50A

ms

STOCKNO

50A-MS-STEAM-11111-ES UNDEFINED

===================================================================================

332


50A

ms

PIPE

1000.000

AB

PIPEAB40PE-50

50A

ms

PIPE

565.559

AB

PIPEAB40PE-50

50A

ms

GATE

AA

GATEAA20FLRF-100

===>> Missing ELBOW

===>> Missing upstream Flange/Gasket... ===>> Missing downstream Flange/Gasket... 50A

ms

PIPE

492.650

AB

PIPEAB40PE-50

50A

ms

ELBOW90LR

90.000

AA

ELBOW90LRAABW-50

50A

ms

PIPE

823.800

AB

PIPEAB40PE-50


SIZE

STOCKNO

MCCS

DESCRIPTION

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2882.010

50A

PIPEAB40PE-50

WT=3.9mm PIPE, PE SEAMLESS TO API 5L GRADE B

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

50A

ELBOW90LRAABW-50

90 LR ELBOW, BUTT-WELD SCH 40 STEEL A23

1

50A

GATEAA20FLRF-50

GATE VALVE, FLANGED RAISED FACE STEEL ASTM A105

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4

CFD

33AA30100


To Change the Pipeline Network Report Format 1. Click PIPING > Info. The Report Pipeline dialog box opens. 2. Click

, or under Type select Pipeline to create a pipeline network report.

to change the default format of the 3. Under Select Report Format, click report. The Report Format dialog box opens. a. Under Name, type a name for the new report format or select an existing format name from the list.

333


b. Under Parameters, select the parameters that you want to display in the new report. All the available parameters are displayed in the Parameters box. You can also specify the order of the columns to be displayed in the report from the left to the right and the width of each column. Under Columns, all parameters selected from the Parameters list are displayed under the Name, Width, and Parameter columns. Note: Use

to move a selected field from the Parameters box into the

to move a selected field from the Columns box Columns box. Use back to the Parameters box. to shift the selected field in the Columns box in the upward Use direction. Similarly, use to shift the selected field in the downward direction. The fields are displayed from the left to the right in the report based on the specified order. c. To include a tally for a pipe, fitting, and bolt and nut at the end of the pipeline network report, under Tally, select: Pipe to add a pipe tally. Fitting to add a fitting tally. Bolt & Nut to add a bolt and nut tally. d. Click

to save the format.

By default, the format is saved in the pipe_info_fmt.ptd file in your working directory. You can use this format to create the subsequent pipeline network reports. 4. Click


Example: Pipeline Network Report with Changed Format =================== Network Information =================== LABEL STEAM-4-100A

NAME MAIN 1

FROM

TO

SIZE

SPEC

STEAM-3-100A

STEAM-5-100A

100A

ms

CONDENSER-P3

CONDENSER-P2

SPECIFICATION STEAM-3-100A

SIZE

BoltNutCode

BoltNutQty

CONDENSER-P2

====================================================================

334


PIPE

ms

100A

BRAN

ms

100AX100A

PIPE

ms

100A

SLIPFLANGE

ms

100A

GASKET

ms

100A

CHECK

ms

100A

GASKET

ms

100A

SLIPFLANGE

ms

100A

PIPE

ms

100A

BRAN

ms

100AX100A

*PIPE

ms

100A

BRAN

ms

100AX80A

*PIPE

ms

100A

BRANCH 1.1

APNT1

CFB

16

CFE

4

CFB

16

APNT3

-------------------------------------------------------------------*PIPE

ms

100A

SLIPFLANGE

ms

100A

GASKET

ms

100A

GATE

ms

100A

GASKET

ms

100A

SLIPFLANGE

ms

100A

*PIPE

ms

100A

BRAN

ms

100AX100A

BRANCH 1.2

APNT2

CFB

16

CFD

4

CFB

16

APNT3

---------------------------------------------------------------------PIPE

ms

BRANCH 1.3

100A CONDENSER-P3

APNT0

---------------------------------------------------------------------PIPE BRANCH 1.4

ms

80A APNT3

STEAM-5-100A

---------------------------------------------------------------------335



SIZE

STOCKNO

MCCS

DESCRIPTION

---------------------------------------------------------------------51772.004 100A

PIPEAB40PE-100

WT=6.00 mm PIPE,PE SEAMLESS TO API 5L GRADE B

1139.600

PIPEAB40PE-080

WT=5.5mm PIPE, PE SEAMLESS TO API 5L GRADE B

80A

-----------------------------------------------------------------------2

100AX100A BRANAA40BW-100

4 STEEL

100A

TEE, BUTT-WELD STRAIGHT STEEL ASTM A234 GRADE WP B MATCH PIPE

SLIPFLANGEAA20FLR

FLANGE, SLIP-ON AS

F-100 4

100A

TM A105

GASKETAG20GKFF-10

GASKET, 1.5MM FLAT RING

0

CAF GRAPHITED BOTH SIDES

1

100A

CHECKAA20FLRF-100

CHECK VALVE, FLANGED RAISED FACE SWING STEEL AST M A105

1

100AX80A

BRANAA40BW-100X08

TEE, BUTT-WELD REDUCING

0

STEEL ASTM A234

GRADE WP B MATCH PIPE 1

100A

GATEAA20FLRF-100

GATE VALVE, FLANGED RAISED FACE STEEL ASTM A105

1 100AX100A ----------------------------------------------------------------------4 CFE 33AA20100 BOLT NUT ASTM CS 114 4

336

CFD

33AA30100



Assigning and Reporting Bolt Nut Information The bolt nut code information is assigned and reported in the Pipeline Network report as follows: 1. A bolt nut code for valves and flanges is defined under the Bolt_Nut_Code column in the auto-selection file, for example, ms_asfile.ptd file. The same code is displayed by default and applied to fittings during insertion. 2. The quantity-related information, MCCS code of the bolt nut, and the path to the MCAT_FILE corresponding to each bolt nut code is available in the piping_bolt_nut_select.ptd file. 3. The boltnut/bolt_nut_mcat.ptd, that is the MCAT_FILE, contains details of the bolt nut material and the bulk item name for each MCCS code of the bolt nut specified in the piping_bolt_nut_select.ptd file. Thus, for a selected bolt nut code, the MCCS code, the material description, and quantity for each bolt nut are displayed in the Bolt Nut summary section in a userdefined pipeline report.

Reporting the Bolt Nut Quantity for Fittings The Bolt Nut Selection file, piping_bolt_nut_select.ptd, specifies the total number of bolts and nuts required for the main fitting and for the flanges mated to the main fitting. The bolt nut quantity is reported in the Pipeline Network report under Bolt Nut Summary. •

For fittings with two mated flanges, the bolt nut codes assigned to the main fitting and the two flanges may be different. The bolt nut quantity reported in this case depends on the bolt nut code assigned to the main fitting only. A typical valve fitting with mated flanges is shown in the next figure.

1 Flange fitting - 1 2 Main fitting 3 Flange fitting - 2 337


For two mated flanges, the total bolt nut quantity reported is the sum of half the quantity from both the flanges. o

For mated flanges, the quantity of bolt nuts required for one flange is six and for other flange is eight. The bolt nut quantity reported in this case is seven.

A typical pair of mated flanges is shown in the next figure.

1 Flange fitting - 1 2 Flange fitting - 2 •

For group fittings, the bolt nut quantity reported is based on the following rules:

338

o

For the two main fittings, located at the two ends of the group, the quantity specified in the Bolt Nut Master catalog file (bolt_nut_mcat.ptd) is multiplied by a factor of 0.75.

o

For the main fittings, located not at the ends of the group, the quantity specified in the Bolt Nut Master catalog file (bolt_nut_mcat.ptd) is multiplied by a factor of 0.50.

o

The end flanges of the group fitting are not counted as main fittings, have higher priority, and include their bolt nut quantity.


A group fitting with three main fittings (globe valves) and two flanges at the ends of the group is shown in the next figure.

1 Flange fitting -1 2 Main fitting - 1 3 Main fitting - 2 4 Main fitting - 3 5 Flange fitting - 2 The bolt nut code is assigned as shown in the following table. Fitting

Bolt_Nut_Code

Quantity

Reported Quantity

Main Fitting 1 (End1 of group)

CFA

16

Main Fitting 2 (Middle of group)

CFA

16

0.50 X 16 = 8

Main Fitting 3 (End2 of group)

CFB

12

0.75 x 12 = 8

Flange Fitting 1 (End1)

CFF

8

0

Flange Fitting 2 (End2)

CFF

6

0

0.75 X 16 = 12

339


In the Bolt Nut Summary report, the quantities reported are: 1. CFA

Quantity - 20

2. CFB

Quantity -

8

Note: Bolt nut codes with zero quantity are not reported in the bolt nut summary.

Schematic Consistency Check Report About Schematic Consistency Check Report The Schematic Consistency Check report provides information about the correctness of a 3D pipe model against the 2D schematic information stored in an XML file. You can generate reports for all typical pipeline configurations in a complex piping design. The report is generated by comparing the schematic information and the model information of a pipeline. You can check the schematic consistency of a model using one of the following methods: •

By selecting an XML file: Pro/PIPING uses the 2D Schematic Diagram data stored in the XML file as a reference.

•

By selecting a pipeline from a 3D model: Pro/PIPING uses the 3D model as a reference.

Note: You can use the schematic information in the XML file only if: •

The piping_schematic_driven configuration option is set to yes.

•

The piping design mode is specification-driven.

To specify an absolute path to be used as the start location for the XML file selection and look-up, set the piping_schematic_xml_dir configuration option to the required path. The default path for the XML file is the Pro/ENGINEER working directory. To generate an accurate report, you must designate all the equipments.

To Create a Schematic Consistency Check Report 1. Click PIPING > Info. The Report Pipeline dialog box opens.

, or under Type select Schematic Check, to check pipelines for 2. Click schematic consistency. The Schematic Consistency Check dialog box opens. 3. Under Pipeline Selection Option, do one of the following: o

Select a pipeline or pipelines directly from the graphic screen, model tree, or from the piping system tree. In this case, the 3D model is considered as a reference for checking the consistency of the 2D Schematic Diagram. The box under the Select pipeline(s) option lists all the selected pipelines.

340


Note: If you select a pipeline that is not associated with an XML file, Pro/PIPING rejects the selection with a warning. or o

Select From XML File to choose schematic pipelines present in the XML file where the data in the XML file is based on the 2D Schematic Diagram. In this case, the information in the XML file is considered as a reference for checking the consistency of the 3D piping model. Click

to select an XML file from your current working directory.

Note: Use the piping_schematic_xml_dir configuration option to change the default directory path for selecting the XML file. The box under the Schematic Pipelines option lists the pipelines that are present in the specified XML file as well as in the model. o

Click to select all pipelines displayed in the box or use the mouse to select only the desired pipelines.

o

Click

to clear all selected pipelines in the box.

4. Under Actions, do one of the following: Click to generate the Consistency Check Report for the selected pipelines in a separate window, and close the Schematic Consistency Check dialog box. or Click to generate the Consistency Check Report for the selected pipelines in a separate window, and then continue checking the schematic consistency for other pipelines using the Schematic Consistency Check dialog box. or Click

to cancel the operation and close the dialog box.

Schematic Consistency Check Report Format The Schematic Consistency Check report is generated by comparing the schematic information and the model information of a pipeline. The report consists of four columns; Item, Schematic Info, Status, and Model Info. The report provides information in the following sequence: •

General information about the pipeline such as Mnemonic, Number, Size, and Spec. In the report, each pipeline is separated by a continuous dotted line while within a pipeline report, each extension is separated by a blank line.

341


The information related to the main extension followed by each branch extension. The branch extensions are identified using the string, BRxx DETAILS, where xx is the extension number.

•

Within each extension, the connected series and their constituent components are reported using the flow direction and the sequence in which they appear on the pipeline.

•

Each element is reported in a row. The schematic and model information are reported under the respective Schematic Info and Model Info columns. The Status column is used to indicate the result of the consistency check.

•

The following is the legend for the Status column:

•

Legend

Description

Blank space ( )

Item is identical between schematic and model

'x' character

Item is mismatched between schematic and model

'+' character

Additional item in the model

'-' character

Item is missing from the model

If a series in the schematic information does not match a corresponding series in the model, the series is listed separately under a section, Series in Schematic Pipeline not matched in Model. The series is reported for every pipeline that is processed.

Workflow for Checking Schematic Consistency The following figure shows a schematic diagram that was created using Routed Systems Designer. In the figure, B1 and B2 are pipeline branches and T1, T2, and T3 are equipments.

342


1 WATER-1 2 GATE •

After creating the schematic diagram, use Routed Systems Designer to export the schematic information to an XML file.

•

Use Pro/PIPING to create an equivalent 3D piping model from the schematic diagram. The 3D piping model is shown in the following figure where T1, T2, and T3 are equipments.

1 100A - RW - WATER - 1 2 GATE 3 ELBOW 343


Use Pro/PIPING (click PIPING > Info) to perform a consistency check on a 3D model against the schematic information in an XML file, that is generated using Routed Systems Designer. The generated Schematic Consistency Check report is as shown:

======================================================================== ======== ITEM

SCHEMATIC INFO

STATUS

MODEL INFO

======================================================================== ======== PIPELINE 1

WATER-1

WATER-100A-RW-

MNEMONIC

WATER

WATER

NUMBER

1

1

SIZE

100A

100A

SPEC

RW

RW

FROM

T1-N6

T1-N6

FITTING

GATE

GATE

BRANCH IN)

BRANCH_2

X

APNT2 (STUB-

BRANCH IN)

BRANCH_1

X

APNT0 (STUB-

TO

UNDEFINED

UNDEFINED

BR1 DETAILS FROM IN)

BRANCH_2

X

FITTING

GATE

-

TO

T2-N5

APNT2 (STUB-

T2-N5

BR2 DETAILS FROM IN)

BRANCH_1

X

APNT0 (STUB-

FITTING

GATE

GATE

TO

T3-N5

T3-N5

BR3 DETAILS FROM

+

T3-N6

FITTING

+

GATE

TO

+

UNDEFINED

Series in Schematic Pipeline not matched in Model

344


FROM

T3-N1

SEGMENT

PIPE

FITTING

GATE

SEGMENT

PIPE

TO

UNDEFINED

Note: 1) The mismatch reported for the junctions, (BRANCH_2 .vs. APNT2 and BRANCH_1 .vs. APNT0), only indicates that the tags at these junctions are mismatched. Whereas the checking algorithm is designed to identify these as matched junctions for overall consistency check. 2) A gate valve is missing on branch pipeline at APNT2 to T2-N5 and the same is reported. 3) Extension BR3 DETAILS is additional in the model, as Nozzle N1 of T3 on the schematic is incorrectly modeled as N6 of T3 in the model. 4) It is due the same reason, the report outputs the schematic series, T3-N1 to UNDEFINED, as an unmatched series. 5) Mismatch reported at item (3) and (4) above can be resolved by correcting the nozzle identification of T3-N6 to T3-N1.

Glossary Glossary of Terms Term

Definition

Convert from Non Specification-Driven Mode to SpecificationDriven Mode

Assignment of Specification-Driven mode parameters (such as Specification, Size, and Schedule) to a pipeline created in Non Specification-Driven mode.

Field Weld

Welding operation performed at the actual location inside a Ship or Plant. Piece spool pieces fabricated in the shop yard will be assembled inside a Ship or Plant by welding the pipe ends assigned as field welds.

Flow Direction Symbol

An arrow-like temporary symbol that represents the fluid flow direction in a pipeline.

Specification-Driven Piping (Specification Driven Method)

Piping design as practiced by designers in the Plant design, Shipbuilding, and Aerospace design industries. This method of piping design is driven by a set of piping specifications and design rules. The Non Specification-Driven Pro/PIPING product does not support this method of piping design. 345


Specification-Driven piping is being implemented as part of this project. Linestock

A Pro/PIPING parameter that is automatically created for each combination of specification, size, and schedule. The created parameter is associated with the corresponding pipe segment features.

Mnemonic

System or fluid where the specification will be applied.

Non SpecificationDriven Piping (Linestock Method)

Piping design as practiced by the Non SpecificationDriven product design industry. This method of Piping allows maximum flexibility and is based on the pipeline Linestock which is user definable at run time. The existing Non Specification-Driven Pro/PIPING product supports this method of piping design.

P & ID

Piping and Instrumentation diagram in 2-D that details the pipeline connectivity, placement of fittings and flanges.

Pipeline Elements or Pipe Elements

Pipeline segments, pipe bends, and pipe fittings are collectively referred to as the Pipeline or individual Pipe Elements.

Pipe Fitting

Physical components, such as valves, flanges, gaskets, elbows, reducers, and so on, that are used to construct a pipeline.

Pipe Piece or Pipe Spool

A manufacturable piece of pipeline, consisting of pipe segments and fittings, apportioned from a complex pipeline configuration.

Pipe Piece Cutting or Piece Cutting

A modeling functionality applied during the final stages of Piping Design to split a complex pipeline into

Pipeline Start

A terminal location on a pipeline where fluid enters into the pipeline from equipment or another pipeline.

Pipeline End

A terminal location on a pipeline where fluid leaves the pipeline and flows into equipment, such as another pipeline, drain, or vent.

Pipeline Junction

A branch location on a pipeline where there may be an inline branch fitting (equal or reducing size), stub-in branch fitting (half coupling or weldolets), or pipe stub-in.

346


Pipeline Series

A pipeline portion consisting of pipeline elements between a Pipeline Start and Junction, or Junction and Junction, or Junction and End, of a pipeline. Flow direction applies to entire pipeline series and accordingly, an entire pipeline series is associated with only one flow direction.

Pipeline

A collection of many connected series and junctions that represent a single pipeline, such as all the pipe segments and fittings that are associated with a single pipeline feature.

Pipeline Extension

A set of series that are connected together and have the same flow direction.

Pipe Piece

A pipe piece is a set of pipe segments between corners, free ends, or between a corner and a free end.

Piping Specification

Defines the pipes and fittings that can be used for specified fluid operating conditions, such as fluid pressure and temperature, in a particular project; used to implement specification driven pipe modeling in the Specification-Driven version of the Pro/PIPING product.

Routed Systems Designer

Schematic diagram package offered by PTC.

Schematic

Piping and Instrumentation diagram in 2-D that details the pipeline connectivity, placement of fittings and flanges.

Selection Name

User specified unique name that will be used in the fitting auto-selection process to select a fitting in the piping specification.

Shop Weld

Welding operation performed at the shop yard of a pipe fabrication yard.

Trimmed Elbow

Standard angle elbow trimmed to certain degree to fit in a vertex/corner with non-standard angle.

XML

Extensible Markup Language (XML). A format for structured documents and data.

347

Index cut pipe

B

block ...................................... 237

bend data bending angle ......................... 313

pipe reference cutting ............... 225

bending point .......................... 307

plane reference cutting ............. 224

bending radius ........................ 313

single location cutting using fitting port reference ....................... 226

flange angle ............................ 315

single location cutting using placement ............................ 223

flange twist angle .................... 317 node number........................... 306 overview................................. 306 pipe cutting length ................... 312

cut pipe ..................................... 223 D design rules

bend data .................................. 306

checking ................................. 129

bend table

parameters.............................. 127

assigning ................................ 143 data ....................................... 141 defining .................................. 138 deleting .................................. 140 modifying ............................... 140

violations .........................131, 132 design rules................................ 129 drawing ..................................... 263 E equipment Nozzles

reading to a model................... 140

routing from ............................ 174

showing.................................. 140

routing from port...................... 174

writing to a file ........................ 141 bend table ................................. 137 C

routing to port ......................... 175 equipment Nozzles ...................... 174 F

configuration options setting ..................................... 11

fabrication

configuration options..................... 10

cutting pipes..... 223, 225, 226, 230, 231, 237

convert .............................. 145, 148

deleting pipe piece cuts ............. 242

corner type changing and updating ............. 119

fabrication.................................. 222 fitting

modifying ........................ 216, 218

branch .................................... 200

corner type ................................ 215

checking end type compatibility.. 209 349


deleting .................................. 210

annotating............................... 292

inserting .......................... 195, 204

installation drawing ..................... 286

key ........................................ 208

insulation quilt ............................... 9

modifying ............................... 209

ISOGEN

overlap checking...................... 215

data control files ...................... 302

redefining ............................... 213

generating............................... 264

replacing ................................ 213

ISOGEN ..................................... 263

schematic ........................ 262, 263

L

fitting............................................ 1

layer

fitting geometry ........................... 88

overview ................................. 159

fitting library file

viewing ................................... 159

overview................................... 85

layer ......................................... 159

fitting library file........................... 85

P

fitting parameter .......................... 99

parallel pipe piece cutting......231, 232

fitting port

pipe insulation

creating.................................... 90

assigning..........................246, 249

requirements............................. 93

deleting .................................. 248

fitting port ................................... 89

modifying ................................ 247

flexible routing .................... 166, 167

redefining................................ 251

flow direction

reporting ................................. 249

displaying and hiding................ 190

pipe insulation ............................ 246

flow units................................ 190

pipe segment

reversing ................................ 219

modifying ................................ 216

rules ...................................... 187

reporting weight and COG information ........................... 323

violations ......................... 191, 220 flow direction ............................. 186

suppressing and resuming ......... 192 pipe segment.............................. 149

I inlet port specifying ................................. 97 inlet port ..................................... 97 installation drawing 350

pipe solid creating .............................. 9, 254 erasing ................................... 254 pipe solid ................................... 253

Index

pipe spool.................................. 243

displaying from active assembly .... 8

pipe spool drawing...................... 300

piping system tree ......................... 4

pipeline

R

associating an xml file .............. 258

report

creating.................................. 149

creating .................................. 320

deleting .................................. 151

pipeline network................329, 333

highlighting using piping system tree .............................................. 7

schematic consistency check ..... 340, 341

merging.................................. 152

report ........................................ 319

renaming ................................ 152

routing branch .................................... 176

reorganizing using piping system tree......................................... 7

extend ....... 167, 168, 169, 171, 172

resuming ................................ 159

follow ..................................... 175

routing using schematic information .......................................... 261

inserting a datum point ......180, 181 referencing a pipe edge............. 162

suppressing ............................ 158

route pipe menu....................... 160

pipeline ..................................... 149

setting a start point ... 160, 161, 176

piping assembly activating ............................... 145 converting ................ 145, 146, 148 inserting and modifying in another assembly ...................... 181, 182 piping assembly ......................... 144 piping specification database auto-selection files ..................... 60

routing ...................................... 159 S schematic-driven pipelines designating.............................. 260 routing.................................... 261 schematic-driven pipelines ........... 257 specification break

master catalog files .................... 24

inserting ................................. 157

project data files........................ 56

specification break ...................... 157

specification directory files .......... 57

specification override

piping specification database.......... 23

fitting insertion ........................ 195

piping system tree

fitting replacement ................... 213

accessing.................................... 5

specification override ................... 195

customizing .............................. 10

specification-driven piping

351


accessing.................................... 2

spool ......................................... 243

configuring...........................10, 11

spool label

overview..................................... 3

creating .................................. 243

specification-driven piping ............... 1

deleting .................................. 245

spool

modifying ................................ 244

displaying ............................... 246

spool label.................................. 243

simplified representation........... 245

standards................................... 106

352

Pro Piping Help Topics

Recommend Documents